SERVICE

MANUAL
REVISION 0

MAY. 2000 RY8-13A2-000

COPYRIGHT  2000 CANON INC. CANON CLBP400 REV.0 MAY. 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC

Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon

Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confi-
dential information.

Prepared by

PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS QUALITY ADVANCEMENT DIV.

PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION DEPT.

CANON INC.

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-City, Ibaraki-Pref. 302-8501, Japan

 PREFACE

PREFACE

This service manual contains basic information required for after-sales service of the laser beam
printer CLBP-400 (hereinafter referred to as the "printer"). This information is vital to the serv-
ice technician in maintaining the high print quality and performance of the printer.
The paper feeder, duplexing unit and ethernet board which is prepared for the printer as
option, is also described in this manual.
The manual consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Product information

Features, specifications, and installation

Chapter 2: Operation and Timing

A description of the operating principles and timing sequences of the electrical and
mechanical systems.

Chapter 3: The Mechanical System

Explanation of mechanical operation, disassembly, reassembly and adjustment
procedures

Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures, reference values and adjustments, maintenance and
servicing, etc.

Appendix: General timing chart, general circuit diagram, etc.

Information in the manual is subject to change as the product is improved or redesigned. All
relevant information in such cases will be supplied in the Service Information Bulletins.
A thorough understanding of this printer, based on information in this Manual and Service
Information bulletins, is required for maintaining its performance and for locating and repairing
the causes of malfunctions.

P-1
PREFACE

DTP system
This manual was produced on an Apple PowerMacintosh 9500/200 personal computer and output by an
Apple LaserWriter 16/600 PS laser beam printer; final pages were printed on AGFA Selectset avantra 25.
All graphics were produced with Macromedia FreeHand (J), and all documents and page layouts were
created with QuarkXPress (E).
The video images were captured with SONY degital video camcorder and Radius PhotoDV capture board
system, and modified with Adobe Photoshop (J).

P-2
 PREFACE

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION
I. FEATURES................................ 1-1 VI. MAINTENANCE AND
II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 1-2 SERVICING BY THE
III. SAFETY INFORMATION........ 1-5 CUSTOMER .............................. 1-28
IV. PARTS OF THE PRINTER .......... 1-6 VII. OPERATION .............................. 1-30
V. INSTALLATION ......................... 1-11

CHAPTER 2 OPERATION AND TIMING

I. BASIC OPERATION ................... 2-1 V. PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM ........... 2-77

A. Functions ............................ 2-1 A. Outline ................................ 2-77
B. Basic Sequence of Operations B. Paper Pick-up ...................... 2-79
............................................ 2-2 C. Feed Unit............................. 2-86
C. Power-on Sequence .............. 2-3 D. Fixing and Delivery Unit ...... 2-87
II. ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 2-4 E. Paper Jam Detection ........... 2-91
A. DC Controller PCB ............... 2-4 VI. VIDEO CONTROL SYSTEM ........ 2-93
B. Fixing Control Circuit.......... 2-14 A. Video Controller PCB ........... 2-93
C. High-voltage Power Supply B. Control Panel....................... 2-99
Circuit ................................. 2-20 C. Self-Test .............................. 2-100
D. Low-voltage Power Supply D. Sleep Mode .......................... 2-100
Circuit ................................. 2-25 E. Power OFF Mode.................. 2-101
E. Video Interface Control ....... 2-28 F. List of Status/Error Display. 2-102
F. Other Control ...................... 2-30 VII. DUPLEXING UNIT ..................... 2-103
III. LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM ....... 2-37 A. Outline ................................ 2-103
A. Laser System ....................... 2-37 B. Reversing and Re-feed
B. Laser Control Circuit ........... 2-39 Operation ............................ 2-106
C. Scanner System ................... 2-42 C. Paper Jam Detection ........... 2-111
IV. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM.... 2-44 VIII. PAPER FEEDER ........................ 2-113
A. Outline ................................ 2-44 A. Outline ................................ 2-113
B. Operation ............................ 2-45 B. Pick-up and Feed Operation. 2-114
C. Print Process ....................... 2-63 C. Paper Jam Detection ........... 2-115
D. Image Stabilization Control . 2-74

CHAPTER 3 THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM

I. INTRODUCTION ........................ 3-1 A. Locations............................. 3-4
A. Outline ................................ 3-1 B. External Covers ................... 3-5
B. Removal of the Toner Cartridge C. Control Panel....................... 3-9
with Manual Operation ........ 3-2 III. MAIN UNITS ............................. 3-10
II. EXTERNALS ............................. 3-4 A. Laser/Scanner Unit.............. 3-10

P-3
PREFACE

B. Drum Drive Unit .................. 3-11 H. Power Switch ....................... 3-38

C. Rotary Drive Unit ................ 3-12 I. Test Print Switch................. 3-38
D. Multi-purpose Tray Pick-up J. ITB Unit Life Detection Sensor
Unit ..................................... 3-13 ............................................ 3-39
E. Feed Unit............................. 3-15 K. Registration Paper Detection
F. Fixing Unit .......................... 3-15 Sensor ................................. 3-39
G. Delivery Unit ....................... 3-16 L. Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper
H. Drum Cartridge Drawer Unit 3-16 Sensor ................................. 3-40
I. ITB unit Drawer Unit ........... 3-18 M. Multi-purpose Tray Paper
IV. MAIN PARTS ............................. 3-19 Sensor ................................. 3-40
A. Locations............................. 3-19 N. ITB Home Position Sensor ... 3-41
B. Cassette Pick-up Roller ....... 3-20 O. Fixing Unit Pressure Release
C. Cassette Feed Roller ........... 3-20 Sensor ................................. 3-41
D. Cassette Separation Roller... 3-21 P. Paper Delivery Sensor.......... 3-42
E. Multi-purpose Tray Pick-up Q. Cassette Paper Sensor ......... 3-42
Roller .................................. 3-21 R. Face-down Tray Paper
F. Separation Pad .................... 3-22 Full Sensor .......................... 3-43
G. Secondary Transfer Roller ... 3-24 S. Developing Rotary Home
H. Upper Thermoswitch............ 3-24 Position Sensor.................... 3-43
I. Lower Thermoswitch ........... 3-25 T. Toner Cartridge Contact
J. Upper Thermistor ................ 3-25 Sensor ................................. 3-44
K. Lower Thermistor ................ 3-26 U. Toner Level Sensor .............. 3-44
L. Upper Fixing Heater............. 3-26 V. Waste Toner Full Sensor ...... 3-45
M. Lower Fixing Heater ............ 3-27 W. Density Sensor .................... 3-45
N. Upper Fixing Roller.............. 3-28 X. OHT / Sensor ...................... 3-46
O. Lower Fixing Roller.............. 3-30 VI. SOLENOIDS/CLUTCHES ........... 3-47
P. 92-fan/60-fan Air Filter ....... 3-32 A. Locations............................. 3-47
Q. 40-fan Air Filter................... 3-32 B. Multi-purpose Tray Pick-up
V. SWITCHES/SENSORS ............... 3-33 Solenoids ............................. 3-48
A. Locations............................. 3-33 C. Cassette Pick-up Solenoid.... 3-48
B. ITB unit Drawer Open Detection D. Ragistration Clutch ............. 3-49
Switch ................................. 3-35 E. ITB Unit Contact Clutch ...... 3-49
C. Toner Cartridge Door Open F. ITB Cleaning Roller Contact
Detection Switch ................. 3-35 Clutch ................................. 3-50
D. Drum Cartridge Drawer Open G. Secondary Transfer Roller Contact
Detection Switch ................. 3-36 Clutch ................................ 3-51
E. +24V Interruption Switch 1 . 3-36 VII. MOTORS/FANS ...................... 3-52
F. +24V Interruption Switch 2 . 3-37 A. Locations............................. 3-52
G. Cassette Paper Size Detection B. Fixing Motor Unit ................ 3-53
Switch ................................. 3-37 C. Pick-up Motor ...................... 3-54

P-4
 PREFACE

D. Developing Rotary Motor .... 3-54 Unit.......................................... 3-62

E. Drum Motor ......................... 3-55 F. Developing PCB ................... 3-62
F. Toner Cartridge Motor Unit . 3-55 G. Feed PCB ............................. 3-63
G. 92-fan .................................. 3-56 H. Multi purpose Tray PCB ....... 3-63
H. 60-fan .................................. 3-57 I. Video Controller PCB ........... 3-64
I. 40-fan .................................. 3-58 IX. DUPLEXING UNIT ..................... 3-66
VIII. ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS..... 3-59 A. External Covers ................... 3-66
A. Locations............................. 3-59 B. Motors/Solenoids ................ 3-69
B. DC Controller PCB ............... 3-60 C. Sensors................................ 3-72
C. Connector PCB .................... 3-61 D. Electronic Components ....... 3-76
D. Low-voltage Power Supply X. PAPER FEEDER ........................ 3-78
Unit ..................................... 3-61 A. Locations............................. 3-78
E. High-voltage Power Supply

CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING
I. PREFACE.................................. 4-1 Switches on PCBs ................ 4-58
A. Malfunction Diagnosis VIII. MAINTENANCE AND
Flowchart ........................... 4-1 SERVICING ............................... 4-64
B. Initial Check........................ 4-4 A. Periodic Replacement
C. Test Print ............................ 4-6 Parts ................................... 4-64
II. IMAGE DEFECTS ...................... 4-9 B. Expected Service Life of
III. PAPER JAMS Consumable Parts ................ 4-64
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-21 C. Periodic Service................... 4-65
IV. PAPER TRANSPORT D. Cleaning during a Service
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-28 Visit .................................... 4-65
V. MALFUNCTION E. Standard Tools..................... 4-69
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-30 F. Special Tools ....................... 4-70
VI. MALFUNCTION STATUS G. List of lubricants & cleaners 4-71
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-31 IX. SERVICE MODE ........................ 4-72
VII. MEASUREMENT AND A. Outline ................................ 4-72
ADJUSTMENT........................... 4-54 B. Mode description ................. 4-77
A. Mechanical Adjustment ....... 4-54 X. LOCATION OF CONNECTORS.... 4-84
B. Electrical Adjustment .......... 4-55
C. Variable Resistors(VR),
Test Pins, Jumpers and

P-5
PREFACE

APPENDIX
I. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1 IV. MESSAGE TABLE...................... A-37
II. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ... A-25 A. Outline ................................ A-37
III. LIST OF SIGNALS ..................... A-31 B. Message Table...................... A-39
A. DC Controller ...................... A-31

P-6
 CHAPTER 1

PRODUCT INFORMATION

I. FEATURES................................ 1-1 VI. MAINTENANCE AND

II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 1-2 SERVICING BY THE
III. SAFETY INFORMATION........ 1-5 CUSTOMER .............................. 1-28
IV. PARTS OF THE PRINTER .......... 1-6 VII. OPERATION .............................. 1-30
V. INSTALLATION ......................... 1-11
 CHAPTER 1

I. FEATURES
1. Canon Page Description Language
Canon Page Description Language (CPDL), Canon's unique PDL, provides high-speed color print-
ing and superior image quality. Designed specifically for Windows OSs, CPDL corresponds to a
wide variety of computers and applications.

2. Auto-color function
Conventional machines determine whether the color mode or monochrome in per job. This
means that with the color mode selected, a color and monochrome mixed job is printed in the
color processing, even though the job contains a black only page. This results in long process-
ing time.
The auto-color function has resolved the problem to automatically identify data containing
both color and monochrome within a single job in order to print the monochrome page with only
a black toner, thus enables high-speed print processing.

3. High resolution and high-speed printing

This printer features continuos tone color output at 600 dpi/multiple-color-level halftoning with
a standard memory configuration of 12 Mbytes.
With Intel's i960HD/50 MHz Processor, this printer performs high-speed printing at 4 full
color pages per minute and 16 ppm monochrome in A4 or letter size.

4. Flexible paper handling

The universal cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper) and multi-purpose tray (100 sheets of 80
g/m2 paper) allow the printer to handle various types of paper such as plain paper, OHT, labels,
postcards, and envelopes.
The optional paper feeder (500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper) enables, three-way paper pick-up
and a large volume of printing.

5. Duplex printing
With the optional duplexing unit installed, this printer is capable of automatic color duplex
printing.

6. Multiple interfaces
This printer supports automatic interface switching between an IEEE 1284 compliant parallel
interface and an optional expansion interface. This realizes an interface environment that frees
users from interface settings.

7. Compatibility with various networks

With the optional Ethernet board, the printer can support the following network protocols.
• TCP/IP
• Apple Talk
• IPX/SPX
• NetBIOS/NetBEUI

1-1
CHAPTER 1

II. SPECIFICATIONS

A. Printer
1. Printer engine
1) Type Desktop page printer
2) Printing method Electrophotography
3) Printing speed (Note 1) About 4 pages/min (A4, full color)
About 16 pages/min (A4, mono-color)
4) First print time (Note 2) 37 seconds or less (A4, full color)
26 seconds or less (A4, mono-color)
5) Wait time (Note 3) 250 seconds or less
6) Resolution
Horizontal 600 dpi
Vertical 600 dpi
7) Image formation system
Laser Semiconductor laser
Scanning system Rotating six-faced prism mirror
Photosensitive medium OPC
Charging Roller charging
Exposure Laser scanning
Toner Non-magnetic single-component dry toner (Y/M/C), magnetic sin-
gle-component dry toner (Bk)
Development Toner projection development
Toner supply Replaceable Bk toner cartridge
The Bk toner cartridge can print about 9,000 A4- or Letter-size
sheets (if the average print coverage is a 4% image dot ratio with
the print density setting at midpoint.)
Replaceable Y, M, and C toner cartridges
The Y, M, and C toner cartridge can print about 6,000 A4- or
Letter-size sheets (if the average print coverage is a 4% image dot
ratio with the print density setting at midpoint.)
Transfer Primary transfer: Intermediate transfer belt
Secondary transfer: Secondary transfer roller
Separation Curvature
Cleaning The photosensitive drum is cleaned with a rubber blade, and the
intermediate transfer belt is cleaned with the ITB cleaning roller.
Fixing method Heated rollers (Upper heater: 450 W (240 V))
(Lower heater: 450 W (240 V))
8) Paper pick-up Multi-purpose tray
Cassette
Paper feeder (option)
Paper types Plain paper, labels, OHT (recommended by Canon) (Note 4),
envelopes, postcards
Paper size
Multi-purpose tray Plain paper (60-135 g/m2 Canon recommended paper) from 76.2
mm (width) x 127 mm (length) (minimum) to 216mm (width) x 356
mm (length) (maximum), COM10, Monarch, B5, C5, DL size
envelopes, and papers shown above
Cassette Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, B5, A5 size plain paper (60-105 g/m2
Canon recommended paper)

1-2
 CHAPTER 1

Multi-purpose tray capacity

Plain paper:
15 mm stack (About 100 sheets of 75g/m2 paper can be stacked.)
Envelope:
12 mm stack (About 15 to 20 COM10 size envelopes can be
stacked.)
Cassette capacity 25 mm stack (About 250 sheets of 75g/m2 paper can be stacked.)
Cassette type
Cassette Universal (Can adapt to Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, or A5 size)
9) Paper delivery Face-down/face-up
Face-down tray capacity About 200 sheets of 75g/m2 paper
Face-up tray capacity About 50 sheets of 75g/m2 paper
10) Duplex printing
Automatic duplex printing
Only plain paper (60-105 g/m2 Canon recommended paper) can be
printed on both sides automatically when the duplex unit (option)
is installed.
Manual duplex printing Not to be used.
11) Operating environment See Figure 1-5-1 in Section V, Installation.
12) Maximum power consumption
About 1100 W or less (220-240 V, room temperature of 20°C)
13) Noise level (Declared noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296)
Sound power level (1B = 10 dB) 6.8B or less (printing)
5.8B or less (standby)
Sound pressure level 53 dB or less (printing)
(Bystander position) 43 dB or less (standby)
14) Dimensions 500 (width) x 557 (depth) x 427 (height) mm
15) Weight About 48.0 kg (printer-including cassette)
About 1.4 kg (drum cartridge)
About 0.9 kg (Bk toner cartridge)
About 0.8 kg (Y, M, and C toner cartridges)
About 2.0 kg (ITB unit)
16) Power supply 220-240 V (50/60 Hz)
(Voltage tolerance ±10% or less)
17) Options Duplex unit, paper feeder, Ethernet Board

Notes: 1. Test print when the rated power supply voltage is input at a room temperature of
20°C
2. Time after the printer receives a PRINT signal from the video controller when it is
ready at an ambient temperature of 20°C until it ends printing and delivering an A4-
size paper onto the face-down tray.
3. Time from power-ON until the printer completes WAIT period at ambient temperature
of 20°C and the rated AC power source voltage.
4. OHT (OHT T-H1) for CLBP360PS cannot be used on this printer. As T-H1 is extreme-
ly thin and contains oil, it may cause roller wrapping jams in the fixing unit if it is
used on this printer which utilizes two fixing heaters and produces large amount of
heat.

1-3
CHAPTER 1

B. Video Controller
1) CPU 32-bit RISC processor: Intel FC80960HD-50
2) RAM Standard 12MB
Maximum 44MB
3) ROM 4MB
4) RAM DIMM slot 2
5) Host interface Standard: IEEE 1284 parallel interface
Option: Expansion interface (Ethernet)
6) PDL CPDL (Canon Printing Discription Language)
7) Resident fonts None

C. Options
1. Duplexing unit
1) Pick-up speed About 4 images (2 sheets) /min.(A4, full color)
About 10 images (5 sheets) /min.(A4, mono-color)
2) Paper types Letter, Legal, Executive, A4 size plain paper (60-105 g/m2 Canon
recommended paper)
3) Dimensions 500 (width) x 708 (depth) x 218 (height) mm
4) Weight About 13.0 kg
5) Power supply 220-240 V (50/60 Hz)
(Voltage tolerance ±10% or less)
DC5V (supplied from the printer)

2. Paper feeder
1) Pick-up speed About 4 pages/min.(A4, full color)
About 16 pages/min (A4, mono-color)
2) Paper types Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, B5, A5 size plain paper (60-105 g/m2
Canon recommended paper)
3) Dimensions 500 (width) x 559 (depth) x 125 (height) mm
4) Weight About 10.0 kg
5) Power supply DC24V (supplied from the printer)
DC5V (supplied from the printer)

3. Ethernet Board NB-4F

1) Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX
2) CPU AXIS: ETRAX100 R2 (100MHz), Built-in LAN controller
3) ROM 2MB
4) RAM 1MB
5) Dimensions 100 (width) x 100 (depth) x 24 (height) mm
6) Weight About 100 g
7) Power supply DC+3.3V (supplied from the printer)
8) Protocol IPX/SPX: TCP/IP, NetBIOS/NetBEUI, AppleTalk
9) Flame type IPX/SPX: 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet II, 802.2 SNAP
TCP/IP: Ethernet II
NetBIOS/NetBEUI: 802.2
AppleTalk: 802.2 SNAP (Phase II)
10) Print application IPX/SPX: Binary PServer, NDS PServer, NPrinter, RPrinter
TCP/IP: LPD, FTP, RAW, IPP
AppleTalk: CAP (Canon AppleTalk PrintServer)
NetBIOS/NetBEUI: NetBIOS/NetBEUI Port

Specifications are subject to change with product improvement.

1-4
 CHAPTER 1

III. SAFETY INFORMATION

A. Laser Safety
The laser/scanner unit emits invisible laser beam. DO NOT disassemble the unit as the laser
beam can possibly damage your eyes. The unit cannot be adjusted in the field. The following
label is attached to the cover of the unit:

DANGER Invisible laser radiation when open.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D'O UVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG. WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIOILE IN CASO DI APERTURA.
EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE.
EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO.
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYMATTOMALLE
LASERSATEILYLLE. ALA KATSO SATEESEEN.
OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRALEN.
USYNLIG LASER STRALING. NAR DENNE ER ABEN.
UNDGA BESTRALING.
USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL APNES.
UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN.

Figure 1-3-1

B. Toner Safety
Toner is a harmless substance composed of plastics and a pigment.
If you get toner on your skin or clothes, remove as much as possible with dry tissue and then
wash it with cold water.
If you wash in hot water, the toner gels and becomes hard to remove.
As toner easily decomposes vinyl material, do not let it come into contact with this material.

C. Ozone Safety
An infinitesimal amount of ozone gas (O3) is generated during applying transfer voltages from
the charging roller used in this printer. The ozone gas is emitted only when the printer is oper-
ating.
The printer meets the ozone emission standard decided by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
when it is shipped from the factory.

D. Power Supply Safety

Note that even if the power switch is turned OFF, the current still flows to the primary side of
the power supply unit of the printer.
Unplug the power cable before disassembling and reassembling the printer.

1-5
CHAPTER 1

IV. PARTS OF THE PRINTER

A. External View
1. External view of the printer

1 2

3
14
9 10
4 13
8
12
7
11
6

Figure 1-4-1

1: Toner cartridge cover

2: Face-down delivery slot
3: Control panel
4: Test print switch
5: Power switch
6: Universal cassette
7: ITB unit drawer
8: Multi-purpose tray
9: Drum cartridge drawer
10: Toner cartridge door unlock button
11: Power receptacle
12: Face-up tray
13: Delivery cover unit
14: Video interface cover

1-6
 CHAPTER 1

2. External view of the duplexing unit

15

16

Figure 1-4-2

15: Duplexing unit

16: Duplex feed unit

3. External view of the paper feeder

17

18

Figure 1-4-3

17: Paper feeder

18: Paper cassette

1-7
CHAPTER 1

4. Ethernet Board

19

ERR
LNK
100

ERR
TXD
RXD
20

TXD
RXD
21

22

Figure 1-4-4

19: Expansion interface connector

20: 10Base-2 connector
21: 10Base-T connector
22: Status LED

1-8
 CHAPTER 1

B. Cross Sectional View

1. Cross sectional view of the printer

1 2 3 4 5

24
7

23

22 8

21 9
20 10

11

12

19 18 17 16 15 14 13

Figure 1-4-5

1: Photosensitive drum 13: Cassette paper pick-up roller

2: Primary charging roller 14: Secondary transfer roller
3: Density sensor 15: ITB cleaning roller
4: Laser/scanner unit 16: Cassette
5: Drum cartridge 17: Upper fixing roller
6: Primary transfer roller 18: Lower fixing roller
7: ITB unit 19: Fixing delivery roller
8: Multi-purpose tray 20: Face-up deflector
9: Multi-purpose tray paper pick-up roller 21: Developing rotary
10: Registration roller 22: Toner cartridge
11: Feed roller 23: Face-down delivery roller
12: Cassette feed roller

1-9
CHAPTER 1

2. Cross sectional view of the duplexing unit

3 2 2

Figure 1-4-6

1: Pressure roller
2: Duplex feed roller
3: Reversing roller

3. Cross sectional view of the paper feeder

1 2 3

Figure 1-4-7

1: Pick-up roller
2: Feed roller 1
3: Feed roller 2
4: Separation roller

1 - 10
 CHAPTER 1

V. INSTALLATION

A. Notes
This printer was carefully adjusted and strictly inspected before being packed.
To ensure that it performs as intended, it is very important to install the printer correctly.
The service engineer should have a complete knowledge of the printer, choose a good location,
install the printer according to the proper procedure, and check it out before it is used.

B. Choosing a Location
The following requirements must be met when installing the printer.
The service engineer should inspect the customer’s premises before installing the printer.

1. Power supply
The power supply should meet the following requirements:
• Line voltage (AC): Within ±10% of rated voltage
• Line frequency: Rated frequency
• Grounding: Grounding that meets the safety standard.

2. Operating conditions
The location should meet the following requirements.
• The printer should be placed on a flat and level surface.
• The temperature and humidity should be within the range shown below.
• The location should be well ventilated.

100

Humidity (%RH)
80

60
Operating
40 environment

20
14
10

0
10 15 20 30 Temperature (˚C)

Figure 1-5-1

Do not install the printer in these places:

• Areas exposed to direct sunlight
If unavoidable, hang heavy curtains to shut out the direct sunlight.
• Areas exposed to the direct wind from the air-conditioning duct.
• Near magnets or equipment that produces a magnetic field
• Areas with vibration

1 - 11
CHAPTER 1

• Dusty areas
• Near flames or water

3. Installation space
There must be enough space around the printer to operate it. (See Figure 1-5-2.)
If the printer is to be placed on a desk, be sure that the desk is large enough to accommo-
date its feet (rubber pads) and sturdy enough to carry its weight (about 48 kg).

1560mm

700mm
Cassette Duplexing unit
(Option)
500mm

820mm

Duplexing unit
(Option)
Paper feeder
(Option)

Figure 1-5-2

1 - 12
 CHAPTER 1

C. Unpacking and Installation

If the boxed printer is brought into a warm place from a cold place, condensation will form on
the printer surfaces. This will cause various problems, such as print defects. To avoid this,
leave the printer in its box to acclimatize it to room temperature before unpacking it. This will
take at least an hour.

1. Unpacking
1) Unpack the box.
2) Take out the accessories. Confirm that the toner cartridges (total: 4), and drum cartridge are
included.
Confirm that the universal cassette and ITB unit are installed in the printer.
3) Have two persons lift and carry the printer to the installation site. Two persons are required
to move the printer because it weighs about 48 kg.

Figure 1-5-3

4) Remove the plastic bag from the printer and peel off the tape. Confirm that the covers were
not damaged or deformed during transport.
5) Open the ITB unit drawer and remove the tape and spacer.
6) Close the ITB unit drawer.
7) Remove the universal cassette from the printer and remove the packing material.

1 - 13
CHAPTER 1

2. Unpacking and installing the drum cartridge

1) Open the drum cartridge drawer.
2) Remove the drum cartridge out of its protection bag.
3) Remove the protective tape from the drum cartridge.
4) Insert the drum cartridge into the printer. Be careful not to damage the photosensitive
drum.

Drum cartridge

Bosses

Guides

Figure 1-5-4

5) Close the drum cartridge drawer.

1 - 14
 CHAPTER 1

3. Unpacking and installing the toner cartridge

This printer can execute the toner cartridge replacement function according to the instruction
from the video controller.
This function detects whether the toner cartridges are installed or not and rotates the devel-
oping rotary so that the compartment of the missing toner cartridge comes to the installation
slot. Detection and installation of toner cartridges are conducted in order of Bk, M, C and Y.

1) Insert one end of the power cord into the printer and the other end into the outlet. Be sure
to use the supplied power cord.
2) Install the drum cartridge and ITB unit, then turn the printer ON.

Note: The toner cartridge replacement function does not become effective unless the printer is
turned on with the drum cartridge and the ITB unit in it. Install the drum cartridge and
the ITB unit in the printer, then turn it ON.

3) Remove the toner cartridge out of its protection bag.

4) Hold the cartridge as shown in Figure 1-5-5 and slowly rock it up and down five or six times
to distribute toner evenly.

Figure 1-5-5

1 - 15
CHAPTER 1

5) Place the cartridge on a level surface. Hold down the top of the cartridge with one hand and
pull out the tab with the other hand to remove the sealing tape. (See Figure 1-5-6)

45

Figure 1-5-6

6) Push the toner cartridge door unlock button and open the toner cartridge door.
7) Open the toner cartridge compartment cover.

Figure 1-5-7

Note: At this point, the compartment of the black toner cartridge is stopped at the installation
slot by the toner cartridge replacement function.

8) Check the marker and choose the toner cartridge with the same color as the marker. (Install
the black toner cartridge first.)

1 - 16
 CHAPTER 1

9) Verify that the printer position mark is aligned with the arrow mark on the toner cartridge
and install the cartridge in the printer.

Toner
Arrow mark Cartri
dge

Position mark

Figure 1-5-8

10) Turn the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow until it stops.

Figure 1-5-9

11) Close the toner cartridge compartment cover, then close the top cover.
12) When the the toner cartridge door is closed, the rotary starts to rotate and stops at the next
toner cartridge (Magenta) installation position automatically.
13) Repeat steps 3 to 12 to install the other toner cartridges in the printer.

1 - 17
CHAPTER 1

4. Operation confirmation
1) Load paper into the cassette.
2) When the printer goes “ Ready ”, press the test print button to start engine test printing.
Operate the control panel to start controller test printing . Check that the density of the test
print is right.
3) Keep the area around the printer clear for use at all times.

5. Operation precaution
1) Be sure to connect a grounding wire in order to avoid electric shocks by the leakage current.
2) When powering ON the printer, be sure to switch ON the external devices first, and then the
printer. When powering OFF, be sure to switch OFF the printer first, and then the external
devices. If the external devices are turned ON/OFF while the printer is ON, noise will enter
the printer through the cables connecting the external devices to the printer, and may cause
an error.
3) When connecting/disconnecting the connectors that link the external devices to the printer,
be sure to power OFF the printer and all of the devices, and unplug the power cables. If the
connectors are connected/disconnected while the power switch is ON, it may cause mal-
function of the printer.
4) Shielded cable is required to connect external devices and the printer together. Also, an
interface cable for the parallel communication cannot exceed three meters.

1 - 18
 CHAPTER 1

6. Unpacking and installing the duplexing unit

1) Unpack the duplexing unit and remove the carton.
2) Take out the accessories.
3) Remove the plastic bag covering the duplexing unit and remove adhesive tapes.
4) Remove the packing materials from the duplexing unit.
5) Place the duplexing unit on a flat surface.
6) Install the printer on the duplexing unit (A), aligning the duplexing unit positioning dowels
with the printer positioning holes. (B)

Figure 1-5-10

7) Plug the pig tail of the duplexing unit into the outlet of the printer.

Note: If the printer is ON, turn it OFF and unplug the power cable before installing the duplex-
ing unit.

7. Unpacking and installing the paper feeder

1) Unpack the paper feeder and remove the carton.
2) Remove the tape holding the cassette from the paper feeder.
3) Remove the cassette from the paper feeder. Remove the packing materials.
4) Place the paper feeder on a flat surface.
5) Install the printer on the paper feeder, aligning the paper feeder positioning dowels with the
printer positioning holes.

Positioning dowels

Figure 1-5-11

1 - 19
CHAPTER 1

Note: 1. When installing the paper feeder, be sure to turn OFF the printer and unplug the
power cable if the user is using the printer.
2. If the user is using a duplexing unit, it must be installed between the paper feeder
and the printer.
Install the duplexing unit on the paper feeder, and then install the printer on the
duplexing unit. Do not attempt to lift the printer and duplexing unit together as it
may pinch your hands.

1 - 20
 CHAPTER 1

8. Unpacking and installing the Ethernet Board

1) Turn OFF the printer and unplug the power cable and interface cables from the printer. If
“ COOLING DOWN ” is displayed in the message area when turning OFF the power, do not
unplug the power cable until the message disappears.
2) Remove the screw on the expansion interface slot (1), and then the protective plate (2).

Figure 1-5-12

3) Unpack the ethernet board and take it out from the electrostatic bag.
4) Insert the Ethernet board into the slot of the expansion interface board and install it with
the two attached screws.

Figure 1-5-13

Note: Care must be taken to handle the video controller and the Ethernet board as static elec-
tricity may damage them.

5) Connect the power cable and the interface cable.

6) Connect the network cable.

1 - 21
CHAPTER 1

<Setting the DIP switch>

The DIP switch on the Ethernet board changes the transmission speed (100 Base-TX or 10 Base-
T) and the transfer mode (full-duplex transmission or half-duplex transmission).

DIP switch

OFF

ON

Figure 1-5-14

The table below describes the combinations of the settings. Note that the Switches 3 and 4 are
activated only when the Switch 2 is OFF.

Table 1-5-1

Switch Number Explanation Factory Default

Switch 1 ON: Starts up the print server after setting all the values OFF
of the print server into their factory defaults.

OFF: Starts up the print server with the values set in the

printer server.

Switch 2 ON: Automatically identifies 10 Base-T/100-Base TX ON

and full-duplex transmission/half-duplex

transmission when starting up the print server.

OFF: Starts up the print server according to the settings

of the Switches 3 and 4.

Switch 3 ON: Starts up the print server in 100 Base-TX. OFF

OFF: Starts up the print server in 10 Base-T.

Switch 4 ON: Starts up the print server in the full-duplex OFF

transmission.

OFF: Starts up the print server in the half-duplex

transmission.

1 - 22
 CHAPTER 1

9. Unpacking and installing the ITB unit

If the ITB unit is removed from the printer, reinstall it in the procedure below.)
1) Hold the handles of the ITB unit with both hands. Slowly insert it by adapting the blue boss
to the guide.

ITB unit

Boss

Guide

Figure 1-5-15

2) Insert the ITB unit until it clicks.

3) Close the ITB unit drawer.

Note: Do not touch the intermediate transfer belt.

1 - 23
CHAPTER 1

D. Storing and Handling Cartridges and ITB unit

The toner cartridges, drum cartridge and ITB unit can be affected by the environment and
changes over time whether it is still sealed in the box or installed in the printer, regardless of
the number of prints. Since the pace at which it changes depends on the installation and stor-
age environments, be very careful in storing and handling cartridges and ITB unit.

1. Storage of sealed cartridges and ITB unit

When storing the toner and drum cartridges and ITB units in a warehouse or workshop, main-
tain the conditions given in Table 1-5-1. Note the following:
1) Keep the cartridges and ITB unit out of direct sunlight.
2) Keep them away from areas where they may be subjected to strong vibration.
3) Do not bump or drop cartridges.

Table 1-5-2 Storage conditions

Normal (total storage time X

Temperature

0 to 35°C
9/10)

Severe (total storage High 35 to 40°C

time X 1/10)
Low –2 0 to 0°C

Temperature change (within 40°C→15°C

3 minutes or so)
–20 °C→25°C
Relative humidity

Normal (total storage time X

9/10) 35 to 85% RH

High 85 to 95% RH
Severe (total storage
time X 1/10) Low 10 to 35% RH

613 to 1013 hPa

Air pressure
(460 to 760 mmHg)

Note: “Total storage time” in the table is a year from the date of manufacture shown on the
cartridge package.

1 - 24
 CHAPTER 1

2. Storage of unsealed cartridges and ITB unit

A drum cartridge contains a photosensitive drum coated with an organic photoconductor (OPC)
that deteriorates when exposed to strong light. A toner cartridge contains toner. A dirty or dam-
aged belt of the ITB unit reduces the print quality. Advise the customer about correct storage
and handling of cartridges and ITB unit.

a. Storage requirements after unsealing

1) Store the cartridge in its protection bag.
2) Avoid places in the sun or near windows. Do not leave a cartridge in a car for a long time,
as the inside of the car can get extremely hot.
3) Avoid places that get too hot, too cold, or too humid. Also avoid places where the tempera-
ture can change suddenly.
4) Avoid places exposed to harmful gases (insecticide, etc.) or salty air.
5) Store the cartridges and ITB unit in the temperature range 0 to 35°C.
6) Keep cartridges away from computer CRT displays, disk drives, and floppy disks.
7) Keep cartridges out of reach of children.

b. Cartridge validity period

The validity of a cartridge is two and a half years from the date of manufacture (printed on the
cartridge in an abbreviated form). The expiry date (date of manufacture plus two and a half
years) is given on the cartridge box and the shipping box. A cartridge used after the expiry date
will produce prints of reduced quality, so cartridges should be used within their validity period.

c. Handling suggestions
1) Before installing a new toner cartridge in the printer or if blank spots appear on prints dur-
ing use, because of uneven toner distribution, hold the cartridge horizontally and slowly rock
it 45 degrees each way about the drum axis, five or six times, as shown in Figure1-5-16.

Figure 1-5-16

This will distribute the toner evenly. Then install the cartridge in the printer. Shaking it any
other way may result in toner leaking from the developing cylinder.
After installing a new cartridge, print three to five test patterns to check for toner leakage.

2) Before transporting the printer, take all the cartridges and ITB unit out, and put them into
protection bags to prevent exposure to light.
3) Keep the cartridges and ITB unit away from CRT screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The
magnet in the Bk cartridge can corrupt the data in the memory of your computer or the data
on disks.

1 - 25
CHAPTER 1

4) Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light, as it may give an adverse
effect to print image.
5) Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.
6) Do not turn a cartridge in an upright position or turn it upside down. Always lay it down
with its label on the top.
7) Never attempt to disassemble cartridges or ITB unit.

8) Do not touch or open the protective shield of the drum cartridge.

Waste toner
detection windows

Figure 1-5-17

9) Do not touch or open the protective shield of the toner cartridge.

Figure 1-5-18

Note: The photosensitive drum is protected by the protective shield as blank spots or black
lines may appear on the prints if the drum is exposed to strong light. Therefore, avoid
opening the shield. (The protective shield opens automatically when the drum cartridge
is installed in the printer.)

1 - 26
 CHAPTER 1

10) Do not touch or open the protective shutter of the toner cartridge. Also, do not touch or
scratch the developing cylinder.

Figure 1-5-19

11) Hold the ITB unit as shown below. Do not touch the surface of the belt.

Wrong Correct

Figure 1-5-20

1 - 27
CHAPTER 1

VI. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING BY THE CUSTOMER

The customer should do the following maintenance to maximize printer performance.

Table 1-6-1

Item Maintenance
Toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge when the message appeared or image
defects occurred.
Drum cartridge Replace the drum cartridge when the message appeared or image defects
occurred.
ITB unit Replace the ITB unit when the message appeared or image defects
occurred.
Note: When replacing the ITB unit, also replace the secondary transfer
roller and air filters packed with the unit.
Fixing unit Replace the fixing unit every 100,000 prints.
Note: When replacing the fixing unit, also replace the feed roller, separation
roller and air filters packed with the unit.
Registration roller unit Clean the registration roller unit when replacing the ITB unit.
1. Clean the upper registration roller with a dry cloth.
2. Clean the registration guide with a dry cloth.
Note: Put the ITB unit in the protective bag to protect it from the light
when cleaning the registration roller unit.

Registration roller
➀

Registration guide
➁

1 - 28
 CHAPTER 1

Table 1-6-2

Item Maintenance

Toner density sensor Clean the detection window of the density sensor with the attached
brush when replacing the drum cartridge.
Note: Put the drum cartridge in the protective bag to protect it from
the light when cleaning the detection window.

Cleaning brush

Toner density sensor

1 - 29
CHAPTER 1

VII. OPERATION

A. Control Panel
The control panel of this printer allows the user to perform the basic printer operation,
change the printer configuration that cannot be controlled by the software application, identify
the available typefaces, and check the printer status.
The control panel consists of 2 LCDs, 8 LEDs and 8 operation keys.
Contents of each display and functions of the keys are explained on the following pages.

1
2
3
Ready Job Message

F
A
G 15
B
C
D 14
E

13

0 0 READY ***
12
4
Feeder
Form Feed Selection
Cancel Job 11
5 Utility Menu

On Line Duplex
10
6
Reset/Enter
9
7
8

Figure 1-7-1

1 - 30
 CHAPTER 1

● Message indicator (orange): 1

Lit:
Indicates a status that the printer is incapable of continuing printing (an error status), as an
operator call or an error has occurred in the printer.
OFF:
Indicates a ready or wait status.

● Job indicator (green): 2

Lit:
Indicates a job status that the printer is waiting for a job from the external device (host com-
puter, etc.).
Blinking:
Indicates a job status (that the printer is processing a job).
OFF:
Indicates that the printer does not have a job to print.

● Ready indicator (green): 3

Lit:
Indicates a ready status (that the printer has been ready for printing).
Blinking:
Indicates a wait status (that the printer is preparing for printing).
OFF:
Indicates an error status (that a failure has occurred in the printer).

● Feeder Selection key : 4

The Feeder Selection key is available when the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline
state.
Pressing this key twice causes the status display panel to indicate the currently selected
paper feed source. If the key is pressed once more, the paper feed source will be changed.
If the key is pressed only once, the printer will enter Feeder Mode Menu to switch the paper
feed source, tray paper size, and tray paper type.
For more details, see "3.The Panel Operation for Feeder Mode Menu".

● Form Feed key : 5

The Form Feed key is available when the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline state.
If the key is pressed while the printer is off-line and the Job indicator is blinking, all of the
print data in the printer will be printed. While this action is being implemented, the status
display panel will indicate a "05 FORM FEED" message.
If the key is pressed again while the printer is delivering paper, the status display panel will
indicate a "05 FORM FEED STOP" message, and the printer will complete the current paper
delivery and then stop delivering paper.

● On Line indicator (green) / On Line key: 6

The On Line key indicates whether the printer is on-line or off-line.
Lit:
Indicates that the printer is on-line.
Blinking:
Indicates that the printer is entering an offline state from an online state and vice versa.
OFF:
Indicates that the printer is off-line.
While the Ready indicator is ON and the printer is on-line, the printer accepts data from the
external device. If the printer is off-line, the printer will stop accepting data.

1 - 31
CHAPTER 1

Pressing this key causes the printer to switch between an online state and offline state.
When the printer enters an offline state from an online state, if data is being input from the
external device, the printer will stop receiving the data. Or, if the printer is performing a
print, it will deliver printed paper and then go to an offline state. In this case, while the
printer is delivering the paper, the ON Line indicator is blinking. While the printer is in an
online state (the On Line indicator is ON), the keys on the panel other than the On Line key
are unavailable.
While the printer is off-line and a panel operation is being performed, pressing this key will
cause the printer to interrupt the operation and enter an online state. If an operator call or
an error has occurred while the printer is in an online state and is printing, pressing this
key may cause the printer to cancel the error status, to go back to the online state (job sta-
tus), and to resume printing (error skip).
The following errors can be skipped by pressing On Line:

16 x TONER LOW / (x indicates the type of the toner cartridge.)

19 FEEDING PAPER
21 DATA OVERFLOW
23 MEMORY FULL
26 MEMORY FULL
27 JOB REJECT
30 MEMORY FULL
32 DUPLEX REJECT
33 WORK MEM FULL
36 DEGRADE
41 CHECK PRINT
43 I/O ERROR
44 TRAY FAULT
52 IMAGEMODE REJ
99 CHECK ITB
E0 DRUM WARNING
EF CHECK DRAM
PC LOAD xx (xx indicates the type of print paper size.)

1 - 32
 CHAPTER 1

● Duplex indicator (green)/Duplex selection key : 7

The duplex selection key indicates whether the printer has selected simplex or duplex print-
ing.
Lit:
Indicates that duplex printing is being selected.
OFF:
Indicates that simplex printing is being selected. Or, the duplex unit is not installed.
The key is available when the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline state.
When the duplex unit is installed, the printer switches between simplex and duplex print-
ing. If the key is pressed only once while the Duplex indicator (green) is OFF, the printer will
select duplex printing. If the key is pressed once more, the printer will select simplex print-
ing.

● Cancel Job / Utility / Left arrow key : 8

The left arrow key is available when the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline state,
and also the Job indicator is OFF. Pressing this key causes the printer to enter Utility Menu
to select the output of a Test Print/Font List/Form.
For more details, see "2. The Panel Operation for Utility Menu".
For the operation panel menu, this key is used for scrolling backward or as a decrement key.
When the printer is in an normal mode and in an offline state, and also the Job indicator is
ON or blinking, pressing this key causes the status display panel to post a " 03 CANCELING
JOB " message, and the printer will cancel the job currently being printed.
Note that when the printer takes a long time to execute this function, the status display
panel might indicate a " 00 JOB SKIP " message. In this case, wait for a while or perform a
software or hardware reset.

● Reset / Enetr / Down arrow key : 9

The down arrow key makes a choice for each item in the operation panel menu. If there are
multiple choices, the key functions as a selection key to go to the next lower hierarchy.
If the printer is in a offline state and the Job indicator is ON, pressing this key for from one
second or more to less than five seconds causes the printer to perform a soft reset. Note that
if there are data being processed, the printer will cancel the processing, and the status dis-
play panel will indicate "03 SOFT RESET". Also, pressing this key for five seconds or more,
the printer will perform a hard reset. Note that if there are data or a job being processed,
the printer will cancel the processing and delete data on the memory. Also, a "03 HARD
RESET" message will be displayed after the foregoing message.

● Menu / Right arrow key : 10

When the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline state, and also the Job indicator is
OFF, the printer will enter Setup Menu.
For more details, see "1. The Panel Operation for Setup Menu".
Also, this key is used for scrolling forward or as an increment key.

● Up arrow key : 11
The up arrow key is available when the printer is in normal mode and in an offline state, also
the Job indicator is OFF.
If there are multiple choices to be made for each of the items in the operation panel menu,
the key is used to go back to the items in the previous hierarchy.

1 - 33
CHAPTER 1

● Status display panel (2 x 16, a liquid crystal display panel) : 12

The status display panel indicates each of the statuses and the messages and so forth. Also,
the menu settings are displayed on this panel.
Refer to VI section in Chapter 4 and "Appendix IV" for the types of displaying.

● Lower Cassette (Paper Feeder) Paper Feed indicator (green):13

Lit:
Indicates a status that the lower cassette has been selected.
OFF:
Indicates a status that the lower cassette is not selected, or is not installed.

● Upper Cassette Paper Feed indicator (green):14

Lit:
Indicates a status that the upper cassette has been selected.
OFF:
Indicates a status that the upper cassette is not selected.

● Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Feed indicator (green):15

Lit:
Indicates that the multi-purpose tray has been selected and is supplied with print paper.
Blinking:
Indicates that the multi-purpose tray has been selected and is not supplied with print paper.
OFF:
Indicates a status that the multi-purpose tray is not selected.

Notes: 1. After turned ON, the printer enters a standby state and then an on-line state.
When the printer is turned ON, the print environment * is set to the same items as
those on the NVRAM.
* The print environment has page-output related information, such as the currently
selected interface, paper size, the number of copies, and so on.
The print environment can be changed either by a command from the external device
or a designation from the operation panel.
2. When the printer is on-line, and a failure has occurred, the printer enters an offline
state. The printer then displays the failure status on the status display panel.
3. Among the failures displayed on the status display panel, operator call messages,
such as paper out, print paper replacement request and so on, will disappear as long
as they are proceeded according to the display, and the printer will go back to the
ready status.
4. Wen the printer is on-line, only the On Line key is available.
5. Any key pressed while the printer is processing will not be activated. In this case,
pressing a key will cause the printer to beep to notify the user that the pressed key
is not available.

1 - 34
 CHAPTER 1

B. The Panel Operation

1. The Panel Operation for Setup Menu

Setup Menu sets various print environment, such as a printing position, font type, selection of
the interface for connecting the printer to the computer, and so forth.
When the printer is in a normal state and in an offline state, and also the Job indicator is
OFF, pressing the Menu key once causes the printer to enter Setup Menu.
Setup Menu has the following five menus as the default environment for the printer.
● Control Menu
● Feeder Menu
● Layout Menu
● Quality Menu
● Interface Menu
Figure 1-7-3 lists the available keys to operate Setup Menu.

The On Line key is always available whatever the printer status is. If the On Line key is pressed,
the printer will returns to an on-line state without changing the print environment in the previ-
ous on-line state, and the status display will indicate a "00 Ready" message.

<Initializing the Setup Menu>

The settings in the setup menu return to their factory defaults by initializing the Setup Menu.
The following are the operation procedure for initializing the setup menu.
1) Press the On Line key to enter an offline state.
2) Press the Menu key to display Setup Menu.
3) Select the "INITIALIZE MENU" by pressing the < or > key.
4) Press the v key.
5) Press the v key after a "INITIALIZE MENU OK?" message.
6) Press the On Line key once after a "INITIALIZE MENU DONE" message
(While initializing, the status display panel posts a "INITIALIZE MENU INITIALIZING" mes-
sage.)
7) The status display panel indicates "00 Ready" message.

1 - 35
CHAPTER 1

2. The Panel Operation for Utility Menu

The utility menu allows the user to confirm information such as the settings in the setup menu,
utilized options, and so on.
When the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline state, and also the Job indicator is
OFF, pressing the Utility key once causes the printer to enter Utility Menu. Select a function
with the < or > key and press the v key, then the printer starts printing.
The following printings are enabled by entering Utility Menu:
● Configuration Print
Prints the amount of the utilized RAM, settings in the printing environment, and so on.
Refer to Figure I-7-4 for details.
● Controller Test Print
Prints the lines that describe the name and features of the printer, and so on.
● Expansion I/F Print
Prints the name and version of the utilized expansion interface board.
Displays only when the optional expansion interface is employed.

Note that the printer automatically goes back to "00 Ready" (off-line) after completing the print-
ings.
To interrupt printing, press the On Line key or the Utility key. If the On Line key is pressed,
the printer will returns to "00 Ready" (on-line), and if the Utility key is pressed, the printer will
returns to "00 Ready" (off-line).
The available keys to operate the utility menu are listed in Figure 1-7-2.

1 - 36
 CHAPTER 1

3. The Panel Operation for Feeder Mode Menu

Feeder Mode Menu selects which cassette or tray of paper to be used, a paper size, and paper
type.
When the printer is in a normal mode and in an offline state, pressing the Feeder Selection
key once causes the printer to enter Feeder Mode Menu.
The available keys to operate Feeder Mode Menu are listed in Figure 1-7-2.

1 - 37
CHAPTER 1

This page intentionally left blank

1 - 38
 CHAPTER 1

Menus Operation Flow (1)

READY

Press On Line

PAUSED

Press Menu
Utility menus Press Utility Feeder Mode menus Press Feeder Selection
Setup menus
1 UTILITY MENU FEEDER SELECT CASSETTE1, CASSETTE2,
CONFIG.PAGE =AUTO TRAY
To Next page
*
Press Press Press Press Feeder Selection
UTILITY MENU TRAY PAPER SIZE LETTER, LEGAL, EXECUTIVE, FREE, USER PAPER, A5, B5,
TEST PRINT =A4 ENV.COM10, ENV.MONARCH, ENV.ISO-B5, ENV.ISO-C5, ENV.DL,
*
UTILITY MENU TRAY MEDIA TYPE HEAVY, TRANSPARENCY,
OPT.I/O PRINT =PLAIN GLOSSY FILM, FREE
*
d
How to Read the Route Map
At : Example: Press : To move : Mark :

Menu level Feeder Mode menus Menu Forward

Utility menu
Feeder Mode menu

Enter To a selected item

Right arrow
Forward
Item level Feeder Selection
FEEDER SELECT
Left arrow Back
Enter To a selected item
Right arrow Forward
AUTO, CASSETTE1, Left arrow Back
Value level
CASSETTE2 ,TRAY Enter To a selected item

Notes: 1. If the Enter key is pressed, the printer will select the menu or the setting value indicate
on the status display panel.
2. If the Cancel key is pressed, the printer will cancel the item indicated on the status
display panel and go back to "READY".
3. * indicates the factory default.
4. indicates items when an option is installed.

Figure 1-7-2

1 - 39
CHAPTER 1

Menus Operation Flow (2)

1 Setup menus

Press
SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP
CONTROL MENU FEEDER MENU LAYOUT MENU QUALITY MENU INTERFACE MENU INITIALIZE MENU
Press
Press Press Enter Press Press Enter Press Enter Press Press Enter Press Press Enter Press Enter
LETTER, LEGAL, EXECUTIVE, Press
MODE TIMEOUT OFF, TRAY PAPER SIZE FREE,USER PAPER,A5, B5, OFFSET Y -50.0 to +50.0 REFINE I / O SELECT CENTRONICS, INITIALIZE MENU
OFF
5 to 300 SEC. ENV.COM10, ENV.-MONARCH, OPTION I/O OK?
* =15 SEC.
* =A4
Press Press
ENV.ISO-B5,ENV.ISO-C5, *=0 . 0
* =ON =AUTO
Press Press Press Press Press Press
ENV.DL,
A5, B5, LETTER,
POWER SAVE DEFAULT SIZE LETTER, OFFSET X PAGE PROTECT A4, LEGAL, B5x2, PARALLEL MODE
15, 30, 180 MIN. -50.0 to +50.0
=60 MIN. =A4 =0 . 0 =AUTO BUSY-ACK
* * A5, B5 * LETTERx2, A4x2,
* LEGALx2 Press Press Enter
ALARM CONTINUOUS, TRAY PRIORITY COLOR MODE COLOR, BUSY-ACK
INTERMITTENT ON =A-B-A A-B, B-A
=1 TIME =OFF =AUTO MONOCHROME
* * * *
WARNINGS AUTO SELECTION BAND SENDING OFF RECEIVING SPEED MEDIUM,
OFF =HIGH LOW
=ON TRAY =ON
* Press
* *
Press Enter
ECONOMY MODE TRAY QUALITY WARAING STOP PRINTING SENDING SPEED MEDIUM,
ON OFF
=OFF =ON =CONTINUE PRINT =HIGH LOW
* * * *
Press Press
COLOR REGISTER CASSETTE1 SYSTEM MEMORY 200K, 400K, 600K, BI-DIRECTION
ON OFF ECP, OFF
=OFF =ON =AUTO 1000K =NIBBLE
* * * *
DENSITY : CYAN CASSETTE2 OFF
1 to 16
=8 =ON
* *
el
DENSITY : MAGENTA DEFAULT TYPE BUFFER SIZE 32K, 128K, 256K
1 to 16 HEAVY, TRANSPARENCY,
=8 =64K 512K, 1024K, 2048K
* * =PLAIN GLOSSY FILM
*
DENSITY : YELLOW TRAY MEDIA TYPE HEAVY, TRANSPARENCY, How to Read the Route Map
1 to 16
=8 GLOSSY FILM, FREE
* =PLAIN
At : Example: Press : To move : Mark :
*
DENSITY : BLACK OVERRIDE MODE ON Menu level QUALITY MENU Menu Forward
1 to 16
=8 =OFF
* *
Utility menu
Feeder Mode menu
TONER LOW STOP PRINTING JAM RECOVER ON Enter To a selected item
=CONTINUE PRINT
* * =OFF
Right arrow
Forward
AUTO ERROR SKIP Item level Feeder Selection
ON REFINE
=OFF
* Left arrow Back

LANGUAGE DANISH, DUTCH, FINNISH, FRANCH, Enter To a selected item

=ENGLISH GERMAN, ITALIAN, NORWEGIAN,
Right arrow Forward
* PORTUGUESE, SPANISH, SWEDISH
Left arrow Back
Value lev ON, OFF
TRANSFER MODE D Enter To a selected item
ON
=OFF
*
Notes: 1. If the Enter key is pressed, the printer will select the menu or the setting value indicated
on the status display panel.
2. If the Cancel key is pressed, the printer will cancel the item indicated on the status
display panel and go back to "READY".
3. * indicates the factory default.
4. indicates items when an option is installed.

Figure 1-7-3

1 - 40
 CHAPTER 1

CLBP400 Configuration Print (a single print)

This Configuration print is to be used to confirm the version number of CPDL, memory status, setting status of the printing environment, etc.

➀ VERSION
The version number of the ROM on the video controller PCB.
Color Laser Beam Printer Colour Laser Beam Printer
Imprimante a faisceau laser couleur Farb-Laserdrucker
➁ SUB VERSION
Stampante Laser a Colori Impresora Laser a color
The version number of the built-in firmware.
Configuration Page ➂ ENGINE VERSION
➀ ➃
➁ The version numbers of the D-CPU and M-CPU on the DC controller PCB.
VERSION : R0.01/KAM9J29D
SUB VERSION : 12.00/2HD-2-C013-31-00
FEEDER MODE : AUTO
➄
➂
DUPLEX MODE : SIMPLEX
➃ FEEDER MODE
ENGINE VERSION : D0235/M0002 RAM : 12 ( 12 MB + 0 MB )
AVAILABLE RAM : 922 Kbytes
➅
PDL : CPDL ➆ The feed mode selected in the Feed Select menu.
➇ ➄ DUPLEX MODE
CONTROL MENU GROUP QUALITY MENU GROUP
COPIES : 1 REFINE : on
The simplex duplex mode selected in the Duplex menu.
MODE TIME OUT : 15 sec.
POWER SAVE : 60 min.
PAGE PROTECT
COLOR MODE
:
:
auto
auto
➅ RAM
ALARM : 1 time
WARNINGS : on
BAND SENDING
QUARITY WARNING
:
:
on
continue printing
The total amount of memory of the built-in RAM and expansion memory
ECONOMY MODE : off SYSTEM MEMORY : auto (the amount of the built-in memory is 20 Mbytes).
COLOR REGISTER : off
TONER DENSITY C : 8
➆ AVAILABLE RAM
TONER DENSITY M : 8
TONER DENSITY Y : 8
The amount of RAM currently available in the printer.
TONER DENSITY K : 8
TONER LOW : continue printing
➇ PDL
AOUT ERROR SKIP : off The PDL utilized in the controller.
LANGUAGE : English
INTERFACE MENU GROUP
I/O SELECT : auto ➈ Setup mode items and their setting values indicated in each group.
PARALLEL BUSY-ACK : A-B-A Refer to Tables 1-7-2 and 1-7-3 for details.
high
➈ PARALLEL RECEIVING SPEED
PARALLEL SENDING SPEED
:
: high ➉ Page Count
LAYOUT MENU GROUP INPUT PRIME : mode dependent
OFFSET Y : 0.0mm BI-DIRECTION : nibble The total number of pages of the color and monochrome.
OFFSET X : 0.0mm BUFFER SIZE : 64K
BINDING : long edge
MARGIN : 0.0mm

FEEDER MENU GROUP

TRAY PAPER SIZE : A4
DEFAULT SIZE : A4
TRAY PRIORITY : off
AUTO SELECTION/TRAY : on
auto select/casstte(du) : on
DEFAULT TYPE : plain
TRAY MEDIA TYPE : plain
OVERRIDE MODE : off
JAM RECOVER : off

DEVICE ID
Manufacturer : Canon
Model : C LBP 400
Description : Canon C LBP 400

Page Count
Color: 000001
Monochrome: 000002 ➉

Figure 1-7-4

1 - 41
CHAPTER 1

This page intentionally left blank

1 - 42
 CHAPTER 2

OPERATION AND TIMING

1. This chapter describes the printer functions, the relationships between mechanisms and cir-
cuits, and the timing of operations. Mechanical linkages are indicated by black and white
lines ( ), the flow of control signals by solid arrows ( ), and the flow of groups
of signals by outline arrows ( ).
2. An active-high signal is indicated by "H" or by a signal name without a slash in front of it,
such as "PSNS." An active-low signal is indicated by "L" or by a signal name with a slash in
front of, such as "/SCNON."
A signal that is "H" or has a name without a slash is active at the supply voltage level
(indicating that the signal is being output), and inactive at ground level (indicating that the
signal is not being output).
A signal that is "L" or has a slash in front of its name is active at ground level, and inac-
tive at the supply voltage level.
There is a microcomputer in this printer. But as the internal operation of the microcom-
puter cannot be checked, an explanation of the operation of the microcomputer has been left
out.
As it is assumed that no repair will be made to customer circuit boards, the explanation
of board circuits is limited to an outline using block diagrams. So there are two types of cir-
cuit explanations; (1) everything from the sensor to the input sections of the major circuit
boards, (2) everything from the output sections of the major circuit boards to the loads.
These are explained with block diagrams according to the function.

I. BASIC OPERATION ................... 2-1 V. PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM ........... 2-77

II. ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 2-4 VI. VIDEO CONTROL SYSTEM ........ 2-93
III. LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM ....... 2-37 VII. DUPLEXING UNIT ..................... 2-103
IV. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM.... 2-44 VIII. PAPER FEEDER ........................ 2-113
 CHAPTER 2

I. BASIC OPERATION
A. Functions
Printer functions can be divided into five groups: the engine control system, the laser/scanner
system, the image formation system, the paper pick-up/feed system, and the video control sys-
tem.

VIDEO CONTROL SYSTEM

To external device (host computer, etc.) Video controller PCB

ENGINE
Face-down tray CONTROL SYSTEM

LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM Connector PCB

Scanning mirror

Laser BD Operation
diode circuit panel

Scanner
motor DC controller
PCB
Photo- Primary IMAGE
sensitive drum charging roller
FORMATION
Cleaner unit
Developing
SYSTEM
unit SYSTEM
Intermediate Multi-purpose
ITB cleaning transfer belt tray
roller Pick-
Face-up Fixing up
tray unit
Secondary transfer roller unit

Cassette

Duplexing unit (option)

Cassette paper
Cassette pick-up unit

Paper feeder (option)

PICK-UP/FEED

Figure 2-1-1

2-1
CHAPTER 2

B. Basic Sequence of Operations

The operation sequence for this printer is controlled by the microcomputers on the DC controller
PCB. The periods from the power ON to the end of printing and stop of the main motor are list-
ed below. See the Appendix for timing charts.

Table 2-1-1

Period Purpose Remark

WAIT From power switch ON until the To warm up the fixing rollers In this period, the printer
(WAIT fixing roller temperature reaches the to set the printer in the standby checks for presence of
period) target temperature. state. residua l paper and
whether units are installed
and conduct s image
stabilization control.
STBY From the end of the WAIT period To hold the fixing rollers at the
(STANDBY) until a /PRNT signal is input from target temperature to keep the
the video controller PCB, or from printer ready to print when a
the end of LSTR period until a /PRINT signal is input.
/PRNT signal is input from the video
controller PCB or the power is
switched OFF.

INTR After input of the /PRNT signal from To stabilize the sensitivity of the
(INITIAL the video controller until the scanner drum for preparation of printing.
ROTATIONS motor becomes ready and the home
period) position of the intermediate transfer
belt reaches the leading edge of the
first color.
PRINT From the end of INTR period until To form an image on the photo-
(Print) the home position of the intermediate sensitive drum according to the
transfer belt reaches the secondary /VDO0 to /VDO7 signals input
transfer start position. from the video controller PCB,
make it visible with toner, and
transfe r the image to the
intermediate transfer belt.
LSTR From the end of PRINT period until To transfer the toner on the The intermediate transfer
(LAST the fixing motor stops. intermediate transfer belt onto belt is cleaned each time
ROTATIONS the paper, deliver the paper out a sheet of paper is printed
period) of the printer, and clean the on. (During continuous
intermediate transfer belt. printing it is also cleaned
in the PRINT period)

2-2
 CHAPTER 2

C. Power-on Sequence
The sequence from the power ON until the printer enters the STANDBY state is shown below.

Power ON

D-CPU/Gate array initialization

Output reset signal to M-CPU/S-CPU.

Fan start
Preparation for video interface
communication

/PPRDY signal output

Check presence of units. (Note)
Video interface communication start

Printer ID check

Failure check

Fixing heater ON Developing unit initialization (Bk)

• Developing rotary motor drive
• Toner cartridge motor drive

Fixing roller temperature check Toner cartridge (Bk)

presence/level check

Fixing unit motor drive

Fixing roller pressure ON

Check residual paper
in the printer.
Pick-up system initialization
• Pick-up motor drive

Developing unit initialization (Y, M, C)

• Developing rotary motor drive
• Toner cartridge motor drive

Toner cartridge (Y, M, C)

presence/level check

ITB unit initialization Door open check

• Drum motor drive

Standby temperature
adjustment check Scanner motor initial drive

Scanner motor drive check

Image density control

Standby Note: The units mean the drum cartridge and

the fixing unit.

Figure 2-1-2

2-3
CHAPTER 2

II. ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

A. DC Controller PCB
1. Outline
The operations of the printer are controlled by three CPUs (D-CPU, M-CPU, and S-CPU) on the
DC controller PCB.
The D-CPU (IC1001) controls the engine system and the video interface with the video con-
troller. The M-CPU (IC1009) controls various loads according to instructions from the D-CPU.
The S-CPU (IC1010) controls the developing cylinder of the toner cartridge according to instruc-
tions from the M-CPU.
The layout of the main ICs on this PCB is shown in Figure 2-2-1, and its block diagram, in
Figure 2-2-2.

2. Operations
a. D-CPU (IC1001)
The D-CPU is an eight-bit single-chip microcomputer (UPD78056GC-A20-8BT).
This CPU is a single-chip CPU with built-in ROM and RAM. It controls the engine system,
video interface with the video controller, laser/scanner unit, fixing unit, and fans according to
the control program stored in the ROM via the gate array.

b. M-CPU (IC1009)
The M-CPU is an eight-bit single-chip microcomputer (CXP87532-109Q).
This CPU is a single-chip CPU incorporating a ROM and a RAM. This CPU uses the control
program stored in the ROM to control various loads, such as motors, clutches, and solenoids,
and high-voltage. It also controls options, such as the duplexing unit and paper feeder.

c. S-CPU (IC1010)
The S-CPU is an four-bit single-chip microcomputer (M34225M1-575FP).
This CPU is a single-chip CPU incorporating a ROM and a RAM. This CPU uses the control
program stored in the ROM to control the toner cartridge motor.

d. Gate array (IC1003)

The gate array has the following main functions:
1) Laser/scanner control
2) Video interface control
3) Photointerrupter and sensor control
4) Switch control
5) Clock control
6) Image density control

e. RAM (IC1005)
This buffer memory stores the video signal (one line) from the video controller. The CLOCK sig-
nal (VCLK) of the video controller is converted to the CLOCK signal (PCLK) of the printer.

f. BD sync IC (IC1006)
The BD sync IC generates the PRINTER CLOCK signal (PCLK) based on the /BD signal from the
BD PCB.

g. Reset IC (IC1002)
The reset IC sends a HARDWARE RESET signal to the D-CPU and the gate array when the power
is turned ON.

2-4
 CHAPTER 2

h. EEPROM (IC1004)
The EEPROM stores various back-up data, such as total number of delivered paper, leading
edge/side registration adjustment data, and high voltage adjustment data.

7 1

15 J1015 J1021 2 32
B1 J1014 B13 1 J1001 31
B2 B12
J1005 A13 J1020 A1 SW1001
A12 A2
5
J1013

RAM BD sync IC
6 1

8
IC1005
IC1006

J1002
A1
B12

A2
B12

IC1009
IC1001
J1019

13
IC1003
M-CPU D-CPU
A1 A11
B2

A12
B1

J1012
B11

A2
B10

Gate array
J1017

IC1010
J1018

IC1011
S-CPU
A10

6
B2
A11
B1

J1003
J1016
J1006

2 14
1 J1010 15 2425 1 7

5
07

J1009
0
J1
J1011
7

8
J1022 2 J1008 3 J1004
1 4 1 9
15

IC1002
Reset IC

IC1004
EEPROM

Figure 2-2-1

2-5
CHAPTER 2

DC controller PCB
Laser/scanner unit SW1001 RAM
(IC1005)
Test print switch
Laser
driver BD sync IC Connector Video
PCB (IC1006) PCB controller
PCB

BD PCB Gate array

(IC1003)
Scanner
motor EEPROM
(IC1004) Operation
D-CPU panel
Reset IC (IC1001)
(IC1002)

Fixing unit Drum cartridge

M-CPU S-CPU EEPROM
(IC1009) (IC1010)
Power
supply unit
Duplexing unit
CPU

Power switch
Option
SW6
Multi-purpose Feed PCB Developing PCB
tray PCB
High-voltage
power supply
unit

High Various sensors Various Pick-up Developing Toner

voltage Fixing motor Drum motor
motor rotary motor cartridge
unit /door switch loads M1 M2 M3 M4 motor M5

Serial communication Bus line Video data Control line

Figure 2-2-2

2-6
 CHAPTER 2

3. DC Controller Input/Output Signals (1/7)

Multi-purpose
tray PCB DC controller PCB

PS1 J18 J304 J301 J1015

-3 -1 J15 J13 J12 J10
ITB unit life -1 -3 LED5V -10 -5 -5 -5 -3 -5 -10 -5
-2 -2 /ITBW "L" when the sensor
sensor SGND detects the life of the
ITB unit.
PS2 J17 See Page 2-59 for details.
-3 -4 LED5V J14 J13 J11 J10
Registration -1 -6 -5 -4 -11 -11 -5 -10 -5 -10
paper sensor -2 -5 /REGSNS "L" when the sensor
SGND detects paper.
PS3 J27 J305
-3 -1 LED5V J14 J13- J12 J10
Last paper -1 -3 -6 -3 -10 -10 -6 -9 -6 -9
sensor -2 -2 /MLTLST "L" when the sensor
SGND detects the last paper on
the multi-purpose tray.
PS4 J26 J305 See Page 2-83 for details.
Multi-purpose -3 -4 LED5V J15 J13 J12 J10
-1 -6 -7 -2 -9 -9 -7 -8 -7 -8
tray paper /MLTP "L" when the sensor detects
sensor -2 -5
SGND no paper on the multi-
ITB home position purpose tray.
sensor
PS5 J24 J23 J305
-3 -1 -1 -11 +5V J15 J13 J12 J10
-1 -3 -3 -9 -9 -6 -6 -6 -2 -6 -9 -6
/ITBHP "L" when the sensor detects
-2 -2 -2 -10 SGND the home position of the
intermediate transfer belt.
J14 J13 J11 J10 See Page 2-57 for details.
OHT sensor (left) -2 -6 -13 -13 -3 -12 -3 -12
OHTSNSL The fed media is
r recognized as OHT when
PS301 this signal is "H" while the
J14 J13 J11 J10 registration paper sensor
-2 -7 -14 -14 -2 -13 -2 -13
OHT sensor (right) OHTSNSR i s d e t e c t i n g p a p e
presence.
PS302 See page 2-84 for details.

J301 J13 J10

-8 J15-7 -7 -7 J12-1 -7 -8 -7 +5V
-1 J14-8 -15 -15 J11-1 -14 -1 -14

Feed PCB
PS6 J32 J110
-3 -1 LED5V J101 J1014
Fixing unit -A7 -A7
pressure -1 -3
-2 -2 /FXPRS "L" when the sensor detects
sensor SGND the fixing unit pressure .
PS7 J33 J31 See page 2-90 for details.
-1 -1 -3 -4
Delivery -3 -3 -1 -6 LED5V -B8 -B6
POSNS
paper sensor -2 -2 -2 -5 "H" when the sensor
SGND detects paper.
PS8 J30
-3 -7 LED5V
Cassette -1 -9 -B5 -B9
paper sensor /CSTP "L" when the sensor
-2 -8 detects no paper in the
SGND
-B7 -B7 cassette.
-A1 +5V
-A13

Figure 2-2-3

2-7
CHAPTER 2

DC Controller Input/Output Signals (2/7)

Developing PCB DC controller PCB

PS9 J42 J206
-3 -1 LED5V J201 J1017
Face-down tray -1 -3 -B9 -B6
paper full sensor -2 -2 /STFULL "L" when the face-down
tray is full.
PS10 J41
-3 -4 LED5V
Developing rotary -1 -6 -A8 -A7
position sensor /ROTHP "L" when a flag is
-2 -5 detected.
See Page 2-51 for details.
PS11 J40
-3 -7 LED5V
Toner cartridge -1 -9 -B4 -B11
contact sensor -2 -8 /DEVCAM "L" when the toner cartridge
is detached from the
photosensitive drum.
PS12 +5V See Page 2-54 for details.

Light emitter J601

-2 -13 TONLED -A12 -A3 /TONLEDON
-1 -14 "H" to turn the LED ON.
Toner level J602
sensor -1 -12 VRPULL
-2 -11 -A13 -A2
TONSNS "L" when the light passes
-3 -10
-B5 -B7 through the car tr i dge.
-A11 +5V
Light receiver -A1 Toner-out is detected by
measuring the amount of
PS13 time the signal stays "L."
+5V
See page 2-55 for details.
Light emitter J601 J1009
-2 -1 /WTLEDON
-1 -2 "H" to turn the LED ON.
Waste toner J602 Waste toner sensor
sensor -1 -5 VRPULL sensitivity adjustment signal
-2 -4
-3 -3 WTSNS "L" when the light passes
through the cartridge. Waste
Light receiver toner full is detected by
measuring the amount of
Cassette paper size detection PCB Feed PCB time the signal stays "L."
See page 2-49 for details.
J801 J110 J101 J1014
SW803 -1 -13 -B11 -B3 /CSPSIZE2
Paper size SW802 -2 -12 -B10 -B4 Paper size detection
/CSPSIZE1
detection SW801 -3 -11 -B9 -B5 See Page 2-85 for details.
switch /CSPSIZE0
-4 -10 -A13 -A1

SW1 J78 J1003

ITB unit -2 -1
/ITBSW "H" when the intermediate
drawer switch -1 -2
transfer belt unit drawer
is opened.
SW2 J71 J1003
-2 -3
Toner cartridge door /DEVSW "H" when the toner cartridge
switch -1 -4
door is opened.
SW3 J72 J1003
Drum cartridge -2 -5 /DRMCRGSW
"H" when the drum cartridge
drawer switch -1 -6 drawer is opened.

Figure 2-2-4

2-8
 CHAPTER 2

DC Controller Input/Output Signals (3/7)

DC controller PCB
Multi-purpose tray PCB
J301 J1015
J25 J305 J14 J13 J12 J10 +24VA
Multi-purpose -1 -2 -7 -11 -4 -4 -4 -4 -4 -11 -4
tray pick-up SL1 -2 -1 -8 -13 -2 -2 -2 -6 -2 -13 -2
MLTSLON "L" to turn the multi-purpose
roller solenoid tray paper pick-up roller.
J16 J304
-1 -2 -7 J14 J13 J12 J10
Registration CL1 -2 -1 -8 -12 -3 -3 -3 -5 -3 -12 -3
roller clutch REGCLON "L" to turn the registration
roller.

Feed PCB
J101 J1014 +24VA
J106-1 -B6 -B8
Cassette pick-up SL2 -3 -B4 -B10
roller solenoid CSTSLON "L" to turn the cassette
paper pick-up roller.

ITB unit J103-1

contact clutch CL2 -2 -B1 -B13
ITBCLON "L" to bring the intermediate
transfer belt into contact with
the photosensitive drum.
J104-1 See Page 2-62 for details.
ITB cleaning roller CL3 -2 -B2 -B12
contact clutch CLNCLON "L" to bring the ITB cleaning
roller into contact with the
intermediate transfer belt.
See Page 2-61 for details.
J105-1
Secondary transfer -B3 -B11
roller contact clutch CL4 -3 TR2CLON "L" to bring the secondary
transfer roller into contact
with the intermediate
J102-1 J1005 transfer belt.
-2 See Page 2-60 for details.
-A2 -A12 FIXMA
-3 -A3 -A11
Fixing motor M1 -4 /FIXMA
-A4 -A10 FIXMB Fixing motor drive signals
-5 -A5 -A9
-6 /FIXM
-B12 -B2
/IUPFIXM Fixing motor control signal
See Page 2-30 for details.
J1005
J109-1 -A8 -A6
-2 FEEDMA
-A9 -A5
Paper pick-up M2 -3 /FEEDMA
-A10 -A4
motor -4 FEEDMB Pick-up motor drive signals
-A11 -A3
/FEEDM
-A12 -A2
/IUPFEEDM Pick-up motor control signal
See Page 2-31 for details.

Figure 2-2-5

2-9
CHAPTER 2

DC Controller Input/Output Signals (4/7)

Developing PCB DC controller PCB

J203-1 J201 J1017

-2 -B10 -B5
ROTMA
-3 -B11 -B4
Developing ROTMB Developing rotary motor drive signal
M3 -4 -B12 -B3
rotary motor /ROTMAON
-5 -B14 -B1
-6 /ROTMBON
-B13 -B2
/IUPROTM Developing rotary motor control signal

J201 J1017
J204-1 -A5 -A10
DRMMA
-2 -B5 -B10
Drum motor M4 DRMMB
-3 -A6 -A9 Drum motor drive signal
/DRMMAON
-4 -B6 -B9 See Page 2-33 for details.
/DRMMBON

J205-1
-2 J201 J1017
Toner cartridge -3 -A9 -A6
M5 SLVMA
motor -4 -A10 -A5
SLVMB Toner cartridge motor drive signal
-5 -A11 -A4 See Page 2-34 for details.
-6 /SLVMON

92-fan J201 J1017

J209-3 -B3 B12
92/60FANON "H" while the fan is rotating.
-2 -A2 A13 "L" to run the fan.
FAN1 /92FANRDY
-1

60-fan J76
-3 -1 J208-3
FAN2 -2 -2 -2 -B2 -B13 /60FANRDY "L" to run the fan.
-1 -3 -1 -A14 -A1

J77 J1022
40-fan -3
-3 -3 40FAN12V "H" while the fan is rotating.
-2 -2 -2
FAN3 /40FANRDY "L" to run the fan.
-4 -4 -4
-1 -1 -1 40FANN.C. "L" when the connector (J77) is not
connected to the 40-fan.

Figure 2-2-6

2 - 10
 CHAPTER 2

DC Controller Input/Output Signals (5/7)

Laser/scanner unit DC controller PCB

J1101 J1007
-24/-25 -1/-2 LASER5V
-1 -3 /LSENB "L" to permit image formation.
-23 -4 Laser current monitoring signal.
-22 -8 ILM
LON "H" to emit laser compulsively.
-18 -9 "L" to reset pulse width.
-17 -11 /HD
-15 -12 BK "H" to emit black dot compulsively.
Laser -2/-3/-5/-6/ -14/-15/-17/-18/ WHT "H" to emit white dot compulsively.
driver -8/-9/-11/-12 -20/-21/-23/-24
PCB VOUT 0~7 Video signal
-1/-4/-7/-10/ -5/-7/-10/-13/ See Page 2-37 for details.
-13/-16/-19/-21 -16/-19/-22/-26

J1102 J1008
-2 -2 Printer clock signal
-1/-3 -1/-3 PCLK

J551 J1006
-3 -1 +24V
BD PCB -2 -2 /BDIN BD input signal
-1 -3

J1103
-4 -4 +5V
Scanner -3 -5 /ACC "L" to accelerate scanner motor rotation.
motor -1 -7 /DEC "L" to decelerate scanner motor rotation.
-2 -6
See Page 2-42 for details.

Front door switch Rear door switch

SW4 SW5

J3
-1 24VB 24VA J1013-1
24VA 24V when the ITB unit drawer, drum
-2 -2 cartridge drawer, toner cartridge door,
and delivery door are closed.
Power 0V when any of the drawer or door is
-3 -3 open.
supply 24VB
-5 -5
+5V
-4 -4

J501 J1010 +24VA

-7 -1
Toner -1 -15 +5V
density -5 -3 LED drive signal
/DENB
sensor -4 -4
DLP LED intensity signal
-3 -12
PS14 DLSHIFT Toner density detection setting signal
-2 -6
Toner density detection signal
-6 -2 DNS
See Page 2-75 for details.

Figure 2-2-7

2 - 11
CHAPTER 2

DC Controller Input/Output Signals (6/7)

High-voltage power supply unit DC controller PCB

J1501
High- J1307 J1018 Primary high-voltage control
J1401 voltage Developing high-voltage control
PCB 2/2 9 Secondary transfer high-voltage control

See Page 2-20 for details.

J1306
5
J1305
J1320
J1601
J1201 High- J1301 J1019 Primary transfer high-voltage control
J1901 voltage ITB cleaning high-voltage control
PCB 1/2 13
J1902 See Page 2-20 for details.

Drum cartridge
J62 J62 J1004
-4 -A4 J60-4 -1
DRMDO Drum cartridge memory data output signal
-3 -A3 -3 -2
Memory PCB DRMDI Drum cartridge memory data input signal
-2 -A2 -2 -3 DRMCLK Drum cartridge memory serial clock signal
Photosensitive -1 -A1 -1 -4
DRMCS Cartridge memory select signal
drum -8 -B5 J61-5 -5
DRMC5V Drum cartridge detecition 5V
-7 -B4 -4 -6 DRMSET "H" when a drum cartridge is installed.
-5 -B2 -2 -8 See Page 2-4-4 for details.

J52 J52 J1016 +24VA

-9 -9 J51-2 JA1-7 -8 -7 +5V
-14 -14 -7 -2 -13 -2
-13 -13 -6 -3 -12 -3 /DUPRST Duplexing unit reset signal
-12 -12 -5 -4 -11 -4 DUPTXD Duplexing unit serial output signal
-11 -11 -4 -5 -10 -5
DUPRXD Duplexing unit serial input signal
Option -10 -10 -3 -6 -9 -6
DUPSCLK Serial clock signal
duplexing unit -8 -8 J50-7 -8 -7 -8
or /OPSIZE2
-6 -6 -6 -9 -6 -9
paper feeder /OPSIZE1 Paper size detection
-5 -5 -5 -10 -5 -10 /OPSIZE0
-4 -4 -4 -11 -4 -11
/OPP Paper feeder paper detection signal
-3 -3 -3 -12 -3 -12
/OPSET Paper feeder detection signal
-1 -1 -1 -14 -1 -14
/OPCLON "L" to rotate the paper pick-up roller.
J51-8
-15/-2 -15/-2 /J50-2 1/13 14/2 -1/-13

Figure 2-2-8

2 - 12
 CHAPTER 2

DC Controller Input/Output Signals (7/7)

DC controller PCB
Power switch
J5 Power supply J2 J1012
-2 -4 -10
SW6 PSWOFF "H" when the power switch is turned OFF.

Power control IC -3 -11 /PCONT "H" to switch the power OFF.

Fixing unit -5 -9
abnormality FXSTS Upper/lower fixing heater status signal
detection circuit

JP1 -6 -8
ACTYP "L" when the 200V power supply is
+24VB -1 -6 installed.

-7 -13
Relay Fixing heater THI Fixing unit temperature signal
RL101 safety circuit -8 -6
FXROF "L" to turn the relay OFF.
-9 -5
FXENB When a pulse is output, the upper/lower
fixing heater can be turned ON.

-10 -4
Fixing heater FXUON "H" to turn the upper fixing heater ON.
drive circuit -12 -2
FXLON "H" to turn the lower fixing heater ON.

Fixing unit
Upper
thermoswitch

TPU Upper fixing

heater

HU Upper J80 J87 J1011

thermistor
Upper fixing roller -2 -3 -6 -3 THRU The voltage decreases as the upper
surface temperature -1 -4 -5 -4 fixing roller temperature increases.
detection

Lower -4 -1 -8 -1
/FXSET "L" when the fixing unit is installed.
thermoswitch -3 -2 -7 -2
Lower fixing
TPL heater

HL Lower J81 J87 J1011

thermistor
Lower fixing roller -4 -5 -4 -5 THRL The voltage decreases as the
surface temperature -3 -6 -3 -6 lower fixing roller temperature
detection increases.
JP2 -2 -7 -2 -7
FXTYP "L" when the 200V fixing unit is
-1 -8 -1 -8 installed.

Figure 2-2-9

2 - 13
CHAPTER 2

B. Fixing Control Circuit

1. Outline
The fixing unit contains the upper and lower fixing rollers. Each roller has a halogen heater, a
thermoswitch, and a thermistor.
The fixing unit temperature is controlled by the D-CPU on the DC controller PCB. The fixing
heater is driven by the drive circuits (relay circuit, fixing heater drive circuit, fixing heater safe-
ty circuit, and fixing unit abnormality circuit) in the power supply unit.
The D-CPU detects whether the fixing unit is installed or not by checking FIXING UNIT
DETECTION signal (/FXSET). If the fixing unit is installed, /FXSET signal is “L” and D-CPU
assumes the fixing unit is installed in the printer. If it is not installed, /FXSET signal becomes
“H.”
When it detects that the fixing unit is not installed, the D-CPU reports it to the video con-
troller.

Upper fixing roller

Thermoswitch Fixing unit Power supply unit DC controller PCB

Relay
circuit

FIXING HEATER DRIVE signals

Fixing heater (FXUON, FXLON )
drive circuit

Halogen
heater FIXING TEMPERATURE signal (THI) D-CPU
Lower RELAY DRIVE signal (FXROF) IC1001
fixing roller Thermistor FIXING HEATER DRIVE ENABLE signal
Fixing heater (FXENB)
safety circuit

Fixing unit STATUS signal (FXSTS)

abnormality
detection circuit

FIXING TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal (THRL, THRU)

FIXING UNIT TYPE DETECTION signal (FXTYP)
FIXING UNIT DETECTION signal (/FXSET)

Figure 2-2-10

2 - 14
 CHAPTER 2

2. Fixing temperature control

DC controller
Fixing unit Power supply unit PCB

Upper thermistor RL101

Fixing heater drive circuit

Upper fixing
roller Upper fixing heater
drive circuit

+5V

Upper
thermoswitch
FXUON
Lower
thermoswitch
Lower fixing heater D-CPU
drive circuit IC1001
Lower fixing
roller +5V

Lower thermistor
FXLON

FXTHL

FXTHU

Figure 2-2-11

The fixing unit temperature is detected by the upper thermistor (THU) on the upper fixing roller
and the lower thermistor (THL) on the lower fixing roller. As the surface temperature of the
upper and lower fixing rollers increases, the THU and THL resistances decrease and the voltage
of the FIXING TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal (THRU, THRL) input to the D-CPU (IC1001)
on the DC controller PCB decreases.
The D-CPU controls the FIXING HEATER DRIVE signal (FXUON, FXLON) according to the
THRU and THRL signal voltages so that the fixing temperature reaches the prescribed value.
• The target temperature of the fixing rollers during standby : 163°C (lower/upper fixing roller)
• The target temperature of the fixing rollers during full-color printing : 177°C (lower/upper
fixing roller)
• The target temperature of the fixing rollers during mono-color printing: 173°C (lower/upper
fixing roller)
The target temperature of the fixing rollers during printing is changed only under the fol-
lowing condition.
• After it prints more than 5 pages with mono-color continuous printing mode. : 168°C

2 - 15
CHAPTER 2

• If the upper thermistor detects 200°C or more with mono-color continuous printing mode. :
Turn OFF the heaters.

3. Fixing unit protection function

The printer has three protective functions to prevent excursion of the fixing heater.
• The D-CPU monitors the voltages of the UPPER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETEC-
TION signal (THRU) and the LOWER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
(THRL). If one or both of the voltages are abnormal, the D-CPU assumes a fixing heater fail-
ure, reports it to the video controller, and turns the heaters OFF.
• If the fixing temperature rises excessively and the temperature detected with the upper
and/or lower thermistor is higher than about 240°C, the safety circuit cuts the power to the
heaters regardless of the D-CPU output. At the same time, the D-CPU reports a power sup-
ply unit failure to the video controller.
• If the fixing temperature rises excessively and the temperature of the upper and/or lower
thermoswitch is higher than about 240°C, the upper and lower thermoswitches are turned
OFF and the power to the fixing heaters is interrupted. When it detects interruption of the
power to the heaters, the D-CPU reports a heater broken wire to the video controller.

2 - 16
 CHAPTER 2

4. Fixing unit abnormality detection

A fixing unit abnormality is detected by the following three circuits:
a. D-CPU on the DC controller PCB
b. Fixing heater safety circuit (in the power supply circuit)
c. Fixing unit abnormality detection circuit (in the power supply circuit)
The detection function of each circuit is described below.

Fixing unit Power supply unit DC controller PCB

+24V

RL101
THU EEPROM
Upper thermistor

Upper
thermo- T101
switch
FXUON
Lower Fixing heater
thermo- drive circuit FXLON
switch

THL 10 12 5 /FXROF
6
Lower thermistor /FXENB D-CPU
Fixing heater 2 IC1001
safety circuit 14 THI
FXSTS

JP1 ACTYP

+5V
IC103
7 +5V FXSEL
+5V
IC103 +5V
1 +5V

Fixing unit abnormality

detection circuit
+5V
JP2

THRL
THRU FXTYP

/FXSET

Figure 2-2-12

2 - 17
CHAPTER 2

a. If the D-CPU detects a fixing heater failure

If the fixing unit is heated excessively or does not reach the prescribed temperature for some
reason or other, the D-CPU deactivates the relay to interrupt the power to the heater and stops
sending the signal that drives the fixing heater.
The DC controller notifies the video controller of the fixing unit failure.
The D-CPU assumes a fixing heater failure when the fixing unit temperature is as follows:
1) Abnormal low temperature
The fixing unit temperature reaches the target value, then becomes 120°C or less. (Open ther-
mistor or a broken fixing heater wire)

2) Abnormal high temperature

The fixing unit temperature exceeds 215°C during standby or printing. (Thermistor short)

3) Warmup error
The following occurs after the fixing heater drive starts. (Open thermistor or thermistor error)
• The temperature does not reach 40°C within 130 seconds after the fixing unit drive starts.
• The temperature does not reach 60°C within 80 seconds after it reaches 40°C.
• The temperature does not reach 80°C within 80 seconds after it reaches 60°C.
• The temperature does not reach 100°C within 80 seconds after it reaches 80°C.
• The temperature does not reach 120°C within 80 seconds after it reaches 100°C.
• The temperature does not reach 140°C within 80 seconds after it reaches 120°C.
• The temperature does not reach 160°C within 100 seconds after it reaches 140°C.

4) Thermistor broken wire

• The thermistor broken wire is assessed, if the following occurs when the fixing unit temper-
ature is lower than 60°C in the initial condition after power-ON.
• When the thermistor sensitivity (note) is on the low temperature side, the fixing unit tem-
perature is -5°C or less
• The fixing unit temperature when the thermistor sensitivity is on the low temperature side
is the same as the fixing unit temperature when the thermistor sensitivity is on the high tem-
perature side. (Open thermistor or thermistor abnormality)

Note: Thermistor sensitivity switching

To maintain the precision of thermistor detection regardless of the low and high tem-
perature areas, the D-CPU uses the THERMISTOR SENSITIVITY SWITCHING signal
(THSEL signal) to switch the thermistor sensitivity between the mode in which the low-
temperature detection precision is high and the mode in which the high-temperature
detection precision is high. If the THSEL signal is “L”, the thermistor is in the low-tem-
perature detection mode, and if it is “H”, the thermistor is in the high-temperature detec-
tion mode.

2 - 18
 CHAPTER 2

b. If the fixing heater safety circuit detects an upper or lower fixing heater failure
The safety circuit in the power supply unit cuts the power to the upper and lower fixing heaters
if the fixing temperature rises abnormally.
This circuit operates as follows (see fig.2-2-12):
The fixing heater safety circuit in the power supply unit monitors the FIXING UNIT TEM-
PERATURE DETECTION signal (THI) input to pin 14. THI is generated from the UPPER FIXING
ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal (THRU) and the LOWER FIXING ROLLER TEM-
PERATURE DETECTION signal (THRL). If the output voltage from the thermistor reaches about
1.4 V due to a fixing temperature rise, the fixing heater safety circuit makes the No.5 pin out-
put “L” and turns the relay (RL101) OFF. This turns the upper and lower fixing heaters OFF.
To reset this circuit, turn the power OFF, allow 30 minutes or more, then turn the power ON
again.

c. If the fixing unit abnormality detection circuit detects a failure

The fixing unit abnormality detection circuit is in the power supply unit and monitors the AC
current flowing through the upper/lower fixing heaters (No.10 pin on the IC 102) and the RELAY
DRIVE signal (No.5 pin on the fixing heater safety circuit). The circuit also sends the FXSTS sig-
nal (UPPER/LOWER FIXING HEATER STATUS DETECTION signal) to the D-CPU in the DC con-
troller.
The AC current that flows through the upper/lower fixing heaters is detected by the voltage
induced at T101. The voltage is monitored by IC 103. If the upper/lower fixing heater wire is
broken or a fixing drive circuit failure has occurred, and the AC current does not flow, the
UPPER/LOWER FIXING HEATER STATUS DETECTION signal (FXSTS) goes "L". (If the AC cur-
rent flows normally, the FXSTS signal changes between "H" and "L" at constant intervals.)
When the FXSTS signal sets "L", the DC controller determines that the fixing heater wire is
broken or that a fixing heater drive circuit failure has occurred and stops driving the fixing
heater. The DC controller then notifies the video controller of the fixing unit failure.

5. Incorrect rated voltage fixing unit detection

The fixing unit abnormality detection circuit checks whether the rated voltages of the power sup-
ply and the fixing unit match. If a 100V power supply is connected with a 220V fixing unit, the
fixing unit abnormality detection circuit judges that the rated voltages are mismatched. If the
rated voltage of the fixing unit is not correct, the D-CPU on the DC controller PCB reports a fix-
ing unit type mismatch to the video controller and stops the printer.
The rated voltage of the power supply is set with the jumper (JP1). (JP1 is open for the 100V
power supply and shorted for the 200V power supply.)
This information is monitored by the D-CPU using the POWER SUPPLY TYPE DETECTION
signal (ACTYP).
On the other hand, the rated voltage of the fixing unit is set with the jumper (JP2). (JP2 is
open for the 100V fixing unit and shorted for the 200V fixing unit.)
This information is monitored by the D-CPU using the FIXING UNIT TYPE DETECTION signal
(FXTYP).
The D-CPU checks whether the rated voltages of the power supply and the fixing unit match.
If they do not match, the D-CPU judges that the incorrect fixing unit is installed.

2 - 19
CHAPTER 2

C. High-voltage Power Supply Circuit

1. Outline
This circuit applies voltage to the primary charging roller, developing cylinder, primary transfer
roller, secondary transfer roller, ITB cleaning roller, and upper fixing roller according to the
instructions sent from the DC controller.
DC voltage or superimposed voltage of AC voltage and DC voltage is applied to the primary
charging roller, developing cylinder, and ITB cleaning roller. Positive or negative DC voltage is
applied to the primary transfer roller and secondary transfer roller. Negative DC voltage is
applied to the upper fixing roller.

Developing
cylinder

Primary
charging roller

Primary
Upper transfer roller
fixing roller

ITB cleaning roller

Secondary
transfer roller

ITB cleaning Primary transfer

high-voltage high-voltage
generation circuit generation circuit

Primary charging Developing Secondary transfer

high-voltage high-voltage high-voltage
generation circuit generation circuit generation circuit

High-voltage PCB unit

D-CPU M-CPU
DC controller PCB

Figure 2-2-13

2 - 20
 CHAPTER 2

2. Operation
a. Primary charging high-voltage generation circuit
This circuit is controlled by the two signals (PRIMARY CHARGING AC BIAS DRIVE signal,
PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS DRIVE/DC BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal) sent from the DC con-
troller. Primary charging DC bias and primary charging AC bias are generated in this circuit
and applied to the primary charging roller.
The PRIMARY CHARGING AC BIAS DRIVE signal (/HV1AC) controls ON/OFF of the AC bias
applied to the primary charging roller. The PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS DRIVE/DC BIAS
VALUE CONTROL signal (HV1PWM) controls ON/OFF of the DC bias applied to the primary
charging roller and changes the value of the primary charging DC bias in the image area (See
note).

PRIMARY CHARGING AC BIAS

DRIVE signal (/HV1AC)
Primary charging roller

Primary charging
DC controller PCB high-voltage Drum cartridge
AC+DC
PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS generation circuit
DRIVE / DC BIAS VALUE
CONTROL signal (HV1PWM)

Figure 2-2-14

Note: The primary charging DC bias value in the image area changes with the developing DC
bias in each color according to the video data sent from the video controller or the den-
sity control command.

b. Developing high-voltage generation circuit

This circuit is controlled by the four signals (DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE signal, DEVEL-
OPING DC BIAS DRIVE signal, DEVELOPING BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal, and DEVELOPING
BIAS COLOR BLACK SWITCH signal) sent from the DC controller PCB. Developing DC bias and
developing AC bias are generated in this circuit and applied to the developing cylinder.

DEVELOPING DC BIAS DRIVE

signal (/DEVDC) Toner cartridge
DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE
signal (/DEAC)
Developing
DC controller PCB DEVELOPING BIAS VALUE high-voltage
CONTROL signal (DEVPWM) AC+DC
generation circuit
DEVELOPING BIAS COLOR
BLACK SWITCH signal (DEVACSEL)
Developing cylinder

Figure 2-2-15

2 - 21
CHAPTER 2

The DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE signal (/DEVAC) controls ON/OFF of the AC bias applied
to the developing cylinder. The DEVELOPING DC BIAS DRIVE signal (/DEVDC) controls
ON/OFF of the DC bias applied to the developing cylinder.
The DEVELOPING BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal (/DEVPWM) changes the value of the devel-
oping bias in the image area (note). When developing color toner (Y, M, C), the voltage val-
ues of both DC and AC are changed. When developing black toner, only DC voltage value is
changed (AC voltage is a fixed value).
The DEVELOPING BIAS COLOR BLACK SWITCH signal switches bias control between color
and black.

Note: The developing bias value in image area changes according to the video data sent from
the video controller or the density control command.

c. Primary transfer high-voltage generation circuit

This circuit is controlled by the two signals (PRIMARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE BIAS
DRIVE/DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal and the PRIMARY TRANSFER DC NEGA-
TIVE BIAS DRIVE signal sent from the DC controller. Primary transfer DC positive bias and pri-
mary transfer DC negative bias are generated in this circuit and applied to the primary transfer
roller in the ITB unit.
The PRIMARY TRANSFER DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal (/TR1N) controls ON/OFF of the
DC negative bias applied to the primary transfer roller. The PRIMARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE
BIAS DRIVE/DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal (/TR1PWM) controls ON/OFF of the
DC positive bias applied to the primary transfer roller and changes the value of the primary
transfer DC positive bias during the primary transfer (see note).
The primary transfer output current is detected in the current detection circuit and fed back
to the DC controller as TR1S signal. The DC controller controls the /TR1PWM based on this fed
back signal.

PRIMARY TRANSFER DC NEGATIVE

BIAS DRIVE signal (TR1N)
Primary transfer roller
PRIMARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE
BIAS DRIVE / DC POSITIVE BIAS Primary transfer
DC controller PCB VALUE CONTROL signal (/TR1PWM) high-voltage ITB unit
generation circuit DC
PRIMARY TRANSFER OUTPUT
CURRENT signal (TR1S)

Figure 2-2-16

Note: In full color printing, as four colors of toner are piled up on the intermediate transfer
belt during the primary transfer, the holding force of the toner weakens as the 2nd, 3rd,
and 4th color toner are transferred to the belt. Therefore, in full color printing, the pri-
mary transfer DC bias is increased for each color after the 1st color transfer in order to
increase the holding force of the toner.

2 - 22
 CHAPTER 2

d. Secondary transfer high-voltage generation circuit

This circuit is controlled by the two signals (SECONDARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE BIAS
DRIVE/DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal and the SECONDARY TRANSFER DC NEG-
ATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal sent from the DC controller. Secondary transfer DC positive bias and
secondary transfer DC negative bias are generated in this circuit and applied to the secondary
transfer roller.
The SECONDARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE/DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE CON-
TROL signal (/TR2PWM) controls ON/OFF of the DC positive bias applied to the secondary
transfer roller and changes the value of the secondary transfer DC positive bias. The bias value
is changed according to the print paper size and the environmental conditions. On the other
hand, the SECONDARY TRANSFER DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal (/TR2N) controls
ON/OFF of the DC negative bias applied to the secondary transfer roller.
The secondary transfer output current is detected in the current detection circuit and fed
back to the DC controller as TR2S signal. The DC controller controls /TR2PWM based on the
fed back signal.

SECONDARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE

BIAS DRIVE / DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE
CONTROL signal (/TR2PWM)
Secondary transfer roller

Secondary transfer
DC controller PCB SECONDARY TRANSFER DC NEGATIVE high-voltage
BIAS DRIVE signal (TR2N) DC
generation circuit
SECONDARY TRANSFER OUTPUT
CURRENT signal (TR2S)

Figure 2-2-17

2 - 23
CHAPTER 2

e. ITB cleaning high-voltage generation circuit

This circuit is controlled by the four signals (ITB CLEANING DC POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE/DC
POSITIVE BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal, ITB CLEANING AC BIAS DRIVE signal, ITB CLEANING
AC BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal, ITB CLEANING DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal) output
from the DC controller. ITB cleaning DC positive bias, ITB cleaning DC negative bias, ITB clean-
ing AC bias are generated in this circuit and applied to the ITB cleaning roller.

ITB CLEANING DC POSITIVE BIAS

DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE
CONTROL signal (/IDCPWM)

ITB CLEANING AC BIAS DRIVE

signal (/ICLAC)

ITB CLEANING AC BIAS VALUE ITB cleaning

DC controller PCB CONTROL signal (/IACPWM) high-voltage ITB unit
AC+DC
ITB CLEANING DC NEGATIVE BIAS generation circuit
DRIVE signal (/ICLN)

ITB cleaning roller

Figure 2-2-18

The ITB CLEANING DC POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE /DC POSITIVE BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal
(/IDCPWM) controls ON/OFF of the DC positive bias applied to the ITB cleaning roller. It also
changes the value of the ITB cleaning DC positive bias according to the environmental condi-
tions.
The ITB CLEANING DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal (/ICLN) controls ON/OFF of the DC
negative bias applied to the ITB cleaning roller.
The ITB CLEANING AC BIAS DRIVE signal (/ICLAC) controls ON/OFF of the AC bias applied
to the ITB cleaning roller.
The ITB CLEANING AC BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal (/IACPWM) changes the value of the
ITB cleaning AC bias according to the environmental conditions.

2 - 24
 CHAPTER 2

D. Low-voltage Power Supply Circuit

1. Outline
When the power switch (SW6) is turned ON, the AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power
supply circuit in the power supply unit. This circuit supplies the power, +24VDC and +5VDC,
which are required for the printer, and 3.3/5VDC for the video controller.
Low-voltage power supply circuit

CB101 Noise filter

AC power Circuit
supply breaker
F1 Fuse

Rush current
prevention circuit

Rectifier 24V overvoltage

circuit detection circuit
Front door
Switching Rectifier switch
Transformer circuit
transistor SW4

24V overcurrent
detection circuit DC-DC SW5
DC-DC convertor
Control IC Rear door
switch

+24VB

+24VA
Photo- Overcurrect/
Power coupler overvoltage
switch detection
circuit
Photo- Photo-
SW6 coupler coupler
Connector
+5V
PSWOFF

PCB
/PCONT

+3.3/5V
+3.3/5V

Video
controller
PCB
DC controller PCB

+24VA Option
• Duplexing unit
+24VA

+24VA

+24VA

+24VA

+24VA

+24VA

+5V
• Paper feeder
+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+24VA
+5V
+24VB
Multi- High-
Feed Developing Density Scanner Laser Solenoids/
purpose voltage BD
PCB PCB sensor motor driver Fans Sensors clutches
tray PCB unit circuit

Figure 2-2-19

2 - 25
CHAPTER 2

When the power switch (SW6) is turned ON, the power supply circuit sets the POWER OFF sig-
nal (PSWOFF) to “L” and notifies the DC controller that the power switch is ON. The DC con-
troller sets the POWER OFF CONTROL signal (PCONT) to “H” and turns ON the control IC in the
power supply circuit, and the AC power supply is sent to the power supply circuit via the circuit
breaker and the noise filter. +24VDC is supplied for the paper pick up motor, scanner motor
and high-voltage power supply PCB. +5VDC is supplied for the sensors, IC, etc. in the DC con-
troller PCB.
+24VDC consists of +24VA, which is shut OFF when the front door switch (SW4) or the rear
door switch (SW5) is turned OFF by opening the drum cartridge drawer, ITB unit drawer, toner
cartridge door, or delivery door and +24VB, which is always supplied whether SW4 and SW5 are
turned ON or OFF.
The low-voltage power supply circuit monitors the 5VS signal fed back from the connector
PCB to ensure the 5V power supply to the video controller.

2. Remote Switch
This printer utilizes the remote switch that does not turn OFF the power until the printer is
ready to be turned OFF.
When the power is turned OFF, the power circuit sets the POWER OFF signal (PSWOFF) to
"H", and the printer will perform the following procedures:
• Initializes I/O, stops the scanner motor, fixing unit (pressure release) and each of the loads.
• Writes into the EEPROMs in the drum cartridge and DC controller.
• Checks the fun rotation (note).
When the printer completes the above procedures, the DC controller sets the POWER OFF
CONTROL signal (PCONT) to "L" so that the switching transistor on the power circuit goes OFF,
and thus stops the supplies of +5 V, 3.3/+5 V and +24 VB.

Note: When the temperature of the fixing heater is 100 °C or more, the fun is driven for ten
minutes. However, when the power switch is OFF and the temperature of the fixing unit
is 100 °C or less, the fun will be stopped.

3. Protection Function
Each DC power supply circuit has an overcurrent protective function and overvoltage protective
function, which prevent power supply circuit failure by automatically interrupting the output
voltage when troubles, such as short, develop on the loads and result in overcurrent flow or
abnormal voltage.
If these functions are activated and no DC voltage is output from the low-voltage power sup-
ply circuit, turn OFF the power switch (SW6), unplug the power cord, rectify the trouble on the
load, and then turn ON the power switch again. (note)
The low-voltage power supply circuit contains the circuit breaker (CB101) and fuse (F1).
When excessive current flows, the CB101 is turned OFF or the F1 is cut to interrupt the power
supply.

Note: Protective functions remain active for 2 minutes after activation. Wait at least for 2 min-
utes to turn the power back ON again.

2 - 26
 CHAPTER 2

4. Power-saving mode
This printer enters the power-saving mode, which is called the sleep state, when the command
from the video controller is received. The sleep state consists of 2 levels which are also deter-
mined by the command from the video controller.
In response to the power-saving command sent from the video controller, D-CPU shuts off the
+24V and +5V power supplies, which drive various loads and sensors, according to the sleep
level of the power-saving command.

Table 2-2-1

Fixing temperature
Sleep level Fan Motors/sensors Remarks
control
Level1 Stop Half-speed Stop Light sleep
Level2 Stop Stop Stop Deep sleep

The printer may not enter a sleep state immediately after receiving the sleep instruction. When
operating, the printer will enter the sleep state after the completion of printing. Or, when ini-
tializing, the printer will enter the sleep state at the pause of the initialization (note).

Note: After completion of print operation, the fan motor is rotated at its full speed for a spec-
ified period of time and then stopped (see page 2-35). When the sleep level 2 (deep sleep)
command is received, the fan motor is stopped in a specified period of time (about 10
min.) after the fixing temperature control is stopped. Therefore, it appears as if the
printer enters the sleep level 1 (light sleep) and then level 2.
If the fixing temperature is equal to or less than the specified temperature (about 70ÞC)
when the sleep level 2 command is sent, the fan motor is stopped immediately and the
printer enters the sleep level 2.

2 - 27
CHAPTER 2

E. Video Interface Control

1. Outline
To connect the printer to an external device, such as a host computer, a video controller PCB
(interface PCB) must be installed between the printer and the external device.
This section explains the kinds of interface signals exchanged between the printer and the
video controller PCB, and gives information about the sequence of printer operation making use
of interface signals.

External device Video controller DC controller

(host computer, etc.) PCB PCB

/LSYNC
/RDY
/CPRDY Laser
/SBSY
driver
VIDEO signa
/CBSY (VOUT0-7)
/SDM
/PRNT
VCLK
/VDOEN
/VDO0
/VDO1
/VDO2
l
/VDO3
/VDO4
/VDO5
/VDO6
/VDO7
/CCLK
/PPRDY
/TOP
/CCRT
/STS
/CMD
/PFED
/PDLV

Figure 2-2-20

2 - 28
 CHAPTER 2

2. Operation
When the power is switched ON, the printer enters the WAIT state.
When the printer is ready for operation after the WAIT period, the DC controller sends a
READY signal (/RDY) to the video controller to notify it that the printer is ready.
When the /RDY signal is “L” and data for a page is prepared, the video controller sends the
PRINT signal (/PRNT) to the DC controller.
When the DC controller receives the /PRNT signal, it starts the operation of the INITIAL
ROTATIONS (INTR) period.
At the end of the INTR period, the DC controller sends the TOP OF PAGE signal (/TOP) to the
video controller.
The video controller sends the VIDEO signals (/VDO0 to /VDO7) synchronized with the LINE
SYNC signal (/LSYNC) and the /TOP signal from the DC controller to the gate array. The DC
controller reads the /VDO0 to /VDO7 signals in synchronization with the PRINTER CLOCK sig-
nal (PCLK), then sends them to the laser driver PCB in the laser/scanner unit. The laser driv-
er PCB generates the PWM-modulated LASER DRIVE signal (laser/scanner internal signal)
which switches the laser diode ON and OFF to produce a modulated laser beam.
The resulting laser beam is scanned repeatedly across the photosensitive drum to form the
latent electrostatic image of the original image.
The latent image formed on the photosensitive drum is developed with toner, and transferred
to the intermediate transfer belt. In full color mode, this process is repeated on the intermedi-
ate transfer belt in the order of Bk (black), M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow). The toner
image transferred to the intermediate transfer belt is transferred to the paper and delivered onto
the face-down tray or face-up tray.
The DC controller checks for another /PRNT signal from the video controller during the pri-
mary transfer to the intermediate transfer belt.
If there is no /PRNT signal, the printer ends the PRINT sequence and begins the operation of
the LAST ROTATIONS period (LSTR). At the end of this period, the printer enters the STANDBY
(STBY) state.
If another /PRNT signal arrives during printing, however, the PRINT sequence continues.

2 - 29
CHAPTER 2

F. Other Control
1. Fixing motor control

DC controller PCB Feed PCB

REF5V +24VA
Fixing motor
driver J102
FIXMCA -1

+5V
J1014 J101 FIXMCB -2
-A12 FIXMA -A3
+5V Fixing
FIXMAO -3 motor
-A10 FIXMB -A5
IC117 M1
/FIXMAO -4
D-CPU
(IC1001)
FIXMBO -5
-A11 /FIXMA -A2
-A9 /FIXMB -A4
/FIXMBO -6

Figure 2-2-21

The fixing motor is a two-phase stepping motor. This motor is controlled by the fixing motor dri-
ver (IC117) on the feed PCB and operates the fixing unit, secondary transfer roller, feed belt, feed
roller, ITB contact clutch, ITB cleaning roller contact clutch, and secondary transfer contact
clutch.
When the fixing roller temperature reaches the fixing roller drive start temperature (100°C),
the D-CPU (IC1001) sends FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signals (FIXMA, FIXMB, /FIXMA, /FIXMB) to
IC117.
IC117 supplies drive signals (FIXMAO, /FIXMAO, FIXMBO, /FIXMBO) to the fixing motor in
response to these signals to rotate the motor.
The fixing motor changes rotational speeds; normal speed rotation, 50% low speed rotation,
and 33% low speed rotation.
The fixing motor changes its rotational direction between the fixing roller drive and the fixing
roller pressure ON/OFF operation. The fixing motor rotates clockwise to drive the fixing roller
and counter clockwise to turn the fixing roller pressure ON/OFF.

2 - 30
 CHAPTER 2

2. Paper pick-up motor control

DC controller PCB Feed PCB

Paper pick-up
motor driver
D-CPU
(IC1001)
+5V+24V J109
FEEDMAO -1
Pick-up
/FEEDMAO -2 motor

-A6 FEEDMA -A8 M2

IC101 FEEDMBO -3
-A5 /FEEDMA -A9
M-CPU
(IC1009) -A4 FEEDMB -A10
/FEEDMBO -4
-A3 /FEEDMB -A11

Figure 2-2-22

The pick-up motor is a two-phase stepping motor. This motor is controlled by the pick-up motor
driver (IC101) on the feed PCB and operates the cassette, multi-purpose tray, paper feeder, and
registration roller.
When the M-CPU (IC1009) receives a PRINT SEQUENCE SPECIFICATION command from the
D-CPU (IC1001), the M-CPU sends PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signals (FEEDMA, /FEEDMA,
FEEDMB, /FEEDMB) to IC101.
IC101 supplies drive signals (FEEDMAO, /FEEDMAO, FEEDMBO, /FEEDMBO) to the pick-
up motor in response to these signals to run the motor.
The pick-up motor changes rotational speeds; normal speed rotation, 50% low speed rotation,
and 33% low speed rotation.

2 - 31
CHAPTER 2

3. Developing rotary motor control

DC controller PCB Developing PCB

+24VA

D-CPU ROTMCA J203-1

(IC1001) Developing rotary
motor driver
+5V J1017 J201
-B7 -B8 ROTMCB -2
Developing
-B5 ROTMA -B10 ROTMAO -3 rotary motor

M3
-B4 ROTMB -B11 /ROTMAO -4
M-CPU +5V IC202
(IC1009)
ROTMBO -5
-B3 /ROTMAON -B12

-B1 /ROTMBON -B14 /ROTMBO -6

Figure 2-2-23

The developing rotary motor is a two-phase stepping motor. This motor is controlled by the
rotary motor driver (IC202) on the developing PCB and rotates the developing rotary.
When the M-CPU (IC1009) receives a PRINT SEQUENCE SPECIFICATION command from the
D-CPU (IC1001), the M-CPU sends a DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR DRIVE signals (ROTMA,
ROTMB, /ROTMAON, /ROTMBON) to IC202.
In response to these signals, IC202 rotates the developing rotary motor.
There are two developing rotary rotational speeds; normal speed during printing and low
speed during home position detection or when the rotary is shifting to the cartridge take-out
position.

2 - 32
 CHAPTER 2

4. Drum motor control

DC controller PCB Developing PCB

D-CPU
(IC1001)
Drum motor driver
REF5V

+5V J204
J1017 J201 DRMMAO -1
-A9 /DRMMAON -A6
+5V
-B9 /DRMMBON -B6
/DRMMAO -2 Drum motor
IC235
M-CPU M4
(IC1009) DRMMBO -3
-A10 DRMMA -A5

/DRMMBO -4
-B10 DRMMB -B5

Figure 2-2-24

The drum motor is a two-phase stepping motor. This motor is controlled by the drum motor
driver (IC235) on the developing PCB and operates the ITB unit and the drum cartridge.
When the M-CPU (IC1009) receives a PRINT SEQUENCE SPECIFICATION command from the
D-CPU (IC1001), the M-CPU sends DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signals (DRMMA, DRMMB, /DRM-
MAON, /DRMMBON ) to IC235.
In response to these signals, IC235 supplies drive signals (DRMMAO, /DRMMAO, DRMMBO,
/DRMMBO) to the motor to run the drum motor.
The motor rotates when the /DRMMAON and /DRMMBON signals are set to “L” and stops
when “H.”
There are three drum motor rotational speeds; normal speed, 50 % low speed, and 33 % low
speed.

2 - 33
CHAPTER 2

5. Toner cartridge motor control

DC controller PCB Developing PCB

REF5V +24VA
Toner cartridge
M-CPU motor driver J205
(IC1009) SLVMCA -1

+5V
J1017 J201 SLVMCB -2
-A4 -A11 Toner
/SLVMON cartridge
SLVMAO -3 motor

IC227 M5
S-CPU /SLVMAO -4
(IC1010)

SLVMBO -5
-A6 SLVMA -A9

-A5 SLVMB -A10 /SLVMBO -6

Toner cartridge
contact sensor
PS11
J206

Figure 2-2-25

The toner cartridge motor is a two-phase stepping motor. This motor is controlled by the toner
cartridge motor driver (IC227) on the developing PCB, operates the developing cylinder in the
toner cartridge, and perform the toner cartridge contact/separation operation.
When the S-CPU (IC1010) receives a PRINT SEQUENCE SPECIFICATION command from the
M-CPU (IC1009), the S-CPU (IC1010) sends TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE signals (SLVMA,
SLVMB, /SLVMON) to IC227.
In response to these signals, IC227 rotates the toner cartridge motor.
The rotational direction of the toner cartridge motor is changed between the developing cylin-
der drive and the toner cartridge contact/separation movement drive. The motor rotates count-
er clockwise to drive the developing cylinder and clockwise to perform the toner cartridge con-
tact/separation operation. The toner cartridge position is detected by the toner cartridge contact
sensor (PS11). The S-CPU monitors the signal sent from the sensor to control the motor rota-
tion. The M-CPU also monitors the signal.
See page 2-54 for details of the toner cartridge contact sensor.

2 - 34
 CHAPTER 2

6. Fan motor control

The printer has two exhaust fans (92-fan and 60-fan) and one inducting fan (40-fan).
These three fans work for exhausting air, exhausting heat and cooling air in the printer.
The control circuit of each fan motor is shown below.

DC controller PCB

+24V
+5V
Q1046
Q1045
92/60FANHF
D-CPU 37
(IC1001) 36 /40FANRDY

Developing PCB

Q1018 Q1016 92-fan

92/60FANON J1017 J201 J209
158 -B12 92/60FANON -B3 -3
-A1 PGND -A14 -1 F1
-A13 /92FANRDY -A2 -2
157
/92FANRDY
+5V
J208 60-fan
-3
/60FANRDY -B13 /60FANRDY -B2 -2
155
+5V -1 F2
PGND

Gate array
(IC1003)
+24VA

IC1012
12V generation
Circuit
J1022 J77
Q1017 /40FANRDY 40-fan
-2 -4
156 40FANON -3 /40FAN12V -3
Q1015
-1 PGND -1 F3
40FANNC -4 40FANNC -2
72

Figure 2-2-26

The fan motor is a DC brushless motor containing a hall element and has the motor driver cir-
cuit in it.
At the same time as the printer is powered ON, the D-CPU (IC 1001) sets the 92/60 FANON
(No.159 pin) to "H" by controlling the gate array (IC 1003). In response to the signal, the tran-
sistors (Q 1018 and 1016) turns ON, and the 92/60 FAN DRIVE signal (92/60 FANON) sets "H"
to rotate the 90 and 60 fans. Note that the 92 and 60 fans rotate at the half speed in response
to the 92/60 FAN HALF SPEED CONTROL signal output from Pin 37 on the D-CPU (IC 1001)
until printing is started (Note 1). Also, at this point, the IC 1003 sets the 40 FAN DRIVE signal
to (40 FANON) of No.156 pin "H". In response to the signal, the transistors (Q 1017 and 1018)
are turned ON and the 40 FAN DRIVE signal (40 FAN 12V) sets "H", and then the 40 fan starts
rotating.
The 92 and 60 fans start rotating at the powering-ON whether or not the door is open.
However, the 40 fan discontinues rotating when the connector (J77-3) is disconnected to inter-

2 - 35
CHAPTER 2

rupt the 40 FAN 12 V due to the drum cartridge drawer open, and also the J77-4 is disconnected
along with the J77-3. Detecting that the 40 FAN NO CONTACT signal (40 FANNC) is "H" via the
IC 1003, the D-CPU notifies "40 fan no contact" to the video controller (Note 2).
While the fan motors are rotating at the specified number of rotation, the 92 FAN READY (/92
FANRDY), 60 FAN READY (/60 FANRDY), and 40 FAN READY (/40 FANRDY) signals remain "L".
The D-CPU detects the fan lock periodically during the fan motor rotation. When the /92
FANRDY/60 FANRDY and /40 FANRDY are "H" for the specified period of time, the D-CPU stops
the printer and notifies a "fan motor failure" to the video controller.
The fan lock detection of the 40-fan is not performed when the drum cartridge drawer is open.
The following are the conditions under which the D-CPU stops the fans.
• Sleep command is sent from the video controller.
• Fan lock is detected.
• Power-OFF is detected.
• Fixing temperature control is OFF for the specified period of time due to the door open, paper
jam, or failure.
The D-CPU checks the fixing roller temperature before turning OFF the fans. The fans are
turned OFF immediately if the temperature is lower than the specified value. The fans are driv-
en for the specified period of time if the temperature exceeds the specified value.

Notes: 1. After the completion of print operation, the 92 fan and 60 fan keep rotating at the full
speed for the specified period of time in order to exhaust heat in the printer and then
starts rotating at the half speed.
2. When the D-CPU detects the “drum cartridge drawer open”, a “40- fan no contact”
error is not valid.

2 - 36
 CHAPTER 2

III. LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM

A. Laser System
1. Outline

Video controller PCB

/LSYNC /TOP /VDO0~7 VCLK VDOEN /PRNT

/BDIN
DC controller PCB
ILM
LON /LSENB PCLK VOUT0~7 /ACC /DEC
Laser driver Collimator lens
PCB
Cylindrical lens
Six-faced prism mirror

Scanner driver

BD PCB Scanner motor

Focusing lens

BD mirror

Reflective mirror

Photosensitive drum

Figure 2-3-1

The VIDEO signals (/VDO0 to /VDO7) are sent to the laser driver PCB in synchronization with
the PRINTER CLOCK signal (PCLK) generated from the BD INPUT signal (/BDIN) in the DC con-
troller. The laser driver pulse-width-modulates the video data to produce a PWM VIDEO DATA
signal (/VDATA).
The laser driver turns the laser diode ON and OFF according to the /VDATA signal and gen-
erates the modulated laser beam only when the LASER EMISSION ENABLE signal (/LSENB)
from the DC controller is “L”.
The modulated laser beam is aligned by a collimator lens and a cylindrical lens into a paral-

2 - 37
CHAPTER 2

lel beam that strikes the scanning mirror that is rotating at constant speed.
The beam is reflected from the six-faced prism mirror, then brought to a point of focus on the
photosensitive drum by the focusing lens located before the scanning mirror and the reflective
mirror.
As the scanning mirror rotates at a constant speed, the beam is scanned across the drum.
The drum also rotates at a constant speed. As it rotates, the laser beam successively scans
across its surface. Thus the laser beam builds up an image on the drum surface.

2 - 38
 CHAPTER 2

B. Laser Control Circuit

1. Outline

/BDI
DC controller PCB BD PCB

Laser driver PCB

ILM Laser current
monitor circuit
+5V
LASER5V
/PRNT R1117
D-CPU PWM IC R1118
(IC1001) PCLK
/TOP /DTOP PWM (IC1101)
VOUT0~7
circuit
LON LON LD PD
BD synch- /BDO /LSENB
ronizing IC
(IC1006) /VDATA
PCLK Gate
PCLK array
VCLK (IC1003) RO
Line Switching circuit LD
/VDO0~7 memory
/VDOEN (IC1005)
Current
Constant /voltage PD
/LSYNC current conversion
circuit circuit
/LSENB
C1122
M-CPU /DTOPE Laser driver IC
(IC1009) /ITBHP (IC1102)

Figure 2-3-2

This circuit controls the laser in response to the VIDEO signals (/VDO0 to /VDO7) from the
video controller.
The D-CPU outputs the TOP OF PAGE signal (/TOP), which is generated based on the ITB
HOME POSITION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP), to the video controller in a specified period of
time after receiving the PRINT signal (/PRNT). (See page 2-57 for ITB home position detection.)
The video controller sets the VIDEO DATA ENABLE signal (/VDOEN) “L” in a specified period of
time after the /TOP signal is input and sends the /VDO signal of an image to the DC controller.
The /VDO signal sent from the video controller is input to the line memory (IC1005) on the DC
controller PCB. This line memory is a buffer that holds a line of data. The video data written
into the line memory is read with the PRINTER CLOCK signal (PCLK) synchronized by the BD
INPUT signal (/BDIN) and sent to the gate array (IC1003). The gate array generates the VIDEO
DATA signals (VOUT0 to 7) based on the /VDO signal and UNBLANKING signal (/UNBLK:
LASER EMISSION signal to detect /BD signal in the non-image area) and sends them to the
laser driver PCB.
The VIDEO DATA signals sent to the laser driver PCB is pulse-width-modulated (laser-ON
time is changed according to the /VDO signal sent from the video controller) in the PWM IC
(IC1101) and sent to the laser drive IC (IC1102) as LASER DRIVE signal (/VDATA). The laser
diode (LD) is turned ON/OFF according to the /VDATA signal at a constant intensity.
The laser drive IC turns ON the laser diode according to the /VDATA signal when the LASER

2 - 39
CHAPTER 2

EMISSION ENABLE signal (/LSEBN) is “L”.

This circuit contains the laser current monitor circuit, which has a function to measure the
laser current value, in order to prevent image defect caused by deterioration of the laser diode.
During image formation, the switching circuit turns ON/OFF the laser with /VDATA signal.
When the /VDATA is “H” to turn OFF the laser, the current enters the resistance (R1117, R1118)
instead of the laser diode as RO. The laser current monitor circuit sends back the current to
the A/D port in the D-CPU as the LASER CURRENT MONITOR signal (ILM). The D-CPU stops
laser emission and notifies the video controller of the laser failure when the input current value
exceeds the specified value.

2. Laser intensity control

The automatic power control (APC) of the laser diode is performed by the laser drive IC (IC1102)
to turn the laser diode ON at a constant intensity.
The DC controller sets the LASER FORCED EMISSION signal (LON) to “H” with the specified
timing in the non-image area for each line of image data or when the power is turned ON. When
the LASER EMISSION ENABLE signal (/LSENB) and the LASER DRIVE signal (/VDATA) are set
to “L”, the constant current circuit enters the sample mode (mode that performs APC). As a
result, the laser diode (LD) emits light and the intensity of the light is detected by the photo diode
(PD).
The intensity detected by the PD is fed back to the constant current circuit via the cur-
rent/voltage conversion circuit and compared with the current value set in the laser drive cir-
cuit IC in order to control the laser current sent to the laser diode.
After the specified period of time (after completion of UNBLANKING period), the LON signal is
set to “L”, the constant current circuit enters the hold mode (mode that stores the laser intensi-
ty determined by the APC), and forced light emission of laser diode (LD) completes. The laser
drive IC converts the determined laser intensity to voltage and stores it in the C1122.
The voltage stored in the C1122 is discharged when the next line is completed and the
/LSENB signal becomes “H”.
When the VIDEO signal is received, the /LSENB signal and the LON signal become “L” and
the /VDATA signal is output, and then the laser driver enters the print mode.
Table 2-3-1 shows the relationship of the signals mentioned above.

Table 2-3-1

Laser /LSENB /VDATA LON

APC sample mode ON L L H

Hold/print mode OFF/ON L H/L L

Clear mode OFF H

3. Horizontal sync control

There is a small fixed mirror (BD mirror) in the optical path of the laser beam. On reaching the
scanning start position, the laser beam is reflected by the BD mirror to the BD PCB in the
laser/scanner unit during the unblanking period.
On receiving the laser beam, the BD PCB generates the /BDIN signal and then sends it to the
gate array (IC1003) on the DC controller PCB. The gate array produces the horizontal sync sig-
nal (LSYNC) based on the /BDIN signal and sends it to the video controller.

2 - 40
 CHAPTER 2

4. Laser diode emission control

The /VDO signal input to the DC controller from the video controller is performed mask pro-
cessing in the gate array (IC1003) and sent to the PWM IC as the LASER DRIVE signals (VOUT0
to 7). The gate array performs horizontal and vertical mask processing to the VDO signals
according to the paper size data. The paper size data is supplied to the D-CPU by the paper size
detection switch when the paper pick-up source is the cassette and by the paper size specifica-
tion command sent from the video controller when it is the multi-purpose tray.
The laser drive circuit turns ON/OFF the laser diode according to the LASER DRIVE signal
(/VDATA) output from the PWM IC when the LASER EMISSION ENABLE signal (/LSENB) and
LASER FORCED EMISSION signal (LON) are “L.”

Top/bottom
VERTEN masking
margin

signal
/LSYNC

/TOP
Left/right
margin T2
HORZEN masking
signal T1
2mm

T3
2 mm

2 mm 2 mm

Figure 2-3-3

Notes: 1. The shaded area is where the laser beam is permitted to write.
2. Times T1 to T3 vary according to the paper size.
3. When the paper pick-up source is the multi-purpose tray, the paper width cannot be
determined if no paper size specification command is sent from the video controller.
In this case, the value of T1 to T3 are set to be that of Letter size (default paper size
of the multi-purpose tray).

2 - 41
CHAPTER 2

C. Scanner System
Figure 2-3-4 shows the scanner motor control circuit.

DC controller PCB Laser/scanner unit

J1006 J551
/BDIN -2 -2
BD PCB

+24VA +24VA Scanner motor

J1103
-4 -4
Scanner driver IC

-5 /ACC -3
comparator
Frequency

Integration Drive
/PRNT D-CPU circuit circuit
(IC1001)
-6 /DEC -2

-7 -1
Reference
clock

X1002
Oscillator

M
Gate array (IC1003)

Figure 2-3-4

The scanner motor is a three-phase DC brushless motor containing a hall element and forms a
unit along with the scanner motor driver circuit.
When the printer turns ON, the gate array (IC1003) on the DC controller PCB divides the
oscillation frequency of the crystal oscillator (X1002) and generates the reference clock signal.
When the /PRNT signal sent to the D-CPU becomes “L”, the D-CPU sends a scanner drive com-
mand to the gate array and sets the SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal (/ACC) to “L”.
When the /ACC signal goes “L”, the scanner driver IC starts the scanner motor. The IC accel-
erates the motor while the /ACC signal is “L”.
When the D-CPU emits laser forcibly while the scanner motor is running, the BD PCB sends
a /BDIN signal. The gate array compares the /BDIN signal frequency with the reference clock
frequency, and controls the /ACC signal to control the scanner speed so that the scanner motor
speed reaches the prescribed value.
The SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal (/DEC) goes “L” to decrease the scanner
speed and stop the scanner.
The D-CPU determines whether the scanner motor is running with the specified number of
rotations or not by monitoring the /BDIN signal via the gate array.

2 - 42
 CHAPTER 2

The D-CPU stops driving the scanner and notifies the video controller of the scanner unit fail-
ure under the following conditions.
1) The number of scanner motor rotations does not reach 97% of the specified number of rota-
tions within 11 seconds after start of scanner motor rotation.
Or, the number of scanner motor rotations does not fall in the range ± 3% of the specified
number of rotations within 2 seconds after reaching 97% of the specified number of rota-
tions.
2) The /BDIN signal cycle is not within the range of the specified cycle for a certain period of
time (equivalent to 10 mm print distance) when the motor is running normally during mask-
ing or unmasking. If the time of deviation is less than the 10 mm print distance, the video
controller is notified of the misprint after print completion.

2 - 43
CHAPTER 2

IV. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

A. Outline
The image formation system is the central hub of the printer, and consists of the electrostatic
latent image formation block (drum cartridge), the development block (developing rotary unit,
toner cartridges), and the transfer block (ITB unit, secondary transfer roller).

Laser beam
Development block

Developing rotary Electrostatic

latent image
formation block
Drum cartridge

Toner cartridge ITB unit

Secondary transfer roller

ITB cleaning roller Transfer block

Figure 2-4-1

2 - 44
 CHAPTER 2

B. Operation
1. Outline
When it receives a PRINT signal (/PRNT) from the video controller, the DC controller drives
motors to turn the photosensitive drum, developing rotary, primary charging roller, secondary
transfer roller, and intermediate transfer belt. The intermediate transfer belt is pressed against
the photosensitive drum to prepare for the transfer process.
The primary charging roller uniformly applies negative charge to the surface of the photo-
sensitive drum. Then the laser diode illuminates the laser beam modulated by the video data
signal (8 bits) to form the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum. The latent
image formed on the photosensitive drum is changed to a visible image by the toner in the toner
cartridge and then transferred (primary transfer) to the intermediate transfer belt in the ITB
unit.
For full-color printing, the electrostatic latent image is first formed on the photosensitive
drum by the Bk (black) video data. Then the developing rotary turns and the developing cylin-
der faces the photosensitive drum and Bk toner is developed. The developed Bk toner is trans-
ferred to the intermediate transfer belt by the positive bias applied to the primary transfer roller
in the ITB unit. This completes the primary transfer process for Bk toner. When Bk develop-
ment ends, the developing rotary turns and the next developing cylinder (M:magenta) faces the
photosensitive drum. The electrostatic latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum by the
M video data. Like the Bk toner, the magenta toner is then developed and primarily transferred.
The C (cyan) and Y (yellow) toners are developed and transferred in the same way.
Four toners are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt by repeating development and
primary transfer four times, and the full-color primary transfer process is complete.
For mono-color printing, the mono-color toner is transferred to the intermediate transfer belt
by performing the process once and the primary transfer process is complete.
When a paper is fed to the intermediate transfer belt, the secondary transfer roller is lifted
and the paper is pressed against the intermediate transfer belt. The toners on the intermediate
belt are transferred to the paper by the positive bias applied to the secondary transfer roller. The
secondary transfer process is now complete.
The paper is separated from the intermediate transfer belt and transported to the fixing unit.
The residual toner on the photosensitive drum surface is scrapped down with the cleaning blade
and collected in the waste toner container in the drum cartridge. The potential on the drum is
made uniform by the primary charging roller for generation of a new latent image. The residual
toner on the intermediate transfer belt is charged by the ITB cleaning roller. The residual toner
on the intermediate transfer belt is then transferred to the photosensitive drum by applying the
cleaning bias to the photosensitive drum and collected in the waste toner container in the drum
cartridge.

2 - 45
CHAPTER 2

/PRNT
Video controller PCB DC controller PCB
/VDO0 to 7

High-voltage PCB

DEV

HV1
TR1
TR2
ICL
Laser beam

t
Primary charging
roller

Photosensitive drum

Upper fixing roller ITB unit

Developing cylinder

Intermediate transfer bel

ITB cleaning roller
Secondary charging roller

Figure 2-4-2

2 - 46
 CHAPTER 2

2. Electrostatic latent image formation block

a. Outline
The electrostatic latent image formation block consists of a drum cartridge (photosensitive drum,
a primary charging roller, a waste toner container, a drum cartridge memory, a toner feed plate
and a stirrer).
The photosensitive drum, toner feed plate and stirrer are driven by the drum motor (M4). The
primary charging roller follows the photosensitive drum rotation.
The waste toner in the drum cartridge is detected by the waste toner full sensor (PS13).
Referring to the time of drum cartridge consumption stored in the drum cartridge memory, the
DC controller detects the life of the photosensitive drum.
The presence of the drum cartridge is detected by the DRUM CARTRIDGE DETECTION sig-
nal (DRMSET). If the DRMSET signal is “H” for 0.3 seconds or more during WAIT period after
power-ON or the drum cartridge drawer open/close, the DC controller determines that the drum
cartridge is installed in the printer. If the signal does not stay “H” for 0.3 seconds or more, the
DC controller notifies the video controller of the “no drum cartridge.”

DC controller PCB

DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY DATA OUTPUT signal (DRMDO)

DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY DATA INPUT signal (DRMDI)
DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY SERIAL CLOCK signal (DRMCLK)
DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY SELECT signal (DRMCS)
5V for drum cartridge memory (DRMC5V)
DRUM CARTRIDGE DETECTION signal (DRMSET)
Developing PCB
WASTE TONER FULL DETECTION LED

WASTE TONER DETECTION

DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signals

EMISSION signal (WTLED)

signal (WTNSNS)

Stirrer
Toner feed plate
PS13
M4

Primary charging
roller

Waste toner container

Photosensitive
drum

Drum cartridge memory

M4: Drum motor

PS13: Waste toner full sensor

Figure 2-4-3

2 - 47
CHAPTER 2

b. Drum cartridge memory

The drum cartridge memory (EEPROM) has a read area and a read/write area. The read area is
exclusively for reading and stores the identification code for the drum cartridge and threshold
value for the drum cartridge life. The DC controller reads data from or writes data into the
read/write area at the specified timing to check the drum cartridge life and waste toner full.
The data stored in the drum cartridge memory is transferred to the register in the D-CPU on
the DC controller at the following timings. Based on this data, the D-CPU writes the updated
data into the drum cartridge memory.
The timings for reading from and writing into the drum cartridge memory are as follows:
Read timing
• When the power is turned ON
• When the drum cartridge drawer is closed
Write timing
• When the power is turned OFF
• When the drum cartridge drawer is opened
• Whenever 20 sheets are delivered (or after continuous printing ends or if a jam occurs)
The printer checks for a drum cartridge memory error during reading or writing.
If writing or reading fails three times continuously (the check sum is not correct), the DC con-
troller notifies the video controller of the abnormal drum cartridge memory.

Drum cartridge memory

DC controller PCB

D-CPU
Drum cartridge

Drum cartridge memory data

Figure 2-4-4

c. Photosensitive drum life detection

The DC controller detects whether the end of the drum life has been reached or not based on
the data stored in the drum cartridge memory.
The photosensitive drum consumption time data sent from the DC controller is written into
the drum cartridge memory. The DC controller updates the drum consumption time at the spec-
ified timing. When the accumulated drum consumption time reaches the specified value, the
DC controller determines that the end of the drum life has been reached and notifies the video
controller of the drum life warning.
This printer is capable of printing after the drum life warning has been reported. After the
warning, the DC controller continues to update the drum consumption time data in the drum
cartridge memory. When the accumulated drum consumption time reaches the specified value,
the DC controller assesses that the limit of the drum life has been reached, stops the printer,
and reports it to the video controller.

2 - 48
 CHAPTER 2

d. Waste toner full detection

The waste toner full is detected by the waste toner full sensor (PS13).
PS13 consists of a light emitter and a light receiver. The light from the emitter passes through
the light guide and enters the detection port of the drum cartridge. The light entered the port
passes through the cartridge when the waste toner around the detection port is scraped off by
the stirrer. The light passes through the waste toner container and is detected by the light
receiver. The DC controller detects the time until the waste toner covers the port and blocks the
light again.
If the time the light passes becomes lower than a prescribed value, the DC controller deter-
mines that the waste toner level is high and reports the waste toner full warning to the video
controller. The DC controller writes this data into the drum cartridge memory.
This printer is capable of printing after the waste toner full warning has been reported. After
issuing the warning, the DC controller starts counting the number of prints and stores it in the
drum cartridge memory. When the specified number of prints is reached, the DC controller
determines that the limit of the waste toner has been reached, stops the printer, and notifies the
video controller of the waste toner full.

Waste toner full sensor

(PS13) Light emitter
Light receiver

Toner feed plate

Light guide

Stirrer

Detection port

Photosensitive
drum

Waste toner Waste toner container

Figure 2-4-5

Note: If the waste toner full is detected when the accumulated photosensitive drum con-
sumption time is equal to or less than 10% consumption ratio, the DC controller noti-
fies the video controller of an abnormal waste toner sensor instead of a waste toner full
warning.

2 - 49
CHAPTER 2

3. Development block
a. Outline
The development block consists of four toner cartridges and a developing rotary in which the
cartridges are installed.
The developing rotary is turned by the developing rotary motor (M3). The developing rotary
contains Bk (black), M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow) toner cartridges, each of which faces
the photosensitive drum in sequence. When a toner cartridge faces the photosensitive drum,
the developing cylinder is brought closer to the drum by the slider.
The developing cylinder of the cartridge is rotated by the toner cartridge motor (M5).
The developing rotary unit has three sensors: developing rotary position sensor, toner car-
tridge contact sensor, and toner level sensor.

DC controller PCB

Developing PCB
DEVELOPING ROTARY
MOTOR DRIVE signals
TONER CARTRIDGE CONTACT DETECTION
signal (/DEVCAM)
TONER LEVEL DETECTION signal (TONSNS)

MOTOR DRIVE signals

DEVELOPING ROTARY POSITION DETECTION signal ( ROTHP)

TONER CARTRIDGE

M3 M5
/

PS11 PS12

Drum cartridge
Photo-
PS10 sensitive
drum

ITB unit
Toner cartridge

Slider Developing
cylinder

M3: Developing rotary motor PS10: Developing rotary position sensor

M5: Toner cartridge motor PS11: Toner cartridge contact sensor
PS12: Toner level sensor

Figure 2-4-6

2 - 50
 CHAPTER 2

b. Developing rotary control

When it receives a PRINT signal (/PRNT) from the video controller, the DC controller outputs a
DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR DRIVE signal, turns the developing rotary motor (M3) ON, and
rotates the developing rotary.
When the developing rotary turns to the prescribed position, the DC controller stops the
developing rotary motor and stops the developing rotary.
The developing rotary stop position is controlled by monitoring the time in which the stop
position flags with various width pass through the developing rotary position sensor (PS10).
There are four stop position flags for toner cartridges. Each flag is used as development and
removal stop position flag.
When PS10 detects a flag, the DEVELOPING ROTARY POSITION DETECTION signal
(/ROTHP) goes “L”. The DC controller determines which development/removal stop position flag
is detected from the time in which /ROTHP is “L”.

M cartridge development C cartridge development

stop position flag stop position flag
Y
Bk cartridge removal stop M cartridge removal stop
position flag position flag

PS10 C Bk

Bk cartridge development Y cartridge development

stop position flag M stop position flag

Y cartridge removal stop C cartridge removal stop

position flag position flag

< Example of Bk cartridge development stop position (facing the photosensitive drum) >

Figure 2-4-7

If PS10 detects one of the following phenomena, the DC controller determines that the develop-
ing rotary has failed. The DC controller stops the printer and notifies the video controller of the
developing rotary failure.
1) The developing rotary motor runs for the prescribed period of time, but PS10 does not detect
the stop position flag.
2) PS10 detects abnormal stop position flag width.
3) PS10 detects a flag width that is different from that of the specified stop position flag.

2 - 51
CHAPTER 2

c. Toner cartridge contact/separation function

This function brings the developing cylinder closer to the photosensitive drum by pushing the
toner cartridge at the time of development.
During printing, when it detects that the specified toner cartridge is in the specified position
(position right before it faces the photosensitive drum) with the developing rotary position sen-
sor (PS10), the DC controller rotates the toner cartridge motor (M5) clockwise for the specified
period of time. (See page 2-51 for developing rotary position detection.) As a result, the toner
cartridge push cam makes a half turn and pushes the slider (Figure 2-4-8, ➁).
When the toner cartridge is brought into the position where it faces the photosensitive drum, the
slider pushes the toner cartridge and the developing cylinder is brought closer to the photosen-
sitive drum (Figure 2-4-8, ➂).
The DC controller stops the developing rotary when the toner cartridge is brought into the
position where it faces the photosensitive drum. At the same time, the DC controller starts
development by turning the M5 counter clockwise to rotate the developing cylinder.
Clockwise rotation of M5 rotates the toner cartridge push cam, and counter clockwise rota-
tion, the developing cylinder.
When the development is completed, M5 starts rotating clockwise. As a result, the toner car-
tridge push cam makes a half turn and the developing cylinder is brought back to the original
position.
The DC controller drives the developing rotary and repeats the same operation to make the
next toner cartridge face the photosensitive drum.

2 - 52
 CHAPTER 2

Toner cartridge push cam 1 Toner cartridge push cam rotates 2

(M5 CW)
Developing Photosensitive
rotary shaft drum

Slider
Toner cartridge

Developing
rotary rotates
Developing cylinder

3
Toner cartridge
push cam stops.

Developing cylinder
rotates (M5 CCW)

Developing rotary stops.

Figure 2-4-8

2 - 53
CHAPTER 2

d. Toner cartridge position (contact/separation) detection function

This function detects the position (contact/separation) of the developing cylinder in the toner
cartridge which is brought closer to or further from the photosensitive drum by the toner car-
tridge contact/separation function (see page 2-52).
The toner cartridge position is detected by the toner cartridge contact sensor (PS11) in the
rotary drive unit.
When the toner cartridge is brought further from the drum, rotation of the developing rotary
shaft is transmitted to the toner cartridge contact gear, and the projection of the gear pushes up
the toner cartridge contact detection lever. As a result, the lever is removed from the PS11 and
the TONER CARTRIDGE CONTACT signal (/DEVCAM) goes “H.” When the toner cartridge is
brought closer to the drum, the projection of the toner cartridge contact gear is detached from
the toner cartridge contact detection lever. As a result, the lever is lowered and blocks the light
from the PS11, and the /DEVCAM signal goes “L.”
When the /DEVCAM signal does not switch from “H” to “L” or from “L” to “H” during the spec-
ified period of time in WAIT period, the DC controller stops the printer and notifies the video con-
troller of a toner cartridge contact/separation error.

Toner cartridge contact

detection lever

Toner cartridge contact Toner cartridge

sensor (PS11) push cam

Toner cartridge
contact gear

Developing rotary shaft Slider

< When the toner cartridge is <When the toner cartridge is

brought further from the drum > brought closer to the drum>

Figure 2-4-9

2 - 54
 CHAPTER 2

e. Toner level detection/toner cartridge detection

This function detects the remaining toner level in the toner cartridge and the presence of the
toner cartridge in the developing rotary.
The toner level and the presence of the toner cartridge are detected by the toner level sensor
(PS12). The PS12 consists of a light emitter and a light receiver.
When the toner cartridge is facing the photosensitive drum, the light emitted from the light
emitter passes through the light guide in the developing rotary and enters the detection port of
the toner cartridge. The light passes through the cartridge when the toner around the detection
window is scraped off by the cartridge stirring function (note) and is detected by the light receiv-
er of the PS12. The time until the toner covers the port again and the light does not pass
through is detected.

Toner level sensor (PS12)

Light receiver

Stirrer
Detection window

Toner

Detection port

Toner level sensor (PS12)

Light emitter
< Toner level is high. > < Toner level is low. >

Figure 2-4-10

When the time the light passes through the cartridge goes beyond the specified time, the DC con-
troller notifies the video controller of a no toner warning. When the time the light passes
through becomes longer, the DC controller notifies the video controller of a no toner warning 2.
When the light passes through all the time without interruption, the DC controller stops the
printer and notifies the video controller of a no toner cartridge.
This printer conducts the toner level detection/toner cartridge detection when the power is
turned ON, when the toner cartridge door is opened and closed, and during developing opera-
tion by performing the toner stirring operation.

Note: Stirring function

This function is used to supply the toner to the cylinder smoothly. The stirrer and the
toner feed roller are rotated by the toner cartridge motor (M5) and perform the stirring
operation.
During the WAIT period or PRINT period, when the toner cartridge is facing the photo-
sensitive drum, the stirrer and the toner feed roller rotate and stir the toner in the toner
cartridge.

2 - 55
CHAPTER 2

4. Transfer block
a. Outline
The transfer block consists of an ITB unit, a secondary transfer roller unit, and an Intermediate
transfer belt contact unit. This block transfers the toner transferred from the photosensitive
drum to the paper and cleans the residual toner.
The intermediate transfer belt is driven by the drum motor (M4). The ITB cleaning roller
rotates with the intermediate transfer belt. The secondary transfer roller is rotated by the fix-
ing motor (M1). The secondary transfer roller is pressed against the intermediate transfer belt
when the secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) is turned ON. The ITB cleaning roller is
pressed against the intermediate transfer belt when the ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)
is turned ON. The intermediate transfer belt contact lever presses the intermediate transfer belt
against the photosensitive drum when the intermediate transfer belt contact clutch (CL2) is
turned ON.
The ITB unit and peripheral devices have an ITB unit life sensor (PS1), which detects the life
of the ITB unit, and an ITB home position sensor (PS5), which detects the home position of the
intermediate transfer belt.

DC controller PCB

Developing PCB
FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signals

ITB CLEANING ROLLER CONTACT

ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION

SECONDARY TRANSFER ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE signal (TR2CL)

DRUM MOTOR

ITB UNIT LIFE DETECTION signal (/ITBW)

INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT

(ITBCLON)
CONTACT CLUTCH DRIVE signal

CLUTCH DRIVE signal (CLNCLON)

DRIVE signals
Photo-
sensitive
drum
signal (/ITBHP)

M4

PS5 ITBunit

ITB cleaning roller

CL3
Contact PS1
cam
CL2
Secondary transfer roller

ITB contact lever Contact cam

M1 CL4

M1: Fixing motor PS1:ITB unit life sensor

M4: Drum motor PS5:ITB home position sensor
CL2: ITBunit contact clutch
CL3: ITB cleaning roller contact clutch
CL4: Secondary transfer roller clutch

Figure 2-4-11

2 - 56
 CHAPTER 2

b. Home position detection

The home position of the intermediate transfer belt is detected to transfer four color toners to
the intermediate transfer belt precisely and align the leading edge of print paper with the lead-
ing edge of the image.
There are four holes (home position detection holes) in the area outside the toner transfer
area on the intermediate transfer belt at equal intervals (see Fig.2-4-12). When the ITB home
position sensor (PS5) detects a home position detect hole while the intermediate transfer belt is
rotating, an ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP) is sent to the DC controller.

Toner transfer area

Intermediate transfer belt

ITB home position sensor (PS5) Home position detection holes

Figure 2-4-12

When it receives a PRINT signal (/PRNT), the D-CPU (IC1001) on the DC controller rotates the
intermediate transfer belt via the M-CPU (IC1009). When the PS5 detects the home position
detection hole, a /ITBHP signal is sent to the M-CPU via the developing PCB. The M-CPU deter-
mines the /ITBHP signal input first as the home position (HP1) and counts the home position
(HP2, HP3, HP4, .....) every time the same home position detection hole is detected. The M-CPU
controls the timing to drive various loads and detect various sensors based on the /ITBHP sig-
nal.
The M-CPU sends a /DTOP signal to the D-CPU via the gate array (IC1003) every time a
HOME POSITION signal is detected. When it receives the /DTOP signal, the D-CPU sends a TOP
OF PAGE signal (/TOP) to the video controller. When the video controller sends VIDEO signal
(/VDO 0 to 7) of an image, the D-CPU begins to form an image. For full-color printing, the D-
CPU sends the /TOP signal four times, and for mono-color printing once, to the video controller
to form an image (See Fig. 2-4-13).
When it does not detect a /ITBHP signal at constant intervals, the DC controller stops the
printer and notifies the video controller of the abnormality of the ITB unit.

2 - 57
CHAPTER 2

DC controller PCB

/VDO0 to 7
Gate array
/DTOP
Video controller PCB
/DTOPE /PRNT
/ITBHP

M-CPU D-CPU /TOP

Developing PCB
Primary transfer roller Intermediate transfer belt
detection signal (/ITBHP)
ITB home position

M4

ITB unit
PS5

ITB cleaning roller

Intermediate transfer belt feed roller

/PRNT

/ITBHP HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4

/DTOPE

/TOP

/VDO 0 to 7

Figure 2-4-13

2 - 58
 CHAPTER 2

c. ITB unit life detection

This detector determines whether the end of the ITB unit life has been reached.
The ITB counter unit on the side of the ITB unit conducts the ITB unit life detection. The ITB
counter unit consists of 12 gears with different numbers of teeth and the ITB unit life detection
lever. The gears transmit the rotation of the intermediate transfer belt to the ITB counter gear.
The ITB counter gear moves the ITB counter lever when the end of the ITB unit life is reached.
The position of the ITB counter lever is monitored by the ITB unit life sensor (PS1) in the print-
er.
Normally, the life detection lever does not block light from PS1 and the ITB UNIT LIFE
DETECTION signal (/ITBW) is “H”. When the number of the intermediate transfer belt rotations
reaches the specified value (about 100,000 rotations), the ITB counter lever slides to lift up the
life detection lever. The life detection lever blocks light from PS1 and /ITBW goes “L”.
If /ITBW is “L” during WAIT period after power-ON or the ITB unit drawer open/close, the DC
controller determines that the end of the ITB unit life has been reached and sends the ITB unit
life warning to the video controller.

ITB unit

Intermediate transfer belt

ITB counter unit feed roller

ITB counter gear

Gears 1 to 11

ITB counter Lever

ITB counter unit

ITB unit life sensor (PS1)

ITB unit life detection lever

< When the end of the ITB unit life has not been reached > < When the end of the ITB unit life has been reached >

Figure 2-4-14

2 - 59
CHAPTER 2

d. Secondary transfer roller contact/separation control

Normally, the secondary transfer roller is detached from the intermediate transfer belt. This
operation presses paper against the intermediate transfer belt with the secondary transfer roller
at the time of secondary transfer. (See page 2-68 for details of secondary transfer.)
The DC controller sets the SECONDARY TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT CLUTCH DRIVE sig-
nal (TR2CLON) to “L” and turns ON the CL4 at the specified timing. This timing is determined
based on the ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP) detected right before the sec-
ondary transfer begins. When the CL4 is turned ON, the secondary transfer roller contact cam
pushes up the secondary transfer roller mount. This presses the secondary transfer roller
against the intermediate transfer belt with paper in between.
When the paper passes through the unit and the secondary transfer process completes, the
DC controller turns OFF the CL4 and separates the secondary transfer roller from the interme-
diate transfer belt.

Intermediate transfer belt

Guide

Print paper
Secondary transfer roller

Secondary transfer roller mount

Secondary transfer roller

contact cam
CL4

Figure 2-4-15

2 - 60
 CHAPTER 2

e. ITB cleaning roller contact/separation control

Normally the ITB cleaning roller is detached from the intermediate transfer belt. This operation
presses the ITB cleaning roller against the intermediate transfer belt to clean the belt. (See page
2-70 for details of ITB cleaning.)
The DC controller sets the ITB CLEANING ROLLER CONTACT CLUTCH DRIVE signal
(/CLNCL) to “L” and turns ON the ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3) at the specified tim-
ing. This timing is determined based on the ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP)
detected right before the secondary transfer begins. When the CL3 is turned ON, the ITB clean-
ing roller contact cam presses the ITB cleaning roller against the intermediate transfer belt.
After the secondary transfer and ITB cleaning complete, the DC controller turns OFF the CL3
and detaches the ITB cleaning roller from the intermediate transfer belt.

ITB cleaning roller contact cam

Intermediate transfer belt

CL3

ITB cleaning roller

Figure 2-4-16

2 - 61
CHAPTER 2

f. ITB unit contact/separation control

Normally, the intermediate transfer belt is separated from the photosensitive drum. (Note) This
operation presses the belt against the drum by moving the ITB unit contact lever at the begin-
ning of print operation.
When the fixing unit temperature reaches the print temperature at the beginning of print
operation, the DC controller sets the ITB UNIT CONTACT CLUTCH DRIVE signal (/ITBCLON) to
“L” and turns ON the CL2. When the ITB unit contact clutch is turned ON, the ITB unit con-
tact cam pushes the ITB unit contact lever, and the intermediate transfer belt is pressed against
the photosensitive drum.
When the secondary transfer and intermediate transfer belt cleaning complete, the DC con-
troller turns OFF the CL2 and separates the intermediate transfer belt from the photosensitive
drum.

Photosensitive Intermediate transfer belt

drum

ITB unit
CL2
ITB unit contact cam

ITB unit contact lever

Figure 2-4-17

Note: The intermediate transfer belt is separated from the photosensitive drum except during
printing. This prevents adhesion of the belt to the drum which results when the print-
er is idle for an extended period of time. It also prevents the intermediate transfer belt
from getting dirty during the density detection. (See Page 2-75 for the density detection.)

2 - 62
 CHAPTER 2

C. Print Process
The printing process can be divided into six major blocks.

1. Electrostatic latent image formation block

Step 1 Primary charge
Step 2 Scanning exposure

2. Developing block
Step 3 Development

3. Transfer block
Step 4 Primary transfer
Step 5 Secondary transfer
Step 6 Separation

4. Cleaning block
Step 7 ITB cleaning roller charge
Step 8 ITB cleaning

5. Photosensitive drum cleaning block

Step 9 Drum cleaning

6. Fixing block
Step 10 Fixing

Electrostatic latent
image formation block 1. Primary charge

9. Photosensitive drum cleaning

2. Scanning exposure
Print delivery Photosensitive drum
Photosensitive
cleaning block
Developing block 3. Development

4. Primary transfer

8. ITB cleaning

Cleaning block drumITB unit

7. ITB cleaning roller charge

Transfer block
Fixing block
6. Separation
10. Fixing Registration Manual feed
5. Secondary
transfer
Paper path
Cassette feed
Direction of rotation of the
photosensitive drum and
intermediate transfer belt

Figure 2-4-18

2 - 63
CHAPTER 2

1. Electrostatic latent image formation block

This block consists of two steps which together produce a pattern of electrical charges on the
photosensitive drum.
At the end of the block, negative charges remain in the unexposed “dark” areas. Charges are
absent from “light” areas, where the laser beam struck (exposed) the drum surface.
Since this image of negative charges on the drum is invisible to the eye, it is called an “elec-
trostatic latent image”.

Time
0
-100
Surface potential (V)

Exposed area

(t)
-500
Unexposed
area

Primary Scanning Primary Primary

charge exposure transfer charge
(step 1) (step 2) (step 4) (step 1)

Figure 2-4-19

2 - 64
 CHAPTER 2

Step 1 Primary charge

For preparation of latent image formation, a uniform negative potential is applied to the photo-
sensitive drum surface. The printer uses the charging method that directly charges the drum
for primary charge.
In addition to DC bias, AC bias is applied to the primary charging roller to keep the potential
on the drum surface uniform.

Primary charging roller

drum
Photosensitive

AC bias

DC bias

Figure 2-4-20

Step 2 Scanning exposure

When the laser beam scans the drum surface, it causes the charge to be neutralized in areas
struck by the laser beam. Areas on the drum with no charges form the electrostatic latent
image.
Laser beam

Unexposed area Exposed area

Figure 2-4-21

2 - 65
CHAPTER 2

2. Development block
Development places particles of toner onto areas of the drum that have been cleared of charges
by the laser beam. This makes a visible image. This printer uses the toner projection develop-
ment method with a magnetic single-component black toner and non-magnetic single-compo-
nent color toner.

Step 3 Development
The black toner (developing agent) is a magnetic single-component toner consisting of magnetite
and a resin binder and is held to the cylinder by magnetic attraction.
The color toners (developing agents) are non-magnetic single-component toners consisting of
a resin binder. These toners are insulators, and acquire a negative charge by friction due to the
rotating cylinder and the blade.
There are three toners contained in their cartridges: yellow, magenta, and cyan. The black
and color toner cartridges are installed in the developing rotary, and each of them faces the pho-
tosensitive drum in sequence.
The areas on the drum that were exposed to the laser beam have a higher potential (are less
negative) than the negatively charged toner particles on the developing cylinder. When these
areas approach the cylinder, the potential difference projects the toner particles to them.
This is called the toner projection, and the latent image on the drum becomes visible.
An AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder to help project the toner particles to the drum
surface and improve the contrast of the printed image. The DC bias changes according to the
image density control performed by the DC controller and video controller. (See P.2-75).

Toner cartridge

Blade

Photosensitive
drum

Stirrer AC bias

DC bias
Toner transfer roller
Developing cylinder

Figure 2-4-22

Note: The charges on the light area on the photosensitive drum are shown as positive in this
figure. In actuality they are negative, but they are more positive than the developing
cylinder.

2 - 66
 CHAPTER 2

3. Transfer block
In the transfer block, the toner image is transferred from the drum surface onto the intermedi-
ate transfer belt and then onto the paper.

Step 4 Primary transfer

A positive charge is applied to the primary transfer roller of the intermediate transfer belt to
charge the intermediate transfer belt positively. The toner on the photosensitive drum is trans-
ferred to the intermediate transfer belt. This process is repeated for each color (Bk, M, C, Y).
The DC bias (positive) is applied to the intermediate transfer belt during printing. The DC
bias (positive) value is changed according to the image density control conducted by the DC con-
troller and the instruction sent from the video controller. In full color printing, as four colors of
toner are piled up on the intermediate transfer belt during the primary transfer, the holding force
of the toner weakens as the transfer process progresses for the 1st color, 2nd color..... Therefore,
after the 1st color transfer, the DC bias (positive) is increased for each color in order to maintain
the holding force of the toner.

Intermediate transfer belt

Toner
Photosensitive
drum

DC

Primary transfer roller

Figure 2-4-23

2 - 67
CHAPTER 2

Step 5 Secondary transfer

The toner on the intermediate transfer belt is transferred to the paper in this step. The paper
is pressed against the intermediate transfer belt when the secondary transfer roller contact cam
lifts the secondary transfer roller.
The DC bias (positive) is applied to the secondary transfer roller and the toner on the inter-
mediate transfer belt is transferred to the paper.
To prevent smudging of the back of the print paper, the DC bias (negative) is applied after
during INTR and LSTR periods to move the toner on the secondary transfer roller to the inter-
mediate transfer belt and clean the secondary transfer roller.

Intermediate transfer belt

Paper

Secondary transfer roller

Secondary transfer roller mount

Secondary transfer roller contact cam

DC

Figure 2-4-24

2 - 68
 CHAPTER 2

Step 6 Separation
The elasticity of the paper causes it to separate from the drum.
To decrease the electrostatic adhesion of the paper and facilitate separation, the charge on
the back of the paper is reduced by the static charge eliminator after transfer.

Intermediate transfer belt

Print paper

Charge eliminator

Secondary transfer roller

Figure 2-4-25

2 - 69
CHAPTER 2

4. ITB cleaning block

This block consists of two steps and moves the residual toner (note) on the intermediate trans-
fer belt to the photosensitive drum to clean the intermediate transfer belt.

Note: Residual toner

In the secondary transfer block, the toner on the intermediate transfer belt is transferred
to the paper, but some toner remains on the intermediate transfer belt. If a jam occurs,
the toner remains on the intermediate transfer belt. It is called the residual toner.

Step 7 ITB cleaning roller charging

In this step, the residual toner on the intermediate transfer belt is uniformly charged by apply-
ing a bias to the ITB cleaning roller when needed.
The ITB cleaning roller is usually detached from the intermediate transfer belt. The roller is
pressed against the intermediate transfer belt by the ITB cleaning roller contact cam during
charging for ITB cleaning.
The positive bias is applied to the ITB cleaning roller and the toner on the intermediate trans-
fer belt is uniformly charged.
After charging ends, the bias is turned OFF and the ITB cleaning roller is detached from the
intermediate transfer belt by moving the cleaning roller contact cam.
A negative charge is applied in the last rotation period to clean the residual toner attached to
the ITB cleaning roller.

ITB cleaning roller contact cam

Charged residual toner

Intermediate transfer belt

ITB cleaning roller

Residual toner
AC bias

DC

Figure 2-4-26

2 - 70
 CHAPTER 2

Step 8 ITB cleaning

In this block, the residual toner charged uniformly by ITB cleaning roller in step 7 is moved from
the intermediate transfer belt to the photosensitive drum.
Different levels of biases are applied to the photosensitive drum and the intermediate trans-
fer belt to produce a difference between the potentials of the photosensitive drum and interme-
diate transfer belt and move the residual toner from the intermediate transfer belt to the photo-
sensitive drum.

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum

Drum cartridge

Intermediate transfer belt

ITB cleaning roller DC
contact cam

ITB cleaning roller

Photosensitive drum potential < Intermediate transfer belt potential

Figure 2-4-27

2 - 71
CHAPTER 2

5. Photosensitive drum cleaning block

In the transfer block, not all the toner is transferred to the paper. Some remains on the photo-
sensitive drum.
Also, the residual toner on the intermediate transfer belt is carried back to the photosensi-
tive drum by ITB cleaning.
The purpose of this block is to clean off the residual toner on the photosensitive drum so that
the next print image will be clear.

Step 9 Photosensitive drum cleaning

Prior to the next printing, the residual toner on the drum surface is scraped away by the clean-
ing blade to clean the drum surface. The removed toner is collected by the sweeper strip and
put into the waste toner container with the toner transfer plate.

Waste toner transfer plate

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

Sweeper strip Waste toner Waste toner container

Figure 2-4-28

2 - 72
 CHAPTER 2

6. Fixing block
The toner image transferred onto the paper in the transfer block is held only by electrostatic
attraction, so even a light touch will smear the image.
In the fixing block, the four color toners are melted and mixed by heating the paper and
applying pressure to make a permanent image.

Step 10 Fixing
The upper and lower roller surfaces are covered with the Teflon tube with very low sticking prop-
erty.
Also, the upper and lower rollers contact with each other through a diode as in the figure
below so that the surface potential of the lower roller is higher than that of the upper roller.
Consequently, the toner on print paper is attracted by the surface potential of the lower roller ,
and thus is prevented from adhering to the upper roller.

Halogen heater
Upper roller

Toner

Print paper

Lower roller

Figure 2-4-29

2 - 73
CHAPTER 2

D. Image Stabilization Control

1. Outline
This printer conducts the stabilization density control in order to prevent variations in the image
density caused by environmental changes, deteriorated photosensitive drum or toner.
The image stabilization control consists of the image density ajustment control and the gra-
dation adjustment control. Each control is conducted as needed.

a. Image density control (Developing bias control)

The DC controller forms the maximum density pattern on the photosensitive drum for the each
color in the specified cases. The density sensor detects the density of the pattern. The optimum
developing bias and primary charging bias that stabilize the density of the each color are deter-
mined based on the detected density.
The image density adjustment control is conducted in the following cases:
• When the power is turned ON.
• After a specified number of sheets is printed.
• When the toner cartridge door is opened and closed.
• When the drum cartridge is replaced.
• When the video controller sends a command to conduct the control.
When the value detected by the density sensor does not fall within the specified range, the
DC controller sets the image density to the default value and notifies the video controller of an
abnormal density sensor warning.

b. Harf-tone control (controller density control)

The function of the harf-tone control is to send the density data required for the video controller
to perform gradation adjustment.
The DC controller forms density detection pattern for each color on the photosensitive drum
with the appropriate developing bias and the primary charging bias set by the image density
control based upon the image data sent from the video controller. Then, the DC controller
detects the density detection pattern with the density sensor and sends back the density data
to the video controller. The Video controller executes the harf-tone correction control to obtain
the appropriate half-tone image based upon the data.
The video controller executes the control by sending command, and the printer does not con-
trol by itself.

2 - 74
 CHAPTER 2

2. Density detection function

This function detects the density of the density pattern formed on the photosensitive drum with
the density sensor (PS14) during the image density control and the harf-tone correction control.
The PS14 is placed in the drum cartridge drawer unit and consists of an density detection cir-
cuit, LED, photodiode 1 and 2. The light emitted from the LED is reflected by the density detec-
tion pattern on the photosensitive drum and then received by the photodiode 2. The photodi-
ode 1 receives the light from LED directly.

Density detection pattern

Photosensitive drum

LED

Photodiode 2 Photodiode 1
Density sensor (PS14)

Figure 2-4-30

2 - 75
CHAPTER 2

The DC controller forms the density detection pattern on the photosensitive drum at the spec-
ified timing. When the LED DRIVE signal (/DENB) input from the DC controller becomes “L”,
the density detection circuit emits the light from the LED at the intensity determined by the LED
INTENSITY SETTING signals (DLP). The photodiode 1 detects the light from the LED directly,
and the density detection circuit controls the LED to emit light at the specified intensity. The
photodiode 2 detects the light reflected by the density detection pattern on the photosensitive
drum. The density detection circuit sends the DENSITY signal to DC controller as TONER DEN-
SITY DETECTION signal (DNS). The DC controller converts the input DNS signal (analog) to the
density value (digital) and stores it.
When the photodiode 1 and 2 cannot detect the light from the LED, the DC controller stops
the printer and notifies the video controller of a density sensor failure.

DC controller PCB Density sensor (PS14)

/DENB
LED

Density 1
DPL detection Photodiode
circuit
DLSHIFT

DNS Photodiode 2

Photosensitive
drum

Figure 2-4-31

2 - 76
 CHAPTER 2

V. PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM

A. Outline
When the /PRNT signal is sent to the DC controller by the video controller and the scanner
motor is put in the READY mode, the DC controller starts the print operation. For cassette feed-
ing, a sheet of paper is picked up by the cassette pick-up roller and is fed by the feed rollers.
For manual feeding, a sheet of paper is picked up by the multi-purpose tray pick-up roller and
is fed by the feed rollers.
After any skew in the paper is corrected by the registration roller, it stops at the leading edge
detection position. The temporarily stopped paper is refed so that its leading edge will match
the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum. Subsequently, the paper passes
through the secondary transfer, separation, fixing and delivery units to the face-down or face-
up tray.
The timing of paper pick-up/feeding for this printer is based on the ITB home position detec-
tion signal. (See P.2-57 for the ITB home position detection.)

Face-down tray

Face-down delivery roller

Multi-purpose tray
ITB unit pick-up roller
Upper fixing roller
Face-up tray Paper lifting plate

Multi-purpose tray
Face-up delivery Registration feed roller
roller Secondary roller
transfer roller Feed roller
Lower fixing roller
Cassette pick-up roller
Cassette feed roller
Cassette Separation roller

Figure 2-5-1

2 - 77
CHAPTER 2

The printer switches the feeding speed between three levels according to the media specification
command sent from the video controller. The media types and feeding speeds by fixing/feeding
mode are listed below.
The feeding speed is switched when the paper is refed from the registration roller.

Table 2-5-1

Feeding mode Plain paper mode Low-speed fixing mode OHT mode

Media type Plain paper/thick paper Glossy paper OHT

/envelopes

Feeding speed Normal speed 50% of normal speed 33% of normal speed

In general, the printer enters the OHT mode when the user selects the OHT with the media spec-
ification command. The OHT sensors (PS301,PS302) are installed in front of the registration
roller to detect OHT even if the media specification command is not sent by the user. The DC
controller monitors the sensor to execute the automatic OHT detection (See page 2-84).

2 - 78
 CHAPTER 2

B. Paper Pick-up
1. Cassette pick-up
a. Outline
The presence of the paper on the cassette is sensed by the cassette paper sensor (PS8). The
paper size and the presence of a cassette are detected by three paper size detection switches
(SW801 to 803). Combinations of paper size detection switches are listed in Table 2-5-2.
When it detects the HOME POSITION signal (HP1) for the first color image forming after the
PRINT signal (/PRNT) is received, the DC controller drives the pick-up motor (M2).
After the prescribed period of time, the cassette pick-up solenoid (SL2) is turned ON to trans-
mit the rotational force of the pick up motor to the cassette pick-up roller and the paper is picked
up by its rotation.
After the paper is separated from any extra sheets by the separation roller, it is fed into the
printer by rotation of the cassette feed roller and the feed roller.
After passing through the registration paper sensor (PS2), the paper reaches the registration
roller. The registration roller is not rotating at this time, so the paper temporarily stops in the
registration roller position. Its leading edge is curled and any skew is corrected.
In a specified period of time after detecting the home position for paper refeed (note 1), the
DC controller drives the registration clutch (CL1) to feed the paper to the secondary transfer
unit. The leading edge of the image on the intermediate transfer belt is matched with the lead-
ing edge of the paper (note 2).
The paper is then fed to the fixing and delivery unit.

Notes 1: The home position signal for the paper refeed is the same as that for the fourth color
for full-color printing (HP4) and the first color for mono-color printing (HP1).
2: If the feeding speed is changed according to the media data specified by the video
controller (see P.2-78), the speed of each motor (pick-up, fixing, and drum) is changed
when CL1 is driven.

2 - 79
CHAPTER 2

DC controller PCB

Feed PCB Multi-purpose tray PCB

signal (/REGSNS)

OHT DETECTION signal

(/OHTSNSL)
PAPER SIZE DETECTION signals
PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signals

signal (/ITBHP)

REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION

CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal (/CSTP)
CASSETTE PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal (CSTSLON)

REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE signal (REGCLON)

ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION

PS5 Registration PS2

roller

PS301
PS302 Feed roller Feed sub roller
CL1

Cassette
SL2 feed roller
Pick-up
roller
M2
SW801 PS8
to SW803
Separation
roller
Cassette

M2: Pick-up motor PS1: Registration paper sensor

SL2: Cassette pick-up solenoid PS5: ITB home position sensor
CL1: Registration clutch PS301: OHT sensor(left)
PS302: OHT sensor(right)
PS8: Cassette paper sensor
SW801: Paper size detection switch
SW802: Paper size detection switch
SW803: Paper size detection switch

Figure 2-5-2

2 - 80
 CHAPTER 2

b. Multi-feed prevention mechanism

For cassette pick-up, this printer uses a separation roller to prevent simultaneous feeding of sev-
eral sheets. Normally, the separation roller is imparted with rotational force reverse to the feed
roller which rotates in the direction of paper feed. However, as the separation roller has a torque
limiter, it rotates with feed roller 1 through transmission of its rotational force via the trans-
ported paper. On the other hand, if multiple sheets are picked up, the low friction between these
sheets results in a weak rotational force being transmitted to the separation roller from the feed
roller. As a result, the separation roller’s own rotational force separates the extra sheets.

Cassette feed roller

Pick-up roller
Rotational force transmitted
from the cassette feed roller

Separation

Paper
Rotational force transmitted from the
pick-up motor via torque limiter

roller

Normal

Multiple feeding

Figure 2-5-3

2 - 81
CHAPTER 2

2. Multi-purpose tray pick-up

a. Outline
The presence of the paper on the multi-purpose tray is sensed by the multi-purpose tray paper
sensor (PS4).
When it detects the home position (HP1) for the first color image formation after receiving the
PRINT signal (/PRNT), the DC controller drives the pick-up motor (M2).
After the prescribed period of time, the multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL1) is turned
ON to transmit the rotational force of the pick-up motor to the multi-purpose tray pick-up roller.
As the pick-up roller rotates, the pick-up cam pushes up the paper lifting plate. Thus, the paper
is pressed against the pick-up roller and picked up by its rotation. After the paper is separated
from any extra sheets by the separation pad, it is fed into the printer. The subsequent opera-
tions are as described for cassette feeding.

DC controller PCB

Feed PCB Multi-purpose tray PCB

REGISTRATION CLUTCH
DRIVE signal (REGCLON)
PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signals

MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY PAPER DETECTION signal (/MLTP)

REGISTRATION PAPER
DETECTION signal
(/REGSNS)
OHT DETECTION signal
(/OHTSNSL)

MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY
PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE
signal (MLTSLON)

MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY
LAST PAPER DETECTION
signal (/MLTLST)

SL1
Multi-purpose
tray pick-up
roller PS3

PS2

Paper lifting
PS301 PS4 plate
CL1 PS302

M2

M2: Pick-up motor PS2: Registration paper sensor

SL1: Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid PS3: Last paper sensor
CL1: Registration clutch PS4: Multi-purpose tray paper sensor
PS301: OHT sensor(left)
PS302: OHT sensor(right)

Figure 2-5-4

2 - 82
 CHAPTER 2

This printer performs a pick-up retry function only when the paper is picked up from the multi-
purpose tray for full-color printing.
After the pick-up operation, if the registration paper sensor cannot detect the leading edge of
the paper within a specified period of time after detection of the ITB HOME POSITION DETEC-
TION signal (/ITBHP), the DC controller conducts the pick-up operation one more time. If the
registration paper sensor cannot detect the leading edge of the paper after the 2nd pick-up oper-
ation, the DC controller assesses a pick-up delay jam and reports it to the video controller.

b. Last paper detection

This printer can detect the last paper on the multi-purpose tray. The distance between the
multi-purpose tray paper sensor and the secondary transfer unit is short. Therefore, if the last
paper is picked-up during continuous printing, the DC controller starts writing the next image
before it detects that there is no paper on the tray.
The last paper is detected before writing the next image to prevent smearing of the photo-
sensitive drum and intermediate transfer belt.
To detect the last paper, the last paper sensor (PS3) monitors the rotation of the last paper
detection roller on the multi-purpose tray. If there are two or more sheets on the multi-purpose
tray, the last paper detection roller does not rotate when one sheet is picked up. When the last
paper is picked up, the last paper detection roller rotates, and the last paper sensor output
changes between “H” and “L”. The DC controller determines that the last paper has been picked
up and notifies the video controller of no paper on the multi-purpose tray and inhibits forma-
tion of the next image.

Last paper

Multi-purpose tray

Last paper detection roller

Multi-purpose Last paper sensor

pick-up roller
(PS3)

The last paper detection The last paper detection

roller does not turn. roller turns.

< Normal paper pick-up > < Last paper pick-up >

Figure 2-5-5

2 - 83
CHAPTER 2

c. OHT detection function

This printer has a function to distinguish OHT from plain paper.
The OHT detection is conducted by the OHT sensors (PS301, PS302) on the multi-purpose
tray PCB.
The light emitted from the PS301 passes through the paper path, reflected by the prism (45
degree reflective mirror), and received by the PS301. (See the figure below) When the plain
paper is picked up, the light emitted from the PS301 is interrupted by the paper and thus does
not return to the sensor. When the OHT is picked up, the light passes through the OHT, is
reflected by the prism, and returns to the sensor.

<Cross-sectional view of the OHT sensor>

Prism

Registration guide

Paper feed space

Window
OHT sensor (left) OHT sensor (right)
(PS301) (PS302)

Multi-purpose tray PCB

Plain paper OHT

No light received Light received

<When plain paper is fed.> <When OHT is fed.>

Figure 2-5-6

During printing, the DC controller monitors the media stopped at the registration position and
distinguishes between OHT and plain paper according to the light detection state of the PS301.
When the OHT is detected, the DC controller switches the printing mode to the OHT mode and
changes the feed speed after refeeding.
CLBP360PS original OHT (OHT T-H1) cannot be used for this printer. (note) When the OHT
T-H1 is picked up, the DC controller recognizes it as an unusable OHT by detecting the mark-
ing on the OHT T-H1 with the PS301, reports it to the video controller, and stops the printer.
Advise the user not to use the CLBP360PS original OHT (OHT T-H1).
The OHT with the marking for CLC cannot be used for this printer since it is detected as an
unusable OHT in the same way as the CLBP360PS original OHT (OHT T-H1).

Note: CLBP360PS original OHT (OHT T-H1) is very thin and contains oil. Therefore, it tends
to cause roller wrapping jam in the fixing unit which has two fixing heaters and pro-
duces large amount of heat.

2 - 84
 CHAPTER 2

3. Paper size detection

The paper size and presence of the cassette are detected by the paper size detection switches
(SW801 to 803). Combinations of paper size detection switches are listed in Table 2-5-2.

Table 2-5-2

Cassette paper size detection switch

Paper size SW801 SW802 SW803

Legal OFF OFF ON

A4 ON ON ON

Letter OFF ON ON

Executive OFF ON OFF

B5 ON ON OFF

B5-ISO ON OFF OFF

A5 ON OFF ON

No cassette OFF OFF OFF

The size of the paper set on the multi-purpose tray cannot be detected as the tray has no paper
size detection mechanism. The size of the paper set in the cassette can be detected with the
switches mentioned above. However, as the paper size is set by the user in case of the univer-
sal cassette, false detection may result from wrong setting by the user.
This printer detects the paper size by measuring time from refeeding (start of the registration
roller clutch (CL1) drive) until the trailing edge of the paper clears the registration paper sensor
(PS2). If the detected paper size differs from the size specified by the video controller or the above
mentioned switches, the DC controller assesses a paper size mismatch and reports it to the video
controller.
In case of duplex printing, if the PS2 detects small paper size that cannot be fed to the duplex-
ing unit, the M-CPU delivers the paper to the face-down tray.

2 - 85
CHAPTER 2

C. Feed Unit
1. Outline
The feed unit consists of the secondary transfer roller, feed belt, and feed support unit and feeds
the paper from the registration roller to the fixing unit.
The secondary transfer roller and the feed belt are driven by the fixing motor (M1). The sec-
ondary transfer roller is lifted by the secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) at the time
of transfer. (See page 2-60 for details) The feed support unit is lifted with the secondary trans-
fer roller.
The paper refed from the registration roller is fed to the feed belt by the secondary transfer
roller and the intermediate transfer belt. The feed belt guides the leading edge of the paper to
the fixing unit. The feed support unit has a function to help feeding envelope to the fixing unit.

DC controller PCB

Developing PCB

CLUTCH DRIVE signal (TR2CL)

FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signals

SECONDARY TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT

Fixing unit
Feed support unit
Registration roller

Secondary transfer roller

Feed belt
Secondary transfer roller contact cam
M1 CL4

M1: Fixing motor

CL4: Secondary transfer roller contact clutch

Figure 2-5-7

2 - 86
 CHAPTER 2

D. Fixing and Delivery Unit

1. Outline
The upper fixing roller and the fixing delivery roller of the fixing unit and the face-down delivery
roller are driven by the fixing motor (M1). The lower fixing roller is driven by the upper fixing
roller.
The fixing motor starts to run when the fixing roller temperature reaches the fixing roller drive
start temperature (100ÞC) after power ON or when a PRINT signal (/PRNT) is input during the
standby condition.
The paper passed through the feed unit is fed to the fixing unit and delivered out of the unit
by the upper and lower fixing rollers and the fixing unit delivery roller. The paper delivered from
the fixing unit is detected by the delivery paper sensor (PS7).
The printer turns OFF the fixing roller pressure when the printer is turned OFF or when the
paper is jammed. The fixing unit pressure sensor (PS6) detects whether the fixing roller pres-
sure is ON or OFF.
The printer switches between the face-up tray and face-down tray with a deflector. When the
face-up tray is opened, the paper is output onto the face-up tray, and when the face-up tray is
closed, the paper is output onto the face-down tray.
When the face-down tray becomes full, it is detected by the face-down tray paper full sensor
(PS9).

2 - 87
CHAPTER 2

DC controller PCB

Developing PCB Feed PCB

PAPER DELIVERY DETECTION signal (/POSNS)

FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signals
FACE-DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL

FIXING ROLLER PRESS DETECTION signal (/FXPRS)

DETECTION signal (/STFULL)

PS9
Face-down
delivery

roller

Deflector M1

Upper fixing roller Fixing unit

Face-up tray
PS7

Fixing delivery roller

Lower fixing
PS6 roller

M1: Fixing motor PS6: Fixing unit pressure sensor

PS7: Delivery sensor
PS9: Face-down tray paper full sensor

Figure 2-5-8

2 - 88
 CHAPTER 2

2. Automatic fixing unit pressure OFF function

This function turns OFF the fixing roller pressure to improve jam clearance and to prevent per-
manent deformation of the rollers caused by the pressure applied to the same areas of the rollers
for a long period of time.
The fixing roller pressure is turned OFF by the fixing unit pressure cam in the fixing unit.
The fixing unit pressure cam and the rollers in the fixing unit are driven by the fixing motor (M1).
The fixing unit drive unit has two one-way clutch gears. When the M1 rotates clockwise, the
rotation of the M1 is transmitted to the upper fixing roller drive gear and the delivery roller gear,
and the upper fixing roller and the delivery roller are rotated. When the M1 rotates counter
clockwise, the rotation of the M1 is transmitted to the pressure cam drive gear, and the fixing
unit pressure cam is rotated.
When the fixing temperature control is stopped due to power-OFF, jams, failures, or sleep
mode, the M1 rotates counter clockwise, and the fixing unit pressure cam makes a half rotation
pushing the pressure link and turning OFF the pressure from the lower fixing roller.
When the power is turned ON (when the fixing heater reaches the fixing unit drive start tem-
perature, 100°C, after power-ON) or when the printer becomes ready for fixing unit temperature
control after jam clearance, the M1 rotates counter clockwise, the fixing unit pressure cam
makes a half rotation to apply the pressure to the lower fixing lower, and then the M1 starts
rotating clockwise.

Face-up delivery roller gear

Upper fixing roller gear

One-way clutch gear

Fixing delivery roller gear

M1 Counter clockwise
Fixing unit pressure cam
M1 Clockwise

One-way clutch gear

Pressure cam drive gear

Upper fixing roller Lower fixing roller

Pressure link

Fixing unit
pressure cam

Pressure spring

Lower fixing roller pressure plate

< Pressure ON > < Pressure OFF >

Figure 2-5-9

2 - 89
CHAPTER 2

Note: The printer cannot turn OFF the fixing roller pressure when the door is open. If the
printer is turned OFF with the door open when the fixing roller pressure is ON, the pres-
sure remains ON. Therefore, make sure to close all the doors and drawers when turn-
ing OFF the power.

3. Fixing unit pressure OFF detection function

This function detects whether or not the automatic fixing unit pressure OFF function appro-
priately applies and releases pressure to the fixing unit.
The ON/OFF status of the fixing roller pressure is detected by the fixing unit pressure sen-
sor (PS6) located outside the fixing unit.
When the fixing roller pressure is turned ON, the pressure detection cam, which is located on
the same shaft as the fixing pressure cam facing the opposite direction, pushes the pressure
sensor flag. As a result, the light of the PS6 is blocked and the FIXING UNIT PRESSURE DETEC-
TION signal (/FXPRS) becomes “L.”
When the fixing roller pressure is turned OFF, the pressure detection cam makes a half rota-
tion. As a result, the pressure sensor flag is separated from the PS6 and the FIXING PRESSURE
DETECTION signal (/FXPRS) becomes “H.” The DC controller determines that the fixing roller
pressure is turned OFF, and stops the printer.
When the /FXPRS signal does not switch from “L” to “H” within a specified period of time after
power-OFF or jam occurrence, or when the signal does not switch from “H” to “L” within a spec-
ified period of time after power-ON or jam clearance, the DC controller stops the printer and
notifies the video controller of a fixing motor failure.

Lower fixing roller

Pressure
detection cam

Pressure sensor flag Fixing unit pressure sensor (PS6)

< Pressure ON > < Pressure OFF >

Figure 2-5-10

2 - 90
 CHAPTER 2

E. Paper Jam Detection

The following paper sensors are provided to detect whether paper is present and whether the
paper is fed normally:
• Registration paper sensor (PS2)
• Delivery paper sensor (PS7)
The microcomputer (M-CPU) determines if paper jam has occurred by checking for the presence
of paper in the sensor at the timing stored in the CPU.
If the M-CPU determines that a jam has occurred, it will stop the print operation and report
the jam to the video controller.

1. Pick-up delay jam

After the multi-purpose tray or cassette paper pick-up operation, if the leading edge of the paper
does not reach the registration paper sensor (PS2) within a specified period of time (about 3.6
seconds) from the detection of the ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP) closest to
the start of secondary transfer, the M-CPU assesses a pick-up delay jam.

Note: In case of full-color printing from the multi-purpose tray, the M-CPU performs the pick-
up retry operation (see page 2-83) for pick-up retry function) before assessing a pick-up
delay jam.

2. Pick-up stationary jam (illegal paper length jam)

The M-CPU determines a pick-up stationary jam (illegal paper length jam) if the trailing edge of
paper has not passed the registration paper sensor (PS2) within a specified period of time (3.2
seconds) after detection of the ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP) closest to the
start of secondary transfer.

3. Delivery delay jam

The M-CPU determines a delivery delay jam if the paper has not reached the delivery paper sen-
sor (PS7) within a specified period of time (7.1 seconds) after detection of the ITB HOME POSI-
TION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP) closest to the start of secondary transfer.

4. Delivery stationary jam

The M-CPU determines a delivery stationary jam if the paper has not passed the delivery paper
sensor (PS7) within a specified period of time (10 seconds) after detection of the ITB HOME POSI-
TION DETECTION signal (/ITBHP) closest to the start of secondary transfer.

5. Wrong sized paper fed jam 1

The M-CPU assesses a wrong sized paper fed jam 1, if the paper that passes through the regis-
tration paper detection sensor (PS2) is 120 mm or less.

6. Wrong sized paper fed jam 2

The M-CPU assesses a wrong sized jam 2, if the paper that passes through the registration paper
sensor (PS2) is 380 mm or more.

7. CLBP360PS OHT jam

The M-CPU assesses a CLBP360PS OHT jam, if the OHT sensors (PS 301, PS302) detect an OHT
specified to CLBP360PS (T-H1).

2 - 91
CHAPTER 2

8. Door open jam

The M-CPU assesses a door open jam, if the registration paper sensor (PS2) or the delivery paper
sensor (PS7) detects print paper after opening/closing the doors and drawers.

9. Residual paper jam

a. After the power is turned ON, if the registration paper sensor (PS2) detects paper before the
fixing roller temperature reaches 100°C, the M-CPU assesses a residual paper jam and stops
the printer immediately. If the sensor detects paper after the fixing roller temperature has
reached 100°C and the pick-up motor (M2) has started running, the paper is automatically
delivered.
b. After the power is turned ON, if the delivery paper sensor (PS7) detects paper, the M-CPU
assesses a residual paper jam and stops the printer immediately regardless of the fixing
roller temperature.

2 - 92
 CHAPTER 2

VI.VIDEO CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Video Controller PCB

1. Outline
The video controller receives print data consisting of code data or image data sent from the exter-
nal device (host computer, etc.) via the interface cable.
Print data including contents specified by the control panel is analyzed, processed and con-
verted into dot data in the video controller.
Following this, the dot data is output to the DC controller and the laser diode is turned
ON/OFF based on the dot data.
Figure 2-6-1 shows the location of the main ICs on the video controller. Figure 2-6-2 shows
its block diagram.

2. Function of blocks
a. CPU (IC14)
This printer uses a 32-bit RISC microcomputer (FC80960HD-50) by Intel Corporation for its
CPU.
The CPU operates data generation and analysis for each of the interfaces, image data gener-
ation, and command generation via the ASIC according to the control program stored in the
ROM.

b. ASIC (IC12, 15, 17, 21)

This controller has four ASICs, each of which has its own functions as to increase data pro-
cessing efficiency.
The following describe the functions of the ASICs:

1) ASIC1 (IC15)
• Controls the output of the video signal to the DC controller circuit.
• Controls the read/write of data from/to the built-in DRAM and optional expansion RAM
DIMM in the video controller.
• Generates address information to access the built-in ROM in the video controller.

2) ASIC2 (IC12)
• Controls the video interface, control panel interface, and expansion interface.
• Controls the parallel interface (IEEE1284 Standard)

3) ASIC3 (IC21)
• Controls image smoothing and toner saving.

4) ASIC4 (IC17)
• Controls image data compression and decoding.

c. DRAM (IC16, 19, 22-25)

The DRAMs have the memory amount of 12 Mbytes and store the following information (receiv-
ing buffer):
1) Printing information output from the external devices (receive buffer).
2) Pattern data converted form code data or image data (bitmap memory).
3) Fonts processed in the video controller (font cache memory).
Also, expandable to a maximum of 44 Mbytes by employing 16-Mbyte expansion RAMs on
the two slots (J6, J7) on the video controller PCB.

2 - 93
CHAPTER 2

d. ROM (IC13)
The built-in ROM has the memory capacity of 4 Mbytes and is used to control the operation
sequence of the video controller circuit.

e. EEPROM (IC8)
This EEPROM is a 16k bits memory that can write and erase data electrically. It stores invari-
able parameters of the printer, such as printing environment, number of printing pages, and so
forth. These parameters are always maintained regardless of ON/OFF of the printer.

2 - 94
 CHAPTER 2

• Video controller location

IC16 IC19
J3 J10 DRAM(2M) DRAM(2M) DRAM(2M)
IC25
J5
J6 J7
J2
DRAM(2M)
IC24

Expantion RAM slot 1

Expantion RAM slot 2

DRAM(2M)
ASIC1 IC23
ROM (IC15)
(4M) DRAM(2M)
IC22
IC13

J9 IC21

IC17 J8
CPU
ASIC3
(IC14)
J1 ASIC4

IC8 ASIC2
(IC12)

EEPROM

Figure 2-6-1

2 - 95
CHAPTER 2

This page intentionally left blank

2 - 96
 CHAPTER 2

Video Controller Circuit

Data or Address Bus

Control Bus
CPU
(IC14) ASIC4 (IC17) Data or Control Bus
XTAL
40MHz Video Clock

System Clock

EEPROM
(IC8)

ASIC2 (IC12)
Baffer IEEE1284
ASIC1 (IC15) Parallel External
Interface device
XTAL
21MHz <J3>

Expansion Expansion
Interface Interface
1/2 1/2
<J1, 2>

Built-In ROM Built-In DRAM

(4MB) (12MB)
Vodeo
ASIC3 (IC21) Interface
DC controller
<J8>

Operation
Panel
Expansion RAM Interface
(Option) Operation panel

<J6, J7 > Figure 2-6-2

2 - 97
CHAPTER 2

This page intentionally left blank

2 - 98
 CHAPTER 2

B. Control Panel
1. Outline
The control panel of this printer has eight LEDs, two LCDs (liquid crystal display), eight switch-
es, and a buzzer.
The control panel is attached to the video controller PCB via the intermediate PCB and has
the following functions:

a. Indicates the status and errors of the printer on the LCDs.

b. Indicates the operational status of the printer on the LEDs.
c. Performs the setups and sets the printing menu of the printer with the switches.
d. Buzzes when the input from the switches is not available.

2. Operation
The interface of the control panel is a single-lined bidirectional serial interface.
The control information sent to the LEDs and LCDs on the control panel and printing envi-
ronment information determined by the switches on the control panel are controlled by the sig-
nals form the video controller. Meanwhile, the ASICs on the video controller PCB exchanges data
with the CPU on the control panel.

Video controller PCB Connector PCB Operation panel

J9003 J701
+5V -7 VCC -1 +5V LED
-6 +5V -2
J8 J9001
-B25 /FP1 -B8 -2 /FP1 -6
I/O Switches
ASIC
-B26 /FP2 -B7 -3 GND -5
IC12 CPU
-B27 /FP3 -B6 -4 GND -4 Buzzer

-B28 /FP4 -B5 -5 GND -3

-B22 GND -B9 -1 GND -7

LCD

FP1: (/CS) Chip select between the LSI and LCD Controller.
FP2: (SC) Synchrounous clock of serial (SI,SO) data.
FP3: (/SI) Low true seial input data (LED and LCD command).
FP4: (/SO) Low true serial output data (Key data).

Figure 2-6-3

2 - 99
CHAPTER 2

C. Self-Test
After the power is turned ON, this printer performs a self-diagnostic program of the video con-
troller to check the status of the video controller and control panel. This is referred to as a self-
test.
The self-test (1) is limited to the minimal items required after the power is turned ON.
The following describes the procedure of the self-test.

1) Performs a self-diagnostics of the CPU. Note that if an error occurs during the self-diag-
nostics, the status display panel (LCD) will post the error status as a service call.
2) Performs a self-diagnostics of the video controller according to the following procedure.

Note that if an error occurs, the status panel (LCD) will post the error status as a service call.

a. Displays the maximum of 16 characters by 2 lines of the LCD. Then, checks the communi-
cation between the CPU and control panel.
b. Checks the ON/OFF of the eight LEDs on the control panel by dividing them into three.
This check consists of the following items:
• Checksum of the built-in ROM
• Built-in RAM
• Optional RAM DIMM
• Engine ID
• Expansion interface PCB
c. Turns OFF the all lines of the LCD after checking the foregoing items.
d. Completes the checks and self-diagnostics of all of the LEDs.

3) Completes the self-diagnostics and blinks the Ready LED until the printer enters a standby
mode.
4) Turns ON the Ready LED, On Line LED, and currently selected paper pick up mode LED
after entering a stnadby mode. The status panel indicates a "00 Ready" message. Note that
if an operator call or error has occurred, the status panel will post the status.

D. Sleep Mode
This printer automatically enters a sleep mode as to reduce the power consumption, if the print-
er has not received a job, or a panel operation has not been performed for a specified period of
time.
The time the printer takes to enter a sleep mode can be set on the control panel. The default
period is 60 minutes.
After entering the sleep mode, the printer turns OFF the LEDs other than the Ready LED and
the status display panel (LCD). Also, the printer engine enters a sleep mode. (For the operation
of the printer engine during a sleep mode, refer to "4. Power-saving Mode" on Page 2-27.)
This printer exits the sleep mode and returns to a full power mode (standby state) when the
following cases occur (note):
• When the printer has received a job.
• When any key on the control panel has been pressed.
• When a door open/close has occurred.

Note: The printer requires a maximum of four minutes to return to a standby state from a
sleep state.

2 - 100
 CHAPTER 2

E. Power OFF Mode

This printer drives the fans until the temperature of the fixing unit decreases to its specified
value after the printer is turned OFF. For this reason, the printer does not allow itself to be
turned OFF for a maximum of ten minutes.
While the printer is driving the fans, the status display panel indicates a "COOLING DOWN"
message and blinks to notify the user that the printer has not been turned OFF.
While the message "COOLING DOWN" is being posted, the printer is in the following status.
• Does not allow the panel operation.
• Does not accept a job from the external device.
• Is incapable of receiving the printer status.
For the operation of the printer engine during the power OFF mode, refer to "2. Remote Switch"

2 - 101
CHAPTER 2

F. List of Status/Error Display

The status, error messages, and their contents and measurements are described in the appen-
dixes. Note that the service calls are described in Chapter 4.
The figure below shows how the status panel indicates.

< Status Panel > < Status Panel (When a Service Call) >

Message Field Message Field

Number Field Code Number Field
Detailed Number Filed

Number Filed

Figure 2-6-4

Statuses, operator calls, errors, and service calls are posted as a main message with num-
bers and messages on the first line of the LCD. The main message might be followed by a sub
message on the second line. For warning messages, a second-line sub message will post a num-
ber and its message.
A "LANGUAGE" message in the setup menu allows the user to select a language from the 11
languages, and the message field will indicate the selected language.

2 - 102
 CHAPTER 2

VII. DUPLEXING UNIT

A. Outline
The duplex driver PCB controls the sequence of duplexing unit operations. The duplex driver
PCB has an 8-bit microcomputer (CPU) that controls the sequence of duplexing unit operations
and serially communicates with the DC controller PCB in the printer.
The duplex driver PCB drives solenoids and motors according to the duplexing unit specifi-
cation command and the duplex pick-up command sent from the DC controller PCB. The duplex
driver PCB returns the duplexing unit status to the DC controller PCB.
The duplexing unit is driven by +24V and +5V generated in the power supply unit of the
duplexing unit and +5V supplied from the printer.
+24V and +5V generated in the power supply unit of the duplexing unit are for driving motors,
solenoids, and sensors. +5V supplied from the printer is for driving the CPU. The printer also
supplies +5V to the paper feeder.

2 - 103
CHAPTER 2

+24VA Duplex driver PCB

J54-7 J3101-1 +5V
-2 -6
-6 -2
DUPSCLK Serial clock signal
-5 -3
To printer DUPRXD Duplexing unit serial communication (input)
-4 -4
DUPTXD Duplexing unit serial communication (output)
-3 -5
/DUPRST Duplexing unit reset signal
-1 -7

+24VA
J56-2 J3101-14
-3 -13
-4 -12
To paper -5 -11
feeder RET
-6 -10
TESTSW
-7 -9
+5V
-8 -8
PS3101

J87-3 J3106-1 LED5VR

Reversing unit -1 -3
-2 -2 REARSNS "H" when the sensor detects paper.
paper sensor

PS3102
J88-3 J3106-4 LED5VR
-1 -6
Face-up sensor -2 -5 FUCHSNS "L" when face-up delivery is selected
or when the reversing unit is open.
"H" when face-down delivery is selected.
PS3103
J89-3 J3107-1 +5VR
Reversing unit -1 -3
stationary paper -2 -2 SWBKSNS "L" when the sensor detects paper.
sensor
J91
PS3105 J83 J81
J85-3 -5 -5 J3103-10 LED5VR
Side registration -1 -7 -7 -8
home position SIDESNS "H" when the sensor detects the home
-2 -6 -6 -9 position of the width adjustment guide.
sensor

J92
PS3104 J83 J81
J86-3 -2 -2 J3103-13 LED5VR
Duplex pick-up -1 -4 -4 -11
paper sensor REFEEDSNS "H" when the sensor detects paper.
-2 -3 -3 -12

Figure 2-7-1

2 - 104
 CHAPTER 2

Duplex driver PCB

J90 +24VA
Reversing roller -2 -1 J3108-5
pressure release SL3101 -1 -2 -4
solenoid ATUCLON "H" to release the duplex feed sub roller .

+24VA
J3107-5
Delivery deflector
solenoid SL3102 -4
FRAPCLON "H" to feed paper to the duplexing unit.
J3104-1
REFEEDM A
-2
Duplex REFEEDM /A
M3101 -3 Motor control signals
feed motor REFEEDM B
-4
REFEEDM /B

J3105-2
SWBKM A
-3
Reversing SWBKM /A
M3102 -4 Motor control signals
motor SWBKM B
-5
SWBKM /B
J91
83-7 81-7 J3103-1
SIDEM A
Side -6 -6 -2
SIDEM /A
registration M3103 -5 -5 -3 Motor control signals
motor SIDEM B
-4 -4 -4
SIDEM /B
-1 -1 -7
RET
-2 -2 -6
REFDORSNS "H" when the re-feed unit door open.

J2102-3 J1012-3 +5V

-4 -4
PWRON "H" when the power ON.
-5 -5
Power +24V
supply -6 -6
+24V
-1 -1
-2 -2

Figure 2-7-2

2 - 105
CHAPTER 2

B. Reversing and Re-feed Operation

1. Outline
The print paper is guided to the duplexing unit with a face-up deflector. The deflector is oper-
ated with the face-up tray. When the face-up tray is closed, the deflector is operated by the
delivery deflector solenoid (SL3102).
The paper fed into the duplexing unit is reversed by changing the feed direction with the
reversing roller. Then, the paper is fed into the printer by the the duplexing unit feed roller after
the side registration (refer to Page 2-109) is adjusted by the side registration guide.
The reversing roller is rotated clockwise or counter clockwise by the reversing motor (M3102).
The duplexing feed motor (M3101) drives the duplexing unit feed roller. The side registration
motor (M3103) moves the side registration guide to the position corresponding the size of paper
which is fed into the duplexing unit. These motors are stepping motors and the rotations are
controlled by the duplex driver PCB.

2 - 106
 CHAPTER 2

DC controller PCB
+5V

Duplexing unit
Duplex driver PCB AC power supply

SIDE REGISTRATION HOME POSITION DETECTION

REVERSING UNIT STATIONARY PAPER
DETECTION signal (SWBKSNS)

DUPLEX FEED ROLLER PRESSURE RELEASE

SOLENOID DRIVE signal (PRSSLON)

signal (SIDESNS)

DUPLEX PICK-UP PAPER DETECTION signal

(REFEEDSNS)
REVERSING MOTOR DRIVE signals
DUPLEX FEED MOTOR DRIVE signals

SIDE REGISTRATION MOTOR DRIVE signals

FACE-UP DETECTION signal (FUCHSNS)

REVERSING UNIT PAPER DETECTION signal (INVSNS)

DELIVERY DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE signal (FRAPCLON)

PS3102
PS3101
Cassette
PS3103

SL3102
PS3105 PS3104
SL3101
M3102 M3103
M3101
Side registration guide

M3101: Duplex feed motor PS3101: Reversing unit paper sensor

M3102: Reversing motor PS3102: Face-up sensor
M3103: Side registration motor PS3103: Reversing unit stationary paper sensor
SL3101: Duplex feed roller pressure release solenoid PS3104: Re-feed paper sensor
SL3102: Delivery deflector solenoid PS3105: Side registration home position sensor

Figure 2-7-3

2 - 107
CHAPTER 2

2. Reversing operation
On receiving a duplexing unit specification command sent from the printer, the duplex driver
PCB turns ON the delivery deflector solenoid (SL3102). As a result, the delivery deflector is
moved and the paper is fed into the duplexing unit. Then, the reversing motor is rotated count-
er clockwise and the paper is fed into the reversing unit.
In a specified period of time after receiving the duplexing unit specification command, the
duplex driver PCB turns OFF the SL3102. When the PS3101 detects the trailing edge of the
paper, the duplex driver PCB changes the feed direction of the paper by rotating the reversing
motor clockwise. At this time, as the paper is fed along the lower duplex guide, it is guided into
the duplex feed unit in the duplexing unit.
If the PS3104 detects the previously fed paper, the reversing motor rotates at standard speed.
If not, the reversing motor rotates at 1.5 times of standard speed.
During the wait period of the duplexing unit, the reversing motor (M3102) is rotated clock-
wise for 7 seconds. If the reversing unit stationary paper sensor (PS3103) detects paper at this
time, the duplex driver PCB notifies the printer of a reversing unit paper jam.

PS3101 Duplexing unit

Reversing roller 1

PS3103 Duplex feed unit

Reversing unit Reversing roller 2

PS3103 Duplexing unit

Reversing roller 1

PS3103 Duplex feed unit

Reversing unit
Reversing roller 2

Figure 2-7-4

2 - 108
 CHAPTER 2

3. Side registration adjustment

The duplexing unit conducts side registration adjustment so that the center of the paper in the
horizontal direction matches the center of the printable area on the intermediate transfer belt
when the second side is printed. To adjust the side registration, the side registration guides are
pressed against both sides of the paper.
The home position of the side registration guide is detected by the side registration home posi-
tion sensor (PS3105).
During the duplexing unit wait period, the duplex driver PCB rotates the side registration
motor (M3103) clockwise and moves the side registration guide to the home position. When the
PS3105 detects the home position, the duplex driver PCB stops the M3013 and holds the side
registration guide at the home position.

Side registration motor Side registration guide

Reversing unit Duplex feed unit

M3103
Print paper Duplex feed roller

To printer

Duplex feed roller Side registration home position sensor Re-feed paper sensor
(PS3105) (PS3104)
<Operation of the side registration>

Figure 2-7-5

During duplex printing, when the trailing edge of print paper is detected by the reversing paper
sensor (PS 3101), the duplex driver drives M 3103 to move the side registration guides inward.
Also, it drives the duplex feed motor (M 3101) to rotate the duplex feed roller.
When the paper fed to the duplex feed unit by the duplex feed roller is detected by the duplex-
ing unit pick-up paper sensor (PS3104), the duplex driver stops driving the M3101 and feeding
the paper. At the same time, feed roller pressure release solenoid (SL3101) is turned ON, and
the pressure to the feed roller pressure sub roller is released to set the paper free. (See figure
2-7-6)
Then, the duplex driver drives the M3103 for the specified number of pulses according to the
paper size data sent from the DC controller and moves the side registration guide according to
the paper size. As a result, side registration of the paper is adjusted.

2 - 109
CHAPTER 2

Print paper Duplex feed roller pressure sub roller Re-feed sensor lever

To printer
Duplex feed unit

Reversing
unit
SL3101

Duplex feed rollers Re-feed sensor

<Operation of the duplex feed roller pressure release>

Figure 2-7-6

4. Duplexing unit pick-up operation

The duplex driver sends the duplex pick-up paper presence status to the printer after the side
registration adjustment is completed. When the printer receives the duplex pick-up paper pres-
ence status, it can send the duplex pick-up command to the duplex driver. Upon receiving it, the
duplex driver turns the duplex feed motor (M3101) ON and feeds the paper at the same speed
as printing process speed. When the registration paper sensor (PS2) detects the paper fed from
duplexing unit, the printer sends the duplex pick-up stop command to the duplex driver. Upon
receiving it, the duplex driver turns M3101 OFF. When the duplex driver receives the refeed com-
mand synchronized with TOP signal, it turns M3101 ON again. After a prescribed period of time,
the duplex driver turns the M3101 OFF and stops the duplex feed roller.
The paper is fed to the face down delivery tray after the second side of paper is printed.

Power ON (Unit: seconds)

STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY

PRINT signal (/PRNT)

Duplexing unit specification
VERTICAL SYNC signal (/TOP)
Re-feed stop Re-refeed
Duplexing unit specification command

Reversing unit paper sensor (PS3101) Re-feed

Reversing unit stationary paper sensor (PS3103)

Re-feed paper sensor (PS3104)

Registration paper sensor (PS2)

3.8
Duplex deflector drive solenoid (SL3102)
Re-feed roller pressure release solenoid 0.1 1.0
(SL3101)
1.1 0.6 3.3
Reversing motor (M3102)
CCW 1.2 CW 0.2
Side registration motor (M3103)
1.8 7.8
Duplex feed motor (M3101)

Figure 2-7-7

2 - 110
 CHAPTER 2

C. Paper Jam Detection

To detect presence of the paper and whether the paper has been correctly fed, the following
paper sensors are provided:

• Duplex pick-up paper sensor (PS3104)

• Reversing unit paper sensor (PS3101)
• Reversing unit stationary paper sensor (PS3103)

The microcomputer (M-CPU) on the duplex driver PCB determines if paper jam has occurred by
checking for the presence of paper in the sensor at the timing stored in the CPU.
If it detects a jam, the CPU immediately stops the duplex unit operation and reports the jam
to the engine controller.

1. Reversing unit delay jam

The CPU assesses an reversing unit delay jam if the reversing unit paper sensor (PS3101) can-
not detect paper within the prescribed period of time (about 2.3 seconds) after the duplex deflec-
tor drive solenoid (SL3102) is turned ON.

2. Reversed unit stationary jam 1

The CPU assesses a reversing unit stationary jam 1, if the paper does not passes through the
PS3101 within the specified period of time (about 5.3 seconds) after the delivery deflector drive
solenoid (SL3102) is turned ON.

3. Reversing unit delay jam 2

The CPU assesses a reversing unit delay jam 2, if the paper does not reach the PS3103 within
the specified period of time (about 1.5 seconds) after the reversing motor (M3102) starts rotat-
ing clockwise.

4. Duplexing unit pick-up delay jam

The CPU assesses a duplexing unit pick-up delay jam, if the paper does not reach the PS3104
within the specified period of time (T) after the reversing motor (M3102) starts rotating clockwise.
T = 4.5 seconds (When print paper is in the duplex feed unit.)
T = 3.9 seconds (When print paper is not in the duplex feed unit.)

5. Duplexing unit pick-up stationary jam

The CPU assesses a duplexing unit pick-up stationary jam, if the paper does not pass through
the PS3104 within the specified period of time (T) after the duplex feed motor (M3101) starts run-
ning for duplexing unit pick-up.
T = 3.3 seconds (B5)
T = 3.4 seconds (EXE)
T = 3.5 seconds (Letter)
T = 3.7 seconds (A4)
T = 4.2 seconds (Legal)
(When print paper is in the duplex feed unit.)

T = 3.1 seconds (B5)

T = 3.1 seconds (EXE)
T = 3.2 seconds (Letter)

2 - 111
CHAPTER 2

T = 3.3 seconds (A4)

T = 3.6 seconds (Legal)
(When print paper is not in the duplex feed unit.)

6. Residual paper jam

a. The CPU assesses a reversing unit residual paper jam and stops the printer immediately if
the PS3103 detects paper during the wait period of the duplexing unit.
b. The CPU assesses a duplex feed unit residual paper jam and stops the printer if the PS3103
and the PS3104 detect paper after completion of automatic delivery (note) during the wait
period of the duplexing unit.
c. The CPU assesses a duplex feed unit residual paper jam and stops the printer if the PS3101,
PS3103, and PS3104 detect no paper first and then any of the sensors detects paper during
the wait period of the duplexing unit.

Note: Automatic delivery

During the wait period of the duplexing unit, if the PS3103 and PS3104 detect residual
paper, the duplex driver drives the reversing motor and the duplex feed motor for 7 sec-
onds and delivers the paper out of the printer through the feed path of the printer.

2 - 112
 CHAPTER 2

VIII. PAPER FEEDER

A. Outline
The paper feeder does not contain a microcomputer (CPU) and is controlled by the DC controller.
The paper feeder does not have a drive motor, so its rollers are controlled by the pick-up motor
(M2) of the printer.
Like the pick-up timing of the printer, the pick-up timing of the paper feeder is based on the
ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal. (See P.2-57 for the home position detection.)
+24V and +5V are supplied to the paper feeder from the printer.

Paper feeder Printer

Paper feeder PCB DC controller PCB

J57
J3001 J59 J51 J1016
-14 -2 -7 -2 +5V
Paper size sensor
-9 -7 -2 -7 24V
SW3001 J58 J50
-7 -1 -7 -8
OPSIZE2
SW3002 -6 -2 -6 -9
OPSIZE1 Paper feeder cassette
-5 -3 -5 -10 size detection signal
SW3003 OPSIZE0

PS3001
J3002-1 +5V
-3 -4 -4 -4 -11
-2 /OPPSET "L" when the cassette
contains paper.
Paper feeder -3 -5 -3 -12
/OPFEED "L" when the paper feeder
paper sensor is installed in the printer.
J3003-1
24V
SL3001 -2 -1 -7 -2 -13
OPPCLON "L" to turn paper feeder
-15 J59-1 J51-8 -1 pick-up roller.
Paper feeder
pick-up solenoid -2 J58-6 J50-2 13

Figure 2-8-1

2 - 113
CHAPTER 2

B. Pick-up and Feed Operation

The paper size and presence of a cassette are detected by three switches (SW3001, 3002, and
3003) on the paper feeder driver PCB. The relationship between the combinations of switches
and paper sizes are listed in the table 2-8-1.
The paper feeder pick-up solenoid is controlled by the signal from the printer via the paper
feeder PCB. The paper feeder is driven by the printer pick-up motor (M2) via gears.
After receiving a PRINT signal (/PRNT), the DC controller runs the pick-up motor (M2) when
it detects the home position (HP1) for the first color image formation.
The DC controller turns ON the paper feeder pick-up solenoid (SL3001) in a prescribed peri-
od of time after the pick-up motor starts. The pick-up motor turns the paper feeder pick-up
roller to pick up paper.
After the paper is separated from any extra sheets by the separation roller, it is fed into the
printer with the paper feeder feed roller and printer feed roller.
The subsequent operations are the same as for cassette pick-up.

DC controller

Paper feeder PCB Feed PCB

PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signals
PAPER FEEDER PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal (OPSLON)

PAPER FEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal (/OPPSET)

PAPER FEEDER PAPER SIZE DETECTION signals

PCB

Cassette M1

SL3001
PS3001

SW3001
SW3002
SW3003

SL3001: Paper feeder pick-up solenoid

PS3001: Paper feeder paper detection sensor
SW3001: Paper feeder paper size detection switch
SW3002: Paper feeder paper size detection switch
SW3003: Paper feeder paper size detection switch

Figure 2-8-2

2 - 114
 CHAPTER 2

Table 2-8-1

Paper feeder
cassette paper size detection switch

Paper size SW3001 SW3002 SW3003

Legal OFF OFF ON

A4 ON ON ON

Letter OFF ON ON

Executive OFF ON OFF

B5-JIS ON ON OFF

Others (A5, B5-ISO) ON OFF OFF

No cassette OFF OFF OFF

C. Paper Jam Detection

Jam detection in case of paper pick-up from the paper feeder is same as the printer. Refer to
page 2-91 for the details.

2 - 115
CHAPTER 2

This page intentionally left blank

2 - 116
 CHAPTER 3

THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM

I. INTRODUCTION ........................ 3-1 VI. SOLENOIDS/CLUTCHES ........... 3-47

II. EXTERNALS ............................. 3-4 VII. MOTORS/FANS ...................... 3-52
III. MAIN UNITS ............................. 3-10 VIII. ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS..... 3-59
IV. MAIN PARTS ............................. 3-19 IX. DUPLEXING UNIT ..................... 3-66
V. SWITCHES/SENSORS ............... 3-33 X. PAPER FEEDER ........................ 3-78
 CHAPTER 3

I. INTRODUCTION
A. Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer.
The service technician is to find the factor of the failure according to the “Chapter 4 Trouble
shooting” and to follow the disassembly procedures in this chapter to replace the defective part.
Replacement of consumable parts is also to be conducted according to the procedures described
in this chapter.
Note the following precautions during disassembly or reassembly.

1. At disassembly, reassembly, or transportation of the printer, remove the drum cartridge,

toner cartridge, and ITB unit as necessary. When removing the drum cartridge and toner
cartridge, put them in a protective bag to prevent light from affecting them. Refer to “B.
Removal of the toner cartridge with manual operation” if the toner cartridge cannot be
removed with panel operation.
2. CAUTION: Before servicing the printer, disconnect its power cord from the electrical out-
let.
3. Assembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
4. Note the lengths, diameters, and locations of screws as you remove them. When reassem-
bling the printer, be sure to use them in their original locations.
5. As a general rule, do not operate the printer with any parts removed.
6. Discharge electrical static from your body by touching the metal frame of the printer prior to
handling the PCB in order to avoid causing damage by the difference in static charge at that
time.

3-1
CHAPTER 3

B. Removal of the Toner Cartridge with Manual Operation

1) Press the toner cartridge cover open/close button (1) to open the toner cartridge cover (2).
2) Open the toner cartridge compartment cover (3).

Figure 3-1-1

3) Rotate the toner cartridge toward you (1) and lift it up (2) to remove.

Figure 3-1-2

4) While pressing down the lever of the rotary break with a screwdriver, rotate the developing
rotary with hand until the next toner cartridge comes to the fetch slot.

Rotary break unit

Rotary

Rotary

Figure 3-1-3

3-2
 CHAPTER 3

Note: When removing the toner cartridge, align the guides of the developing rotary and the top
cover unit.

Upper cover unit

Rotary
Guide

Figure 3-1-4

5) Perform procedures 2) to 3) to remove the other toner cartridges.

3-3
CHAPTER 3

II. EXTERNALS
A. Locations

2
7
11

6 3 8
10
5

9
4

1: Top cover unit

2: Control panel
3: Right cover
4: Front cover
5: Lower front cover unit
6: Multi-purpose tray unit
7: Upper front cover unit
8: Left cover
9: Rear cover unit
10: Lower rear cover
11: Delivery cover unit

Figure 3-2-1

Remove the covers according to the following procedures when cleaning or checking inside
the printer.
Removal procedures of the covers which do not require removal of other parts and can be
removed simply by removing screws are eliminated.

3-4
 CHAPTER 3

B. External Covers 2. Left cover unit

1. Top cover unit 1) Remove the top cover unit.
1) Remove the control panel according to 2) Remove the cassette.
the control panel removal procedures 3) Open the ITB unit drawer.
on page 3-9. 4) Remove the 2 screws and unhook the
2) Open the delivery cover. claw.
3) Remove the 2 screws. 5) Lift the left cover unit in the direction of
the arrow to unhook the 2 hooks, and
then remove the left cover unit.

➂
➀ ➃

➀
➀ Screws

Figure 3-2-2 ➀ Screws ➁ Claw

➂ Hooks ➃ Left cover unit

4) Open the toner cartridge door and Figure 3-2-4

drum cartridge drawer.
5) Unhook the 6 claws, lift the top cover
unit in the direction of the arrow, and
then unhook the 2 hooks to remove the
unit.

➁ ➀

➀ Claws
➁ Hooks
➂ Upper cover unit

Figure 3-2-3

3-5
CHAPTER 3

3. Right cover 4. Delivery cover unit.

1) Remove the top cover unit. 1) Open the rear cover, and then remove
2) Remove the 2 screws. the rear cover straps 1 and 2.
3) Move the right cover in the direction of
the arrow to unhook the 3 hooks, and
then remove the right cover. ➁

➁
➂

➂ ➀

➀ Delivery cover strap 1

➀
➁ Delivery cover strap 2
➂ Delivery cover unit
➀ Screws ➁ Hooks
➂ Right cover Figure 3-2-6

Figure 3-2-5
2) Slide the delivery cover in the direction
of the arrow keeping it in parallel with
the floor to remove the 2 pins and then
the delivery cover unit.

➀ Pins ➁ Delivery cover unit

Figure 3-2-7

3-6
 CHAPTER 3

5. Front cover 3) Unhook the 2 claws from the back of

1) Remove the control panel according to the drum cartridge drawer, and then
the control panel removal procedures remove the upper front cover unit.
on Page 3-9.
2) Remove the 2 screws, unhook the 2 ➁
claws, and then remove the front cover.

➁ ➀

➂
➀ Claws ➁ Upper front cover

Figure 3-2-10
➀ Screws ➁ Claws
➂ Front cover
Note: When installing the upper front
Figure 3-2-8 cover, ensure that the pins on both
right and left grip cams are insert-
ed correctly in the grooves on each
6. Upper front cover unit. drawer lock lever.
1) Open the drum cartridge drawer. Otherwise, the drawers will not be
2) Remove the 4 screws. opend with the pins inserted incor-
rectly.
➁ Grip Cam

Drum cartridge drawer

Pin

➀
Upper front cover
Drawer lock lever

➀ Screws ➁ Upper front cover

Figure 3-2-11
Figure 3-2-9

3-7
CHAPTER 3

7. Lower front cover unit 8. Multi-purpose tray unit

1) Open the ITB unit drawer. 1) Remove the Multi-purpose tray pick-up
2) Unhook the 2 Claws, and then remove unit according to the Multi-purpose
the 2 screw covers. tray pick-up unit removal procedure on
Page 3-13.
➁ 2) Remove the connector (J27).
3) Press the 2 pins with a precision screw-
driver, lift up the Multi-purpose tray
unit in the direction of the arrow, and
then remove the unit.

➀ Claws ➁ Screw covers

Figure 3-2-12

3) Remove the 2 screws and the bosses,

➂
and then pull the lower front cover unit
toward you.

➀ ➁

➁ ➀ Connector (J27)
➁ Pins
➂ Multi-purpose tray unit
➀ Screws ➁ Lower front cover
➂ Bosses Figure 3-2-14

Figure 3-2-13

4) Move the lower front cover unit down-

ward to remove.

3-8
 CHAPTER 3

Note : When installing the Multi-purpose C. Control Panel

tray unit, make sure to hook each 1) Open the drum cartridge drawer.
claw of Multi-purpose tray pick-up 2) Remove the screw and unhook 2 claws,
sub-roller holders. and then slide the control panel in the
direction of the arrow.

➁
➁

➀ ➀

➀ Multi-purpose tray pick-up sub-roller ➀ Screw ➁ Claws

holders ➂ Control panel
➁ Claws
Figure 3-2-16
Figure 3-2-15

3) Disconnect the connector (J701) from

the control panel, and then remove the
control panel.

3-9
CHAPTER 3

III. MAIN UNITS

Note: 1. When inserting/removing the
A. Laser/Scanner Unit flat cable, handle it carefully.
1) Remove the top cover unit and left cover 2. Do NOT disassemble the laser
unit. /scanner unit as it cannot be
2) Remove the 13 screws and then the DC adjusted in the field.
controller shield plate.

➀ Screws
➁ DC controller shield plate

Figure 3-3-1

3) Remove the cables from the cable clip.

4) Disconnect the 3 connectors, remove
the 4 screws and then the laser/scan-
ner unit.

➁ ➀

➀ Screws
➁ Connectors
➂ Laser/scanner unit

Figure 3-3-2

3 - 10
 CHAPTER 3

B. Drum Drive Unit 4) Remove the 13 screws, and then the

1) Remove the upper cover unit, right shield case.
cover, front cover, delivery cover unit,
and rear cover unit.
2) Remove the 2 screws, and then the
connector cover.

➀ ➁
➀

➀ Screws ➁ Shield case

➁
➂
Figure 3-3-5

➀ Screws ➁ Connector cover

➂ Shield case 5) Remove the low-voltage power supply
unit according to the low-voltage power
Figure 3-3-3 supply unit removal procedures on
page 3-61.
6) Disconnect the connector (J204, 4 pins)
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the on the developing PCB.
connector PCB. 7) Remove the 9 screws (M3x10: 8, M3x4:
1), cable guide, and then the drum
drive unit.

➀
➂

➀ ➃
➀
➁

➂ ➁
➀ Connectors ➁ Connector PCB
➂ Shield case
➀ Screws (M3x10) ➁ Screw (M3x4)
Figure 3-3-4 ➂ Cable guide ➃ Drum drive unit

Figure 3-3-6
Note: When inserting/removing the flat
cable, handle it carefully.

3 - 11
CHAPTER 3

Note: 1. If the drum drive unit is disas- C. Rotary Drive Unit

sembled, the drive gears will be 1) Remove the fan shield plate 1 according
out of phase. Therefore, do NOT to the 92-fan removal procedures 1)
disassemble the drum drive unit and 2) on Page 3-56.
as the phase cannot be adjusted 2) Remove the developing PCB according
in the field. to the developing PCB removal proce-
2. After removing the drum drive dures on Page 3-62.
unit, verify the connection to the 3) Remove the 2 screws and then the
high-voltage power supply unit. developing PCB plate.
Reconnect the connector if dis-
connected.

➀ ➁

➀ Screws
➁ Developing PCB plate

Figure 3-3-7

4) Remove the cables from the cable guide

2.
5) Unhook the 4 claws, and then remove
the cable guides 2.

➀ Claws ➁ Cable guide 2

Figure 3-3-8

3 - 12
 CHAPTER 3

6) Remove the cable (for primary high D. Multi-purpose Tray Pick-up Unit
voltage) from the cable guide of the 1) Remove the registration frame unit
rotary drive unit. according to the Multi-purpose tray
7) Disconnect the connector, remove the 5 PCB removal procedures on Page 3-63.
screws, and then disconnect the rotary 2) Remove the lower front cover.
drive unit. 3) Remove the screw, and then the lock
lever (left).

➃
➀

➁ ➂ ➄

➀
➁

➀ Cable guide ➁ Cable

➂ Screws ➃ Connector ➀ Screw ➁ Lock lever (left)
➄ Rotary drive unit
Figure 3-3-10
Figure 3-3-9

4) Remove the screw, and then the lock

Note: If the drum drive unit is disassem- lever (right).
bled, the drive gears will be out of
phase. Therefore, do NOT disas-
semble the drum drive unit as the
phase cannot be adjusted in the
field.

➀ ➁

➀ Screw ➁ Lock lever (right)

Figure 3-3-11

3 - 13
CHAPTER 3

5) Remove the 2 springs and then the lock 6) Remove the gear.
lever fixing plate. 7) Remove the 8 screws, and then the
Multi-purpose tray pick-up unit.
➁ ➂

➀ ➁
➀ ➀

➀ Screws ➁ Lock lever (right)

➂
Figure 3-3-12

➀ Screws
➁ Gear
➂ Multi-purpose tray pick-up unit

Figure 3-3-13

3 - 14
 CHAPTER 3

E. Feed Unit F. Fixing Unit

1) Remove the fixing unit according to the 1) Remove the delivery cover unit.
fixing unit removal procedures on Page 2) Shifting the fixing unit fastening lever
3-15. in the direction of the arrow, lift up the
2) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove unit slightly to pull it toward you.
the toner tray.
3) Remove the screw, and then slide the ➁
feed unit in the direction of the arrow to
remove.

➃ ➀ ➁

➀
➁
➂

➀ Claws ➁ Toner tray

➂ Screw ➃ Feed unit

Figure 3-3-14

➀ Fixing unit fastening levers

➁ Fixing unit

Figure 3-3-15

Note: 1 When replacing the fixing unit,

be sure to clear the fixing unit
counter maintained in the video
controller according to "2.
Replacement of fixing unit" on
Page 4-63.
2 When replacing the fixing unit,
turn OFF the printer and
unplug the power code. Also,
leave the printer to cool down
for plenty of time after turning
OFF the printer, as the fixing
unit is high in temperature.

3 - 15
CHAPTER 3

G. Delivery Unit H. Drum Cartridge Drawer Unit

1) Remove the fan shield plate 2 according 1) Remove the DC controller shield plate
to the 60-fan removal procedures 1) according to the laser/scanner unit
and 2) on Page 3-57. removal procedures 1) and 2) on Page
2) Disconnect the connector from the face- 3-10.
down tray paper full sensor. 2) Disconnect the connector on the +24V
3) Remove the 3 screws. interruption switch 2.
4) Slide the delivery unit in the direction of 3) Remove the connector on the toner car-
the arrow, and then remove the unit. tridge door open detection switch.
4) Remove the cables from the cable clips.
➁
5) Unhook the 5 claws, and then remove
the cable guide.

➁ ➃ ➄

➂ ➂

➀ Screws ➁ Connector ➃
➂ Delivery unit

Figure 3-3-16 ➀ +24V interruption switch 2

➁ Toner cartridge door open detection
switch
➂ Cable clips
➃ Claws
➄ Cable guide

Figure 3-3-17

6) Disconnect the connector (J1010, 15

pins) from the DC controller PCB.

3 - 16
 CHAPTER 3

7) Unhook the 2 claws on the rail stoppers Note: Be sure that the first 2 tie wraps
of the drum cartridge drawer with a are placed within the cable guide. If
precision screwdriver, and remove the the second tie wrap is placed out-
drum cartridge drawer unit. side the cable guide, the drawer
cannot be opened fully.

1
➂

3 ➀

➀ Cables ➁ Tie wrap (the 2nd)

➂ Cable guide

Figure 3-3-19

➀ Drum cartridge drawer stoppers

➁ Claws
➂ Precision screwdriver
➃ Drum cartridge drawer unit

Figure 3-3-18

3 - 17
CHAPTER 3

I. ITB unit Drawer Unit

1) Open the ITB unit drawer.
2) Lift up the ITB unit drawer unit to
remove the guide rollers from the rails,
and then remove the ITB unit drawer.

➀ ➂

➀ ITB unit drawer unit

➁ Guide rollers
➂ Rails

Figure 3-3-20

3 - 18
 CHAPTER 3

IV. MAIN PARTS

A. Locations

13
9

14

7
6
11

4
12

2
8 10 1 3

1: Cassette pick-up roller

2: Cassette feed roller
3: Cassette separation roller
4: Multi-purpose tray pick-up roller
5: Separation pad
6: Secondary transfer roller
7: Upper thermoswitch
8: Lower thermoswitch
9: Upper thermister
10: Lower thermister
11: Upper fixing heater
12: Lower fixing heater
13: Upper fixing roller
14: Lower fixing roller

Figure 3-4-1

3 - 19
CHAPTER 3

B. Cassette Pick-up Roller C. Cassette Feed Roller

1) Remove the cassette. 1) Remove the cassette.
2) Remove the shaft from the bushing, 2) Holding the knob, pull out the cassette
and then the cassette pick-up roller feed roller.
unit.
3) Unhook the claw, and then remove the
cassette pick-up roller from the holder.

➀ ➁

2 ➀ Cassette feed roller

➁ Knob

➀ Holder Figure 3-4-3

➁ Cassette pick-up roller
➂ Claw

Figure 3-4-2

Note: When installing the pick-up roller

unit, ensure that the shaft of the
pick-up roller unit is inserted to the
joint firmly.

3 - 20
 CHAPTER 3

D. Cassette Separation Roller E. Multi-purpose Tray Pick-up Roller

1) Remove the cassette. 1) Open the ITB unit drawer.
2) Open the cover. Holding the knob, pull 2) Rotate the Multi-purpose tray pick-up
out the cassette separation roller. roller toward you.
3) Pull the Multi-purpose tray pick-up
roller out.
➀

➀
➀ Cover
➁ Cassette separation roller ➀ Multi-purpose tray pick-up roller

Figure 3-4-4 Figure 3-4-5

Note: Make sure to close the cover firmly

after installing the separation
roller.

3 - 21
CHAPTER 3

F. Separation Pad Note: Set the spring in the right position

1) Remove the Multi-purpose tray unit when installing the separation pad.
according to the Multi-purpose tray
unit removal procedures on Page 3-8.
2) Rotate the bushing in the direction of
the arrow to remove.
3) Remove the Multi-purpose tray pick-up
roller unit.
4) Remove the lifting plate.

➀ ➁

➀ Bushing
➁ Lifting plate
➂ Multi-purpose tray pick-up roller unit

Figure 3-4-6

5) Lift the separation pad in the direction

of the arrow, remove the shaft and then
the separation pad.

➀ Shaft ➁ Separation pad

Figure 3-4-7

3 - 22
 CHAPTER 3

Note: When drive unit of the pick-up/feed system has been disassembled, reassemble the
gears as shown in the figure below.
When replacing the gears in the figure below, apply grease to the gears and shafts to pre-
vent noise. Type of grease and application method are described below. Do not use
grease other than the ones specified here.
Lubricating material: HY9-0007
Apply 0.2g of EM50-L to the teeth of the gears specified in the figure bellow.
Lubricating oil: CK-8003
Apply a drop to the shafts in the figure below. Do not apply to the one way gear or clutch.

Feed/fixing system drive gear

29T

37T
34/15T

29/17T

16T
29T 18/52T
52T

20T
47T 26T
24/37T
35T

Pick-up system drive gear

37/14T

31T

30/16T 53T
39/31T
18T
49T 19T

27T 18T

Figure 3-4-8

3 - 23
CHAPTER 3

G. Secondary Transfer Roller H. Upper Thermoswitch

1) Open the ITB unit drawer. 1) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
2) Shift the secondary transfer roller the fixing cover 1.
removal lever toward you.
3) Holding the gear, slide the secondary ➀ ➁ ➀
transfer roller to the right to remove.

➀ ➂ ➁

➀ Claws ➁ Fixing cover 1

Figure 3-4-11
➀ Secondary transfer roller removal lever
➁ Gear
➂ Secondary transfer roller 2) Remove the 3 screws and then the
upper thermoswitch.
Figure 3-4-9
➀

Note: When installing a new secondary

transfer roller, make sure not to
touch the sponged area of the
roller.
Shaft

Sponge

Shaft
➀ Screws ➁ Upper thermoswitch

Figure 3-4-12

Figure 3-4-10

3 - 24
 CHAPTER 3

I. Lower Thermoswitch J. Upper Thermistor

1) Remove the fixing cover 1. 1) Remove the fixing cover 1.
2) Pressing the claw with a precision 2) Remove the screw from the upper ther-
screwdriver, pull out the fixing unit mistor.
entrance guide toward you.

➁ ➀

➀ Screw ➁ Upper thermistor

➀ Claw
➁ Fixing unit entrance guide Figure 3-4-15

Figure 3-4-13
3) Disconnect the connector (J86), and
then remove the upper thermistor.
3) Remove the 2 screws and then the
lower thermoswitch.

➀ Screws
➁ Lower thermoswitch

Figure 3-4-14

3 - 25
CHAPTER 3

K. Lower Thermistor L. Upper Fixing Heater

1) Remove the fixing unit entrance guide 1) Remove the fixing cover 1.
according to the lower thermoswitch 2) Remove the screw and then the lead
removal procedures 1) and 2) on Page wire.
3-25.
2) Remove the screw from the lower ther- ➀
mistor.

➀ ➀ Screw ➁ Lead wire

Figure 3-4-17
➀ Screw ➁ Lower thermistor

Figure 3-4-16 3) Remove the heater contact (J84, No.3

pin) in the connector with the contact
removal tool (RY9-0099).
3) Disconnect the connector (J85), and 4) Remove the 2 screws, disconnect the
then remove the lower thermistor. connector, and then remove the lead
wire.

➁ ➀

➀ Connector ➁ Heater contact

➂ Screws

Figure 3-4-18

3 - 26
 CHAPTER 3

5) Unhook the claw of the heater holder, M. Lower Fixing Heater

remove the heater holder, and then pull 1) Remove the fixing cover 1.
out the upper fixing heater gently. 2) Remove the screw and then the lead
wire.
➂
➁

➁
➀

➀ Claw
➁ Heater holder ➀ Screw ➁ Lead wire
➂ Upper fixing heater
Figure 3-4-20
Figure 3-4-19

3) Remove the heater contact (J84, No.4

pin) in the connector with the contact
removal tool (RY9-0099).
4) Remove the 2 screws, disconnect the
connector, and then remove the lead
wire.

➀➁

➀ Connector ➁ Heater contact

➂ Screws

Figure 3-4-21

3 - 27
CHAPTER 3

5) Unhook the claw of the heater holder, N. Upper Fixing Roller

remove the heater holder, and then pull 1) Remove the upper thermistor according
out the upper fixing heater gently. to the upper thermistor removal proce-
dures on Page 3-25.
➁ 2) Remove the upper fixing heater accord-
ing to the upper fixing heater removal
procedures on Page 3-26.
3) Remove the lower fixing heater accord-
➀ ing to the lower fixing heater removal
procedures on Page 3-27.
4) Remove the 2 screws and then the left
fixing cover.

➀
➀ Claw
➁ Heater holder ➁
➂ Lower fixing heater

Figure 3-4-22

Note: When fixing the lead wire terminal

with a screw, make sure not to
apply excessive force to the lead ➀ Screws ➁ Left fixing cover
wire.
Figure 3-4-23

5) Remove the screw and then the right

fixing cover.

➀ Screw ➁ Right fixing cover

Figure 3-4-24

3 - 28
 CHAPTER 3

6) Remove the 2 screws and then the 8) Remove the grounding-ring on the right
upper fixing plate. side of the upper fixing roller, C-ring,
heat-insulating bushing, bearing, and
➀ then the upper fixing roller.

➂ ➁ ➀

➁
➄ ➃

➀ Screws ➁ Upper fixing plate

Figure 3-4-25 ➀ Grounding-ring

➁ C-ring
➂ Heat-insulating bushing
7) Remove the C-ring on the left side of the ➃ Bearing
upper fixing roller, gear, heat-insulating ➄ Upper fixing roller
bushing, and bearing.
Figure 3-4-27

➀ ➁ ➂

➃ ➄

➀ C-ring
➁ Gear
➂ Heat-insulating bushing
➃ Bearing
➄ Upper fixing roller

Figure 3-4-26

3 - 29
CHAPTER 3

O. Lower Fixing Roller 4) Remove the grounding-ring on the right

1) Remove the upper fixing roller accord- side of the lower fixing roller, C-ring,
ing to the upper fixing roller removal heat-insulating bushing, and bearing.
procedures on Page 3-28.
2) Remove the 2 E-rings, 4 screws, and
then the fixing unit drive gear side ➂ ➁ ➀
plate.
3) Remove the fixing unit drive gears.

➀ ➄ ➃

➀ Grounding-ring
➃ ➀ ➁ C-ring
➂ Heat-insulating bushing
➃ Bearing
➄ Lower fixing roller
➀ E-rings
➁ Screws Figure 3-4-29
➂ Drive gear side plate
➃ Fixing unit drive gears
5) Remove the C-ring on the left side of the
Figure 3-4-28 lower fixing roller, heat-insulating
bushing, bearing, and then the lower
fixing roller.

➀ ➁ ➂

➀ C-ring
➁ Heat-insulating bushing
➂ Bearing
➃ Lower fixing roller

Figure 3-4-30

3 - 30
 CHAPTER 3

Note: When the fixing unit drive unit has been disassembled, reassemble the gears as shown
in the figure below.
The gear B (27T) must be installed before installing the gear A (41T).
Do NOT apply oil to the one-way clutch gear.

Gear B (27T)

23T

14T

14T
21T
27T

Gear A (41T) 23T

23T 28T
17T

16/26T
20/27T

Figure 3-4-31

3 - 31
CHAPTER 3

P. 92-fan/60-fan Air Filter Q. 40-fan Air Filter

1) Open the delivery cover unit. 1) Open the drum cartridge drawer.
2) Slide the air filters of the 92-fan and 2) Open the fan cover.
60-fan in the direction of the arrow to 3) Slide the air filter of the 40-fan in the
remove. direction of the arrow to remove.

➀ Fan cover ➁ 40-fan air filter

Figure 3-4-33

➀ ➁

➀ 92-fan air filter ➁ 60-fan air filter

Figure 3-4-32

3 - 32
 CHAPTER 3

V. SWITCHES/SENSORS
A. Locations
1. Switches

SW1001

SW2

SW5

SW803
SW3 SW802 SW6
SW801
SW4

SW1

Figure 3-5-1

SW1: ITB unit drawer open detection switch

SW2: Toner cartridge door open detection switch
SW3: Drum cartridge drawer open detection switch
SW4: +24V interruption switch 1 (Drum cartridge drawer/ITB unit drawer)
SW5: +24V interruption switch 2 (Toner cartridge door/delivery cover)
SW6: Power switch (Power supply unit)
SW801: Cassette paper size detection switch (Cassette paper size detection PCB)
SW802: Cassette paper size detection switch (Cassette paper size detection PCB)
SW803: Cassette paper size detection switch (Cassette paper size detection PCB)
SW1001: Test print switch (DC controller PCB)

3 - 33
CHAPTER 3

2. Sensors

PS11

PS9

PS10
PS14

PS12 PS8
PS13
PS7 PS302
PS6 PS1 PS301

PS3

PS4
PS2
PS5

Figure 3-5-2

PS1: ITB unit life sensor (ITB unit drawer unit)

PS2: Registration roller paper sensor (Multi-purpose tray PCB)
PS3: Multi-purpose tray last paper sensor (Multi-purpose tray unit)
PS4: Multi-purpose tray paper sensor (Multi-purpose pick-up unit)
PS5: ITB home position sensor (ITB unit)
PS6: Fixing unit pressure sensor
PS7: Delivery paper sensor
PS8: Cassette paper sensor
PS9: Face-down tray paper full sensor
PS10: Developing rotary home position sensor (Rotary unit)
PS11: Toner cartridge contact sensor (Rotary drive unit)
PS12: Toner level sensor (Rotary unit)
PS13: Waste toner full sensor
PS14: Density sensor (Drum cartridge drawer unit)
PS301: OHT sensor (Multi-purpose tray PCB)

3 - 34
 CHAPTER 3

B. ITB unit Drawer Open Detection C. Toner Cartridge Door Open

Switch Detection Switch
1) Remove the left cover unit. 1) Remove the DC controller shield plate
2) Remove the ITB unit drawer unit. according to the laser/scanner unit
3) Remove the 2 rivets and then the switch removal procedures 1) and 2) on Page
cover. 3-10.
2) Disconnect the connector from the
toner cartridge door open detection
➀
switch.
3) Unhook the 2 claws and then the toner
cartridge door open detection switch.

➂ ➀
➂

➀ Rivets
➁ Switch cover ➁
➂ ITB unit drawer open detection switch

Figure 3-5-3
➀ Connector
➁ Claws
4) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2 ➂ Toner cartridge door open detection
claws, and then remove the ITB unit switch
drawer open detection switch.
Figure 3-5-4

3 - 35
CHAPTER 3

D. Drum Cartridge Drawer Open E. +24V Interruption Switch 1

Detection Switch 1) Remove the top cover unit.
1) Remove the top cover unit and the left 2) Remove the left cover unit.
cover unit. 3) Remove the 2 screws from the +24V
2) Disconnect the connector and unhook interruption switch 1.
the 2 claws to remove the drum car- 4) Disconnect the connectors from the
tridge drawer open detection switch. +24V interruption switch 1, and then
remove the switch.

➂ ➁

➀ Connector
➁ Claws
➂ Drum cartridge drawer open detection
switch.

Figure 3-5-5

3 - 36
 CHAPTER 3

F. +24V Interruption Switch 2 G. Cassette Paper Size Detection

1) Remove the top cover unit. Switch
2) Remove the 2 screws from the +24V 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply
interruption switch 2. unit according to the high-voltage
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the power supply unit removal procedures
+24V interruption switch 2, and then on Page 3-62.
remove the switch. 2) Remove the screw and disconnect the
connector, and then remove the cas-
sette paper size detection unit.

Note: When replacing the cassette paper

size detection switch, make sure to
replace the entire cassette paper
size detection unit.

3 - 37
CHAPTER 3

H. Power Switch I. Test Print Switch

1) Remove the low-voltage power supply 1) Remove the DC controller PCB accord-
unit according to the low-voltage power ing to the DC controller PCB removal
supply unit removal procedures on procedures on page 3-60.
page 3-61.

Note: When replacing the test print

Note: When replacing the power switch, switch, make sure to replace the
make sure to replace the entire entire DC controller PCB.
low-voltage power supply unit.

3 - 38
 CHAPTER 3

J. ITB Unit Life Detection Sensor K. Registration Paper Detection Sensor

1) Remove the gear cover according to the 1) Remove the ITB unit drawer unit.
registration roller clutch removal proce- 2) Place the ITB unit drawer unit upside
dures 1) through 3) on Page 3-49. down.
2) Remove the screw, and then the sensor 3) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2
cover. claws, and then remove the registration
paper detection sensor.
➀
➂

➁
➀ ➁

➀ Screw ➁ Sensor cover

➀ Claws
Figure 3-5-6 ➁ Connector
➂ Registration paper detection sensor
3) Disconnect the connector.
4) Unhook the 2 claws and pushing the Figure 3-5-8
ITB unit life sensor lever down, remove
the ITB unit life detection sensor.

➂ ➃

➀ Connector
➁ Claws
➂ ITB unit life detection sensor lever
➃ ITB unit life detection sensor

Figure 3-5-7

3 - 39
CHAPTER 3

L. Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper M. Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor

Sensor 1) Remove the Multi-purpose tray pick-up
1) Remove the Multi-purpose tray unit unit according to the Multi-purpose
according to the Multi-purpose tray tray pick-up unit removal procedures
unit removal procedures on Page 3-8. on Page 3-13.
2) Place the Multi-purpose tray pick-up
unit upside down.
Note: When replacing the Multi-purpose 3) Unhook the claw, and then remove the
tray last paper sensor, make sure feed drive gear unit.
to replace the entire Multi-purpose 4) Remove the screw, disconnect the con-
tray unit. nector, and then remove the feed roller
unit.

➄ ➃

➁ ➀ ➂

➀ Claw ➁ Feed drive gear unit

➂ Screw ➃ Connector
➄ Feed roller unit

Figure 3-5-9

Note: 1. When replacing the Multi-pur-

pose tray paper sensor, make
sure to replace the entire feed
roller unit.
2. When reinstalling the feed drive
gear unit, make sure to insert
the shaft of the feed drive gear
into the joint correctly.

3 - 40
 CHAPTER 3

N. ITB Home Position Sensor O. Fixing Unit Pressure Release Sensor

1) Replace the ITB unit. 1) Remove the cassette.
2) Remove the fixing unit according to the
fixing unit removal procedures on Page
Note: When replacing the ITB home posi- 3-15.
tion sensor, make sure to replace 3) Disconnect the connector. Insert your
the entire ITB unit. hand into the cassette entrance to
unhook the 2 claws that hold the sen-
sor, and then remove the fixing unit
pressure sensor.

➀ Connector
➁ Claws
➂ Fixing unit pressure sensor unit

Figure 3-5-10

3 - 41
CHAPTER 3

P. Paper Delivery Sensor Q. Cassette Paper Sensor

1) Remove the cassette. 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply
2) Remove the fixing unit according to the unit according to the high-voltage
fixing unit removal procedures on Page power supply unit removal procedures
3-15. on Page 3-62.
3) Unhook the claw, and then slide the 2) Unhook the claw, disconnect the con-
paper delivery sensor unit in the direc- nector, and then remove the sensor
tion of the arrow. holder.
4) Insert your hand into the cassette
entrance to disconnect the connector,
and then remove the paper delivery
sensor unit.

➀
➁
➃
➂
➁
➂

➀ Claw
➀ ➁ Connector
➂ Sensor holder
➃ Cassette paper sensor
➀ Claw
➁ Connector Figure 3-5-12
➂ Paper delivery sensor unit

Figure 3-5-11 3) Unhook the 2 claws from the sensor

holder and then remove the cassette
paper sensor.
5) Remove the screw and disconnect the
connector from the delivery paper sen-
sor unit, and then remove the delivery
paper sensor.

3 - 42
 CHAPTER 3

R. Face-down Tray Paper Full Sensor S. Developing Rotary Home Position

1) Remove the delivery unit according to Sensor.
the delivery unit removal procedures on 1) Remove the top cover unit.
Page 3-16. 2) Remove the left cover unit.
3) Remove the 2 screws and then the sen-
sor fixing plate.
Note: When replacing the face-down tray
paper full sensor, make sure to
replace the entire delivery unit.

➀ ➁

➀ Screws ➁ Sensor fixing plate

Figure 3-5-13

4) Unhook the 2 claws and disconnect the

connector from the sensor fixing plate,
and then remove the developing rotary
home position sensor.

3 - 43
CHAPTER 3

T. Toner Cartridge Contact Sensor U. Toner Level Sensor

1) Remove the rotary drive unit according 1) Remove the left cover unit.
to the rotary drive unit removal proce- 2) Remove the screw, then the toner level
dures on Page 3-12. sensor.
2) Unhook the 2 claws from the rotary
drive unit, and then remove the toner
cartridge contact sensor.
➁

➀ ➀

➀ Screw
➂
➁ Toner level sensor

➀ Claws Figure 3-5-15

➁ Toner cartridge contact sensor
➂ Rotary drive unit
Note: When replacing the toner level sen-
Figure 3-5-14 sor, do NOT touch the light emitter
and light receiver.

3 - 44
 CHAPTER 3

V. Waste Toner Full Sensor W. Density Sensor

1) Remove the DC controller shield plate 1) Open the drum cartridge drawer.
according to the laser/scanner unit 2) Remove the 2 screws.
removal procedures 1) and 2) on Page 3) Unhook the 3 claws, and then remove
3-10. the shield plate.
2) Remove the cables from the cable
clamp.
➂ ➁
3) Remove the screw.

➀ ➁ ➀

➁ ➂ ➀ Screws ➁ Claws
➂ Shield plate

➀ Cable clamps Figure 3-5-17

➁ Screw
➂ Waste toner full sensor
Figure 3-5-16 4) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
the connector cover.

4) Disconnect the 2 connectors, and then

remove the waste toner full sensor.

Note: When replacing the waste toner full

sensor, make sure not to touch the ➀
light emitter.

➁ ➂

➀ Claws ➁ Connector cover

➂ Density sensor

Figure 3-5-18

5) Disconnect the connector, and then

remove the density sensor.

3 - 45
CHAPTER 3

X. OHT Sensor
Note: 1. Do NOT peel off the seal 1) Remove the registration frame unit
attached to the detection win- according to the Multi-purpose tray
dow of the density sensor. PCB removal procedures on Page 3-63.
Also, do not touch the detection
window.
Note: When replacing the OHT sensor,
2. When installing the density sen- make sure to replace the entire reg-
sor, be sure to hook the claw of istration frame unit.
the density sensor unit to the
frame firmly.

Density sensor
Claws

Frame

Claws

Density sensor Frame

Figure 3-5-19

3 - 46
 CHAPTER 3

VI. SOLENOIDS/CLUTCHES
A. Locations

CL2 CL3 CL1

CL4

SL1
SL2

Figure 3-6-1

SL1: Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (Multi-purpose pick-up unit)

SL2: Cassette pick-up solenoid
CL1: Registration clutch
CL2: ITB unit contact clutch
CL3: ITB cleaning roller contact clutch
CL4: Secondary transfer roller contact clutch

3 - 47
CHAPTER 3

B. Multi-purpose Tray Pick-up Solenoid C. Cassette Pick-up Solenoid

1) Remove the Multi-purpose tray pick-up 1) Remove the cassette.
unit according to the Multi-purpose 2) Remove the top cover unit and the left
tray pick-up unit removal procedures cover unit.
on Page 3-13. 3) Disconnect the connector (J106, 3 pins)
2) Remove the screw, and then the Multi- from the feed PCB.
purpose tray pick-up solenoid. 4) Remove the cable from the cable clips.
5) Remove the 2 screws, E-ring, and then
the cassette pick-up solenoid unit.

➀ ➃
➁

➀ Cable
➁ Cable clips
➂ Screws
➃ E-ring
➄ Cassette pick-up solenoid unit

Figure 3-6-2

6) Remove the screw and then the cassette

pick-up solenoid from the cassette
pick-up solenoid unit.

3 - 48
 CHAPTER 3

D. Registration Clutch E. ITB Unit Contact Clutch

1) Remove the ITB unit drawer unit 1) Remove the ITB cleaning roller contact
according to the ITB unit drawer unit clutch according to the ITB cleaning
removal procedures on Page 3-18. roller contact clutch removal proce-
2) Place the ITB unit drawer unit upside dures on Page 3-50.
down. 2) Disconnect the connector (J1403, 2
3) Unhook the claw, and remove the gear pins) from the feed PCB.
cover. 3) Remove the E-ring and then the gear.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove 4) Remove the screw and then the gear
the E-ring and the registration clutch. cover.

➀ ➂
➃ ➂ ➀ ➁

➁
➄

➀ Claw ➀ E-ring ➁ Gear

➁ Gear cover ➂ Screw ➃ Gear cover
➂ Connector
➃ E-ring Figure 3-6-4
➄ Registration clutch

Figure 3-6-3 5) Remove the 3 screws and then the

clutch fixing plate.

➀ Screws ➁ Clutch fixing plate

Figure 3-6-5

3 - 49
CHAPTER 3

6) Remove the ITB unit contact clutch F. ITB Cleaning Roller Contact Clutch
from the clutch fixing plate. 1) Remove the top cover unit and the left
cover unit.
2) Remove the screw and the clutch sup-
Note: When installing the ITB unit con- porting plate.
tact clutch, ensure that the ITB 3) Remove the E-ring and the gear.
unit contact cam is facing upward. 4) Disconnect the connector (J104, 2 pins)
from the feed PCB.
5) Remove the E-ring, and then the ITB
cleaning roller contact clutch.

➂
➄

➁ ➀

➀ Screw
➁ Clutch supporting plate
➂ E-rings
➃ Gear
➄ ITB cleaning roller contact clutch

Figure 3-6-6

3 - 50
 CHAPTER 3

G. Secondary Transfer Roller Contact

Note: 1. When installing the gear on the Clutch
ITB cleaning roller contact 1) Remove the top cover unit and the left
clutch, ensure that the gears cover unit.
are in phase with each other as 2) Disconnect the connector, remove the
the figure below. E-ring and then the secondary transfer
roller contact clutch.

Face each convex.

Figure 3-6-7
➀ E-ring
➁ Secondary transfer roller contact clutch
2. When installing the ITB clean-
ing roller contact clutch, ensure Figure 3-6-8
that the ITB cleaning roller con-
tact cam is facing toward you,
as seen from the front of this Note: When installing the secondary
printer, and that the screw on transfer roller contact clutch,
the cam is seen from the out- ensure that the secondary transfer
side. roller contact cam is facing down-
ward.

3 - 51
CHAPTER 3

VII. MOTORS/FANS
A. Locations

FAN1

M3

M5
FAN2
M4

FAN3

M1

M2

Figure 3-7-1

M1: Fixing motor

M2: Pick-up motor
M3: Developing rotary motor (Developing rotary drive unit)
M4: Drum motor (Drum drive unit)
M5: Toner cartridge motor (Developing rotary drive unit)
FAN1: 92-fan
FAN2: 60-fan
FAN3: 40-fan (Upper front cover unit)

3 - 52
 CHAPTER 3

B. Fixing Motor Unit 5) Disconnect the connector (J102, 6 pins)

1) Remove the top cover unit and the left from the feed PCB.
cover unit. 6) Remove the 3 screws, cables from the
2) Remove the cables from the cable cable clip, and then the fixing motor
guide. unit.
3) Remove the screw and then the cable
guide. ➂ ➃
4) Remove the screw and then the gear
cover.

➃ ➀

➂
➀ ➁ ➃

➀ Connector ➁ Feed PCB

➁ ➂ Cable clip ➃ Screws
➄ Fixing motor unit

➀ Screws ➁ Cables Figure 3-7-3

➂ Cable guide ➃ Gear cover

Figure 3-7-2
Note: Do NOT disassemble the fixing
motor unit in the field.

3 - 53
CHAPTER 3

C. Pick-up Motor D. Developing Rotary Motor

1) Remove the top cover unit and the left 1) Remove the rotary drive unit according
cover unit. to the rotary drive unit removal proce-
2) Disconnect the connector (J109, 4 pins) dures on page 3-12.
from the feed PCB. 2) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
3) Remove the 2 cable clips and then the the cable guide.
cables of the pick-up motor.
4) Remove the 2 screws and then slide the
pick-up motor in the direction of the
arrow to remove.

➁ ➄ ➀
➁

➀ Claws ➁ Cable guide

➀ ➂ ➃ ➅
Figure 3-7-5

➀ Connector ➁ Feed PCB 3) Remove the 4 screws and then the

➂ Cable clips ➃ Cables developing rotary motor.
➄ Screws ➅ Pick-up motor
➀
Figure 3-7-4

➀ Screws
➁ Developing rotary motor

Figure 3-7-6

Note: Do NOT disassemble the toner car-

tridge motor unit.

3 - 54
 CHAPTER 3

E. Drum Motor F. Toner Cartridge Motor Unit

1) Remove the drum drive unit according 1) Remove the rotary drive unit according
to the drum drive unit removal proce- to the rotary drive unit removal proce-
dures on page 3-11. dures on page 3-12.
2) Remove the 4 screws and then the 2) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
drum motor from the drum drive unit. the cable guide.

Note: When replacing the drum motor, be

sure to replace the entire drum
drive unit.

➀
➁

➀ Claws ➁ Cable guide

Figure 3-7-7

3) Remove the 2 screws and then the

toner cartridge motor unit.

➁
➂

➀ Screws
➁ Toner cartridge motor unit
➂ Rotary drive unit

Figure 3-7-8

3 - 55
CHAPTER 3

G. 92-fan Note: When installing the fan, make sure

1) Remove the shield case according to the that the arrows of both the fan case
drum drive unit removal procedures 1) and fan are pointing in the same
though 4) on Page 3-11. direction.
2) Remove the 4 screws and then the fan
shield plate 1.

➀
➁

Figure 3-7-11
➀ Screws ➁ Fan shield plate 1

Figure 3-7-9

3) Disconnect the connector (J209, 4 pins)

from the developing PCB.
4) Remove the screw, and then the 92-fan
unit.

➁ ➀

➀ Connector ➁ Developing PCB

➂ Screw ➃ 92-fan unit

Figure 3-7-10

5) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove

the 92-fan from the 92-fan unit.

3 - 56
 CHAPTER 3

H. 60-fan 3) Remove the screw, disconnect the con-

1) Remove the top cover unit, left cover nector, and then slide the 60-fan unit to
unit, and delivery cover unit. the direction of the arrow to remove.
2) Remove the 3 screws, disconnect the
connector, and then remove the fan
shield plate 2.

➀ ➂
➀
➁
➃

➀ Screw ➁ Connector
➂ 60-fan unit ➃ Fan shield plate 2

Figure 3-7-13

4) Unhook the 3 claws and then remove

the 60-fan from the 60-fan unit.

➂ ➀
Note: When installing the fan, make sure
➁ that the arrows of both the fan case
and the fan are pointing in the
same direction.

➀ Screws
➁ Connector
➂ Fan shield plate 2

Figure 3-7-12

Figure 3-7-14

3 - 57
CHAPTER 3

I. 40-fan 5) Unhook the 3 claws, and then remove

1) Remove the upper front cover unit. the 40-fan.
2) Remove the 5 screws on the upper front
cover and then the internal cover. ➀

➀
➀ Claws ➁ 40-fan

➀ Screws ➁ Internal cover Figure 3-7-17

Figure 3-7-15
Note: When installing the fan, make sure
that the arrows of the fan case and
3) Remove the screw and unhook the 2 the fan are pointing in the same
claws, and then remove the connector direction.
cover.
4) Remove the drawer open/close arm.

➃ ➂ ➀

Figure 3-7-18
➀ Screw
➁ Claws
➂ Connector cover
➃ Drawer open/close arm

Figure 3-7-16

3 - 58
 CHAPTER 3

VIII. ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

A. Locations

Interface PCB Developing PCB

Video controller PCB

DC controller PCB

Connector PCB

Low-voltage
power supply unit

Feed PCB High-voltage

power supply unit

Multi-purpose tray PCB

Figure 3-8-1

3 - 59
CHAPTER 3

B. DC Controller PCB 5) Remove the 5 screws, disconnect the 19

1) Remove the top cover unit and the left connectors, and then remove the DC
cover unit. controller PCB.
2) Remove the 13 screws and the shield
plate on the DC controller PCB. ➀
➁ ➁
➀
➀ ➀
➂

➀
➁
➁

➁
➀ Screws
➁ Connectors
➀ Screws ➁ Shield plate ➂ DC controller PCB

Figure 3-8-2 Figure 3-8-4

3) Remove the cables from the cable clip.

4) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
the cable guide.

➂ ➁

➀ Claws ➁ Cable clip

➂ Cable guide

Figure 3-8-3

3 - 60
 CHAPTER 3

C. Connector PCB D. Low-voltage Power Supply Unit

1) Remove the shield case according to the 1) Remove the shield case according to the
drum drive unit removal procedures 1) drum drive unit removal procedures 1)
though 4) on Page 3-11. though 4) on Page 3-11.
2) Remove the connector from the connec- 2) Disconnect the 4 connectors and
tor PCB. remove the 4 screws, and then the low-
3) Remove the 4 screws and then the con- voltage power supply unit.
nector PCB.

➂ ➀ ➁

➀ ➁ ➂ ➀

➀ Connectors
➀ Connector ➁ Screws ➁ Screws
➂ Shield case ➃ Connector PCB ➂ Low-voltage power supply unit

Figure 3-8-5 Figure 3-8-6

3 - 61
CHAPTER 3

E. High-voltage Power Supply Unit F. Developing PCB

1) Remove the low-voltage power supply 1) Remove the cable guide according to
unit according to the low-voltage power the DC controller PCB removal proce-
supply unit removal procedures on dures 1) though 3) on Page 3-60.
Page 3-61. 2) Disconnect the 7 connectors and
2) Disconnect the 4 connectors and remove the 4 screws and then the
remove the 4 screws and then the high- developing PCB.
voltage power supply unit.

➂ ➀ ➀ ➂

➁ ➁
➁

➀ ➀
➀

➀ Connectors ➁ Screws
➀ Connectors ➂ Developing PCB
➁ Screws
➂ High-voltage power supply unit Figure 3-8-8

Figure 3-8-7

3 - 62
 CHAPTER 3

G. Feed PCB H. Multi-purpose Tray PCB

1) Remove the top cover unit and the left 1) Remove the registration clutch accord-
cover unit. ing to the registration clutch removal
2) Remove the fixing unit according to the procedures on Page 3-49.
fixing unit removal procedures on Page 2) Remove the 2 gears.
3-15.
3) Remove the screw. ➀
4) Unhook the 2 claws sliding them in the
direction of the arrow, and then remove
the cable guide.

➁ ➂

➀ Gears

➀ ➃ Figure 3-8-10

➀ Screw ➁ Hooks 3) Remove the E-ring and 2 bushings,

➂ Cable guide ➃ Feed PCB then the feed roller.
4) Disconnect the connector on the ITB
Figure 3-8-9 unit life detection sensor.

5) Disconnect the 8 connectors and ➂ ➃

remove the screw and then the feed
PCB.

➀
➁

➀ E-ring ➁ Bushings
➂ Feed roller ➃ Connector

Figure 3-8-11

3 - 63
CHAPTER 3

5) Remove the 4 screws. I. Video Controller PCB

1) Remove the 3 screws from the back of
the printer, and then the video con-
troller unit.

➀ ➁
➀

➀ Screws

Figure 3-8-12
➀ Screws
➁ Video controller unit
6) Disconnect the connector, and then
remove the registration frame unit. Figure 3-8-14

➁ 2) Remove the 2 screws (M2.5), and then

the interface PCB.
3) Remove the metal spacer.
4) Remove the 7 screws (M3), and then the
video controller PCB.

➂ ➃

➀
➀

➀ Connector
➁
➁ Registration frame unit

Figure 3-8-13

➄
Note: When replacing the Multi-purpose
tray PCB, make sure to replace the ➀ Screws (M2.5)
entire registration frame unit. ➁ Screws (M3)
➂ Interface PCB
➃ Metal spacer
➄ Video controller PCB

Figure 3-8-15

3 - 64
 CHAPTER 3

Note: 1. If an option is installed on the

video controller PCB, remove
the option before the proce-
dures.
Also, when installing the new
video controller, confirm that
the option has been installed.
2. When replacing the video con-
troller PCB, make sure to
remove the EEPROM from the
old PCB and install it on the
new PCB.
3. When installing the video con-
troller PCB, tighten the screws
after confirming that the bosses
of the sheet metal are inserted
in the positioning holes correct-
ly.

3 - 65
CHAPTER 3

IX. DUPLEXING UNIT 2. Reversing cover

1) Open the reversing unit.
A. External Covers 2) Remove the 2 screws.
1. Locations 3) Slide the reversing cover in the direc-
tion of the arrow, unhook the 3 claws,
1 2 3 4 5 and then remove the cover.

➂ ➀

7 6
➀ Screws ➁ Claws
8 Duplex feed unit ➂ Reversing cover

Figure 3-9-2

3. Right reversing cover

1) Loosen the screw.
2) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
10
the right reversing cover.
9

Figure 3-9-1

➀
1. Left front cover
2. Lower left cover ➂
3. Reversing cover
4. Upper reversing cover
5. Right reversing cover
6. Lower right cover
7. Right front cover
➁
8. Front cover
9. Right duplex feed cover
10. Left duplex feed cover ➀ Screw
➁ Claws
➂ Right reversing cover

Figure 3-9-3

3 - 66
 CHAPTER 3

4. Upper reversing cover 6. Lower right cover

1) Open the reversing unit. 1) Remove the right reversing cover.
2) Remove the 2 springs. 2) Remove the screw, unhook the claw on
3) Slide the upper reversing cover in the the back, and then remove the right
direction of the arrow, and remove the front cover.
shafts and then the cover. 3) Remove the 4 screws and then the
lower right cover.
➂ ➁

➀ Springs
➁ Shafts ➀ Screws ➁ Lower right cover
➂ Upper reversing cover
Figure 3-9-6
Figure 3-9-4

7. Front cover
5. Lower left cover 1) Remove the duplex feed unit.
1) Remove the screw, unhook the claw on 2) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
the back, and then remove the left front the front cover.
cover.
2) Remove the 3 screws and then the ➀
lower left cover.

➁
➀ Claws ➁ Front cover

Figure 3-9-7
➀ Screws ➁ Lower left cover

Figure 3-9-5

3 - 67
CHAPTER 3

8. Left cover
1) Remove the front cover.
2) Unhook the claw, and then slide the left
cover in the direction of the arrow to
remove.

➀ ➁

➀ Claw ➁ Left cover

Figure 3-9-8

9. Right cover
1) Remove the front cover.
2) Unhook the claw, and then slide the
right cover in the direction of the arrow
to remove.

➀ ➁

➀ Claw ➁ Right cover

Figure 3-9-9

3 - 68
 CHAPTER 3

B. Motors/Solenoids
1. Locations

M3102

SL3102
M3101

SL3101 M3103

Figure 3-9-10

M3101: Duplex feed motor (Duplex feed unit)

M3102: Reversing motor (Reversing unit)
M3103: Side registration motor (Duplex feed unit)
SL3101: Feed roller pressure release solenoid (Duplex feed unit)
SL3102: Deflector drive solenoid (Reversing unit)

3 - 69
CHAPTER 3

2. Side registration motor 5) Remove the 2 screws, disconnect the

1) Remove the duplex feed unit. connector, and then remove the side
2) Remove the right duplex feed cover. registration motor.
3) Remove the left duplex feed cover.
4) Remove the 5 screws and 4 pins,
unhook the 2 claws, and then remove 3. Duplex feed motor
the upper feed guide. 1) Remove the power supply unit accord-
ing to the power supply unit removal
procedures on page 3-77.
2) Disconnect the connector (J3104, 4
pins) from the duplexing unit driver
PCB.
3) Remove the 2 screws and then the
➁ ➂ ➀ ➂ ➁ duplex feed motor.

➀ Screws ➁ Pins
➂ Claws ➃ Upper feed guide

Figure 3-9-11

Note: When removing the pins or

unhooking claws, insert a precision
screwdriver into the space of the
metal plate on the pin.

Pin

Figure 3-9-12

3 - 70
 CHAPTER 3

4. Reversing motor 6. Deflector drive solenoid

1) Remove the right reversing cover. 1) Open the reversing unit.
2) Disconnect the connector (J3105, 5 2) Remove the right reversing cover.
pins) from the duplexing driver PCB. 3) Disconnect the connector (J3108, 2
3) Remove the 2 screws and then the pins) from the duplexing driver PCB.
reversing motor. 4) Remove the screw from the deflector
drive solenoid.
5) Shift the reversing unit lock arm in the
5. Feed roller pressure release solenoid direction of the arrow, and then remove
1) Remove the lower left cover. the deflector drive solenoid.
2) Remove the 2 screws, disconnect the
connector, and then remove the feed
roller pressure release solenoid unit. ➀

➀ Screw
➀ ➁ Reversing unit lock arm
➂ Deflector drive solenoid
➀ Screws
➁ Connector Figure 3-9-14
➂ Feed roller pressure release solenoid unit

Figure 3-9-13

3) Remove the 2 screws and then the feed

roller pressure release solenoid.

3 - 71
CHAPTER 3

C. Sensors
1. Locations

PS3102
PS3101

PS3103

PS3104
PS3105

Figure 3-9-15

PS3101: Reversing paper sensor (Reversing unit)

PS3102: Deflector position sensor (Reversing unit)
PS3103: Reversing stationary paper sensor (Reversing unit)
PS3104: Duplex feed paper sensor (Duplex feed unit)
PS3105: Side registration guide home position sensor (Duplex feed unit)

Note: When installing the sensors, make sure that the sensor levers and springs are in the
right positions.

3 - 72
 CHAPTER 3

2. Side registration guide home posi- 3. Duplex pick-up paper sensor

tion sensor 1) Remove the upper feed guide according
1) Remove the lower feed guide according to the side registration motor removal
to the duplex feed paper sensor removal procedures 1) through 4) on page 3-70.
procedures 1) and 2) on page 3-73. 2) Remove the 2 screws and then the
2) Remove the side registration gear and lower feed guide.
then the side registration guide (left).
3) Unhook the claw and then remove the ➀
sensor cover.

➂ ➁
➀ ➁

➀ Screws ➁ Lower feed guide

Figure 3-9-17
➀ Side registration guide gear
➁ Side registration guide (left)
➂ Sensor cover 3) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2
claws, and then remove the duplex feed
Figure 3-9-16 paper sensor.

4) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2

claws, and then remove the side regis-
tration guide home position sensor.

Note: When installing the side registra-

tion guide gear, keep the side regis-
tration guides (left and right) far-
thest apart from the center.

3 - 73
CHAPTER 3

4. Reversing unit paper sensor 5. Face-down sensor

1) Referring to page 3-71, remove the 1) Remove the reversing crossmember
deflector drive solenoid. according to the reversing paper sensor
2) Remove the 2 screws and then the strap removal procedures 1) through 3) on
retainer. page 3-74.
3) Remove the 6 screws, 2 springs, and 2) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2
then the reversing crossmember. claws, and then remove the face-down
sensor.
➀ ➃

➁ ➁
➁

➀ Strap retainer
➁ Screws
➂ Springs
➃ Reversing crossmember

Figure 3-9-18

4) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2

claws, and then remove the reversing
unit paper sensor.

3 - 74
 CHAPTER 3

6. Reversing stationary paper sensor 4) Remove the screw and then the sensor
1) Open the reversing unit. holder.
2) Remove the 3 screws and then the feed
crossmember unit.
➂

➁ ➀

➀ ➀ Screw ➁ Sensor holder

➂ Paper guide unit
➀ Screws
➁ Feed crossmember unit Figure 3-9-21

Figure 3-9-19
5) Disconnect the connector, unhook the 2
3) Remove the 4 screws and pin, discon- claws, and then remove the reversing
nect the connector, and then remove stationary paper sensor from the sensor
the paper guide unit. holder.

➁
➂

➀ Screws ➁ Pin
➂ Connector ➃ Paper guide unit

Figure 3-9-20

3 - 75
CHAPTER 3

D. Electronic Components
1. Locations

Duplexing driver PCB

Power supply unit

Figure 3-9-22

3 - 76
 CHAPTER 3

2. Duplexing driver PCB. Note: When installing the power supply

1) Remove the right reversing cover. unit, make sure to use the right
2) Disconnect the 8 connectors, remove screws in the right position.
the 5 screws and then the duplexing
driver PCB.
➂

➁ ➀ ➁

➁ ➁

➀ Screws
➁ Connectors
➂ Duplexing driver PCB

Figure 3-9-23

3. Power supply unit

1) Remove the lower right cover.
2) Disconnect the connector from the
power supply unit.
3) Remove the 5 screws, and then slide
the power supply unit in the direction
of the arrow to remove.

➃ ➁

➂ ➀ ➄

➀ Connector ➁ M3x6
➂ TP, M3x6 ➃ TP, M3x4
➄ Power supply unit

Figure 3-9-24

3 - 77
CHAPTER 3

X. PAPER FEEDER
A. Locations
Paper feeder PCB

Paper feeder pick-up drive unit

SW3001 PS3001
SW3002
SW3003
SL3001

Pick-up roller

Feed roller

Separation roller

Figure 3-10-1

SL3001: Paper feeder pick-up solenoid (Paper feeder pick-up drive unit)
PS3001: Paper feeder paper sensor
SW3001: Paper feeder paper size detection switch (Paper feeder paper size detection PCB)
SW3002: Paper feeder paper size detection switch (Paper feeder paper size detection PCB)
SW3003: Paper feeder paper size detection switch (Paper feeder paper size detection PCB)

3 - 78
 CHAPTER 3

1. Paper feeder pick-up roller 2. Paper feeder feed roller

1) Remove the cassette. 1) Remove the cassette.
2) Stand the paper feeder on end. 2) Holding the knob, pull out the paper
3) Unhook the claw, and then remove the feeder feed roller.
paper feeder pick-up roller from the
holder.
1

2
➀ Paper feeder feed roller
➁ Knob

➀ Holder ➁ Pick-up roller Figure 3-10-3

➂ Claw

Figure 3-10-2 3. Paper feeder separation roller

1) Remove the cassette.
2) Open the cover, hold the knoband then
Note: When installing the pick-up roller, pull out the separation roller.
ensure that the pick-up spring is in
the right position. Reset it correct-
ly if it is off.
➀

➀ Cover ➁ Separation roller

Figure 3-10-4

Note: Make sure to close the cover firmly

after installing the separation
roller.

3 - 79
CHAPTER 3

4. Paper feeder pick-up drive unit

1) Remove the 13 screws (M4x10, M3x3)
and then the upper frame unit.

➀ ➁ ➀

➀ Screws (M4) ➁ Screws (M3)

➂ Upper frame unit

Figure 3-10-5

2) Remove the screw, disconnect the con-

nector, and then remove the paper feed-
er pick-up drive unit.

➁ ➂

➀ Screw
➁ Connector
➂ Paper feeder pick-up drive unit

Figure 3-10-6

3 - 80
 CHAPTER 3

Note: When the paper feeder pick-up drive unit has been disassembled, reassemble the gears
as shown in the figure below.
When replacing the gears specified in the figure below, apply grease to the gears and
shafts to prevent noise. Type of grease and application method are mentioned below.
Do not use grease other than the ones specified here.
Lubricating material:HY9-0007
Apply 0.12g of EM50-L to the teeth (about 5 teeth) of the gears specified in the figure
below.
Lubricating oil:CK-8003
Apply a drop to the shaft specified in the figure below.

16T

23T
27T
31T
14/18T
53T
20T 31/39T 23/27T
49T 18T

19T 41T

Ratchet gear

Figure 3-10-7

3 - 81
CHAPTER 3

5. Paper feeder pick-up solenoid 8. Paper feeder PCB

1) Remove the paper feeder pick-up drive 1) Remove the upper frame unit according
unit, according to the paper feeder to the paper feeder pick-up drive unit
pick-up drive unit removal procedures removal procedure 1) on page 3-80.
on page 3-80. 2) Unhook the 2 claws, and then remove
2) Remove the screw and then the paper the PCB cover.
feeder pick-up solenoid from the paper
feeder pick-up unit. ➀

6. Paper feeder paper sensor

1) Remove the PCB cover according to the
paper feeder PCB removal procedures
1) and 2) on page 3-82.
2) Unhook the 2 claws, disconnect the
connector, and then remove the paper
feeder paper sensor.
➁

7. Paper feeder paper size detection

switch ➀ Claws ➁ PCB cover
1) Remove the paper feeder PCB according
to the paper feeder PCB removal proce- Figure 3-10-8
dures on page 3-82.

3) Disconnect the 3 connectors, remove

the screw, unhook the claw, and then
remove the paper feeder PCB.

➃
➁

➀ Connectors ➁ Screw
➂ Claw ➃ Paper feeder PCB

Figure 3-10-9

3 - 82
 CHAPTER 4

TROUBLESHOOTING

I. PREFACE.................................. 4-1 VI. MALFUNCTION STATUS

II. IMAGE DEFECTS ...................... 4-9 TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-31
III. PAPER JAMS VII. MEASUREMENT AND
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-21 ADJUSTMENT........................... 4-54
IV. PAPER TRANSPORT VIII. MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-28 SERVICING ............................... 4-64
V. MALFUNCTION IX. SERVICE MODE ........................ 4-72
TROUBLESHOOTING................. 4-30 X. LOCATION OF CONNECTORS.... 4-84
 CHAPTER 4

I. PREFACE
A. Malfunction Diagnosis Flowchart
The malfunctions that occur in the printer are mainly classified to five factors; “image defects”,
“paper jams”, “paper transport troubleshooting”, “malfunction troubleshooting”, and “malfunc-
tion status troubleshooting.”
If a malfunction occurred in the printer, the service technician is to find the factor according
to the malfunction diagnosis flowchart and to clear the problem following the action procedure
for each malfunction.
Make sure the following points at the execution of troubleshooting.
● Be sure that the connector has no poor contact when measuring the voltage at the specified
terminal of the connector.
● Before handling PCBs, be sure to touch metal part of the printer to discharge static electric-
ity, as it can cause damage to the PCBs.
● The laser/scanner unit cannot be adjusted in the field, so do not attempt to disassemble it.

4-1
CHAPTER 4

Initial check execution

Power ON

No Operator call or No Refer to the item, "malfunction

Displays "READY"? service call on
the control panel ? troubleshooting"

Yes
Yes

Is test print No Refer to the item, "malfunction

executable? (Note 1) status troubleshooting"

Yes

Make a test print

Yes
Occurs paper jam? Refer to the item, "paper jams"

No

Delivers paper No Refer to the item, "paper

normally? transport troubleshooting"

Yes

Occurs image Yes

defect? Refer to the item, "image defects"
(Note 2)

No

Operator call or Yes Refer to the item, "malfunction

service call on
the control panel ? status troubleshooting"

No

END

Figure 4-1-1

4-2
 CHAPTER 4

Notes: 1. Before executing a test print, make sure to select the same pick-up source and deliv-
ery source that were used when the malfunction occurred according to the informa-
tion given by the user.
If the information is not available, make test prints with all feasible combination of
paper source and delivery source in the printer, and find out the factor.
2. The image defect occurred at the user side might not re-occur on its test print. In
this case, make a test print from external device and infer the defective part(s) by the
output image. Then, find the defective part(s) according to the item, “image defects”.

4-3
CHAPTER 4

B. Initial Check
Check the following items before you diagnose malfunction. If any failure is found, the service
technician is to clear the problem and to give the instruction to the user.

1. Installation environment
a. The line is ±10% of the rated voltage.
b. The printer is securely installed on a level surface.
c. The room temperature is kept between 10 and 30°C, and the relative humidity, between 10
and 80%.
d. Avoid sites generating ammonia gas, high temperature or high humidity (near water faucet,
kettle, humidifier), cold places, open flames, and dusty area.
e. Avoid sites exposed to direct sunlight. If unavoidable, advise the customer to hang curtains.
f. A well-ventilated place.
g. Make sure that the power plug is inserted to the printer and the outlet securely. (Also, check
the power plug of the duplexing unit at the installation of the duplexing unit.)

2. Paper checks
a. The recommended paper for the printer is used.
b. The paper is not damp.
c. CLBP360PS original OHT (OHT T-H1) is not used when OHT sheet is used.

3. Paper sets
a. The paper is set to the pick-up source within the specified volume.
b. The paper is set to the selected pick-up source correctly. When OHT sheet is used, the sheet
is set to the multi-purpose tray correctly.

4. Toner cartridge sets

a. The color toner cartridges for each color are set correctly.

5. Drum cartridge sets

a. The drum cartridge is set to the printer correctly.

6. Units set
a. The ITB unit and fixing unit are set to the printer correctly.

7. Door/drawer set
a. All of the top cover, rear cover, drum cartridge drawer, and ITB unit drawer are closed.

8. Condensation
During winter, particularly when moving the printer into a warm room from a cold location
such as a warehouse, various problems can occur due to condensation in the printer.

Example)
a. Condensation in the optical system (six-faced mirror, mirror, lens, etc.) will result in the light
print image.
b. As the photosensitive drum is cold, the resistance of the photo-conductive layer is high. This
will lead to incorrect contrast.
If condensation appears, either wipe the parts with dry cloth, or leave the printer ON for 10
to 20 minutes.
If a toner cartridge is opened soon after being moved from a cold room to a warm room, con-
densation may appear inside the cartridge and may cause various problems.

4-4
 CHAPTER 4

Be sure to instruct the customer that it is necessary to leave the cartridge sealed for one or
two hours at room temperature to allow it to acclimatize before opening it.

4-5
CHAPTER 4

C. Test print
The test print is divided into two: engine test print and controller test print.
If malfunction occurs in this printer, make a test print and assess the abnormality of the
printer.

1. Engine test print

When the engine test print is made, the four-color (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) test print
pattern (vertical lines) is printed as shown in Figure 4-1-2.
A test pattern can be made by pressing the test print switch located on the right side of the
printer (see Figure 1-4-1) once when the printer becomes STAND-BY mode.
The built-in cassette is the only possible paper source for test print, and the option (duplex-
ing unit and paper feeder) cannot be used.

Feeding Direction

Magenta

Cyan

Yellow

Black

Figure 4-1-2

Note: Normally, the printer cannot make a test print without the video controller. To enable
the printer to execute a test print without the video controller, turn the power switch ON
while pressing the test print switch. In this case, the /PRNT signal from the video con-
troller is not accepted.

4-6
 CHAPTER 4

2. Controller test print

a. Test print
<Operation procedure>
1) Press ON Line to set the printer OFF-line.
2) Press Utility once and press the > key until the status display panel posts a "01 TEST PRINT"
message. Press the v key to print the pattern indicated in the figure below.

Figure 4-1-3

4-7
CHAPTER 4

b. Configuration page print

<Operation procedure>
1) Press ON Line to set the printer OFF-line.
2) Press Utility once and press the > key until the status display panel posts a "01 CONFG.
PAGE" message. Press the v key to print the pattern indicated in the figure below.

Color Laser Beam Printer Colour Laser Beam Printer

Imprimante a faisceau laser couleur Farb-Laserdrucker
Stampante Laser a Colori Impresora Laser a color

Configuration Page
VERSION : R0.01/KAM9J29D FEEDER MODE : AUTO
SUB VERSION : 12.00/2HD-2-C013-31-00 DUPLEX MODE : SIMPLEX
ENGINE VERSION : D0235/M0002 RAM : 12 ( 12 MB + 0 MB )
AVAILABLE RAM : 922 Kbytes
PDL : CPDL

CONTROL MENU GROUP QUALITY MENU GROUP

COPIES : 1 REFINE : on
MODE TIME OUT : 15 sec. PAGE PROTECT : auto
POWER SAVE : 60 min. COLOR MODE : auto
ALARM : 1 time BAND SENDING : on
WARNINGS : on QUARITY WARNING : continue printing
ECONOMY MODE : off SYSTEM MEMORY : auto
COLOR REGISTER : off
TONER DENSITY C : 8
TONER DENSITY M : 8
TONER DENSITY Y : 8
TONER DENSITY K : 8
TONER LOW : continue printing
AOUT ERROR SKIP : off
LANGUAGE : English
INTERFACE MENU GROUP
I/O SELECT : auto
PARALLEL BUSY-ACK : A-B-A
PARALLEL RECEIVING SPEED : high
PARALLEL SENDING SPEED : high
LAYOUT MENU GROUP INPUT PRIME : mode dependent
OFFSET Y : 0.0mm BI-DIRECTION : nibble
OFFSET X : 0.0mm BUFFER SIZE : 64K
BINDING : long edge
MARGIN : 0.0mm

FEEDER MENU GROUP

TRAY PAPER SIZE : A4
DEFAULT SIZE : A4
TRAY PRIORITY : off
AUTO SELECTION/TRAY : on
auto select/casstte(du) : on
DEFAULT TYPE : plain
TRAY MEDIA TYPE : plain
OVERRIDE MODE : off
JAM RECOVER : off

DEVICE ID
Manufacturer : Canon
Model : C LBP 400
Description : Canon C LBP 400

Page Count
Color: 000001
Monochrome: 000002

Figure 4-1-4

4-8
 CHAPTER 4

II. IMAGE DEFECTS

If the cause of the malfunction is identified to “image defect” by the malfunction diagnosis flow-
chart (Figure 4-1-1), find out the factor and clear the problem according to the table shown
below.

Table 4-2-1
Image defects
Defects Additional explanation

II-1 Light Output very light image.

II-2 Dark Output very dark image.
II-3 Completely Blank Output no image.
II-4 All black/solid color Output all black or solid colored paper.
II-5 Dots in Vertical Lines Output white dots on the paper.
II-6 Dirt on Back of Paper Output dirt on the back of the paper.
II-7 Dirt Output dirt on surface of the paper.
II-8 Vertical Lines Output vertical lines.
II-9 White Vertical Lines Output white vertical lines.
II-10 Horizontal Lines Output horizontal lines.
II-11 White Horizontal lines Output white horizontal lines.
II-12 Color missing The specified color was not printed.
II-13 Blank Spots Output image with blank spots.
II-14 Poor Fixing Output image with poorly fixed toner.
II-15 Image Distortion/Color Mis-registration Output distorted image or mis-registered color image.
II-16 Image Smearing Output smeared image or dirt on image.
II-17 Image Misplacement Image is not placed correctly.

II-1. Light

<Possible causes>
1. The image density is not adjusted correctly.
Action: Adjust the image density by operating the external device.
Action: Replace the developing PCB.

2. Execute a test print. Open the drum cartridge drawer during toner development (16 seconds
after pressing the test print switch). Remove the drum cartridge. If the toner image on the
photosensitive drum surface is faint, go to step 9.

3. Poor contact in the primary transfer bias contacts of the ITB unit and the high-voltage PCB.
Action: Clean the primary transfer bias contacts between the ITB unit and the high-voltage
PCB. If the problem persists after cleaning, check the contacts and replace the ITB
unit or high-voltage PCB. If the contacts are slipped off, adjust them correctly.

4. Poor contact in the secondary transfer bias contacts of the secondary transfer roller and the
high-voltage PCB.
Action: Clean the secondary transfer bias contacts between the secondary transfer roller

4-9
CHAPTER 4

and the high-voltage PCB. If the problem persists after cleaning,check the contacts.
If the contacts are slipped off, adjust them correctly.

5. Deformed/deteriorated secondary transfer roller

Action: Replace the secondary transfer roller.

6. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the DC controller PCB and the high-voltage PCB.

7. Defective high-voltage PCB (insufficient output of primary or secondary transfer bias)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

8. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

9. Defective high-voltage PCB (insufficient developing bias output)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

10. Defective laser/scanner unit

Action: Replace the laser scanner unit

11. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-2. Dark

<Possible causes>
1. The image density is not adjusted correctly.
Action: Adjust the image density by operating the external device or control panel.

2. Dirty density sensor unit

Action: Clean the lens in the density sensor unit with brush.

3. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Check the wiring between the primary charging contact, high-voltage PCB, and DC
controller PCB and reconnect the connectors correctly.

4. Defective high-voltage PCB (primary charging bias output shortage)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-3. Completely blank

<Possible causes>
1. The claw for open/close laser shutter in the drum cartridge is damaged
Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

2. Malfunctioning or damaged shutter arm and laser shutter

4 - 10
 CHAPTER 4

Action: Replace the parts if they do not move smoothly.

3. Poor contact in the rotary drive unit developing bias contact

Action: Clean the developing bias contact of the rotary drive unit.

4. Defective rotary drive unit

Action: Replace the rotary drive unit if the developing bias contact of the rotary drive unit
does not operate normally.

5. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Check the wiring between the rotary drive unit, high-voltage PCB, and DC controller
PCB and reconnect the connectors correctly.

6. Defective high-voltage PCB (does not output the developing bias)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

7. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-4. All black

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact between the primary charging bias contacts of the drum cartridge and the print-
er.
Action: Clean the primary charging bias contacts of the drum cartridge and the printer. If
the problem persists after cleaning, check the contacts. Reconnect them correctly
if disconnected.

2. Defective drum cartridge (primary charging roller)

Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

3. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the primary charging contact, high-voltage PCB,
and DC controller PCB correctly.

4. Defective high-voltage PCB (the primary charging bias is not output)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-5. Dots in vertical lines

<Possible causes>
1. Dirty static charge eliminator
Action: Clean the eliminator.

2. Poor contact between the static eliminator contact of the printer and the static eliminator
Action: Clean the contacts if dirty. if the problem still remains after cleaning, or the con-
tacts are deformed or damaged, replace the secondary transfer unit.

4 - 11
CHAPTER 4

3. Deformed or deteriorated secondary transfer roller

Action: Replace the secondary transfer charging roller.

II-6. Dirt on back of paper

<Possible causes>
1. Dirt on paper
Action: Replace the paper. At the same time, instruct the appropriate way to store paper.

2. Periodic dirt (fixing unit delivery roller, lower registration roller, secondary transfer roller,
lower fixing roller, cassette feed roller, and feed roller)
Action: Identify and clean the dirty rollers according to Table 4-2-2 on page 4-19. If the dirt
cannot be removed, replace them.

3. Dirty pick-up roller, transfer guide (included in the secondary transfer unit), feed belt
(included in the feed unit), fixing unit entrance guide, lower fixing unit separation guide.
Action: Clean the dirty parts. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace them.

II-7. Dirt

<Possible causes>
1. Dirt on paper
Action: Replace the paper. At the same time, instruct the appropriate way to store paper.

2. Periodic dirt (cassette separation roller, registration roller, upper fixing roller, developing
cylinder, photosensitive drum, and primary charging roller)
Action: Identify and clean the dirty rollers according to Table 4-2-2 on page 4-19. If the dirt
cannot be removed, replace them.

Note: The developing cylinder, photosensitive drum, and primary charging roller cannot be
cleaned. Also, they cannot be replaced individually. Replace the cartridge (toner car-
tridge or drum cartridge) if these parts require replacement.

3. Dirty multi-purpose tray pick-up roller, fixing unit entrance guide, and upper fixing separa-
tion guide
Action: Clean the dirty areas. Replace them if the dirt cannot be removed.

4. Dirty intermediate transfer belt

Action: Clean the dirty areas. Replace the ITB unit if the dirt cannot be removed.

5. If the problem persists after cleaning the intermediate transfer belt and the belt becomes
dirty again, go to step 10.

6. Poor contact in the grounding contacts between the upper fixing roller and the high-voltage
PCB.
Action: Clean the grounding contacts. If the problem persists, check the contacts.
Reconnect them correctly if disconnected.

7. Poor contact in connectors

4 - 12
 CHAPTER 4

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the high-voltage PCB and DC controller PCB cor-
rectly.

8. Defective high-voltage PCB (poor contact in the grounding contacts of the fixing upper roller)
Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

9. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

10. Execute a test print with the left cover unit removed.
If the ITB cleaning contact clutch is not operating, go to step 17.

11. Scratches and dirt on the ITB cleaning roller

Action: Replace the ITB unit.

12. ITB cleaning roller spring is out of the position.

Action: Set the spring to the correct position.

13. Poor contact between the ITB cleaning bias contacts of the ITB unit and the printer.
Action: Clean the ITB cleaning bias contacts of the ITB unit and the printer. If the problem
persists after cleaning, check the contacts. Reconnect them correctly if discon-
nected.

14. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the high-voltage PCB and DC controller PCB cor-
rectly.

15. Defective high-voltage PCB (ITB cleaning bias is not output)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

16. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

17. Defective ITB cleaning roller contact/separation drive gear

Action: Check the drive gears which transmit contact/separation movement to the ITB
cleaning roller. Replace the ITB unit, if the drive gears are worn and fractured.

18. Poor contact in the ITB cleaning roller contact clutch connector
Action: Reconnect the feed PCB connector and the DC controller PCB connector correctly.

19. Defective ITB cleaning roller contact clutch

Action: Disconnect the clutch connector J104. Measure the resistance between cable con-
nector J104-2 (CLNCLON) and J104-1 (+24VA). If it is not about 160 , replace the
ITB cleaning roller solenoid.

20. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

21. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 13
CHAPTER 4

II-8. Vertical lines

<Possible causes>
1. Circumferential scars on the photosensitive drum
Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

2. Circumferential scars on the upper fixing roller

Action: Replace the upper fixing roller.

II-9. White vertical lines

<Possible causes>
1. Defective developing cylinder (toner cartridge)
Check each developing cylinder in the toner cartridges and replace the defective toner car-
tridge.

2. Adhesion of toner on the upper fixing separation guide

Action: Clean the upper fixing separation guide.

3. Circumferential scars on the photosensitive drum

Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

4. Foreign matter is deposited on the laser outlet of the printer

Action: Remove the foreign matter.

5. Dirty mirror in the laser/scanner unit

Action: Replace the laser/scanner unit.

6. Circumferential scars on the intermediate transfer belt

Action: Replace the ITB unit.

7. Foreign matter in the ITB unit

Action: Take off the cover of ITB unit, and then remove the foreign matter.

8. Vertical scars on the upper fixing roller

Action: Replace the upper fixing roller.

II-10. Horizontal lines

<Possible causes>
1. Horizontal scars on the photosensitive drum (drum cartridge)
Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

2. Horizontal scars on the upper fixing roller

Action: Replace the upper fixing roller.

II-11. White horizontal lines

<Possible causes>
1. Horizontal scars on the photosensitive drum (drum cartridge)

4 - 14
 CHAPTER 4

Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

2. Horizontal scars on the intermediate transfer belt.

Action: Replace the ITB unit.

II-12. Color missing

<Possible causes>
1. Go to step 11 if all the colors except black are missing.

2. Dirty toner detection window in the toner cartridge

Action: Clean the toner detection window in the cartridge of the missing color.

3. Poor contact of the toner cartridge.

Action: Clean the contact of the toner cartridge of the missing color.

4. Defective developing cylinder (toner cartridge)

Action: Check the developing cylinder in the toner cartridge of the missing color, and
replace the defective toner cartridge.

5. Defective toner level detection light guide

Action: Clean the light guide of the missing color.

6. Poor contact of the developing rotary

Action: Clean the contact of the developing rotary of the missing color.

7. Poor contact in the toner level sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the toner level sensor, developing PCB, and DC
controller PCB correctly.

8. Defective toner level sensor

Action: Replace the toner level sensor.

9. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB

10. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

11. Defective ITB unit contact drive gear

Action: Check the drive gears that transmit contact movement to the ITB unit. Replace any
worn or fractured gear(s).

12. Defective ITB unit contact cam

Action: Check the cam that conducts the ITB unit contact operation. Replace the cam if
worn or cracked.

13. Defective ITB unit contact clutch

Action: Disconnect the clutch connector J103. Measure the resistance between cable con-
nector J103-2 (ITBCLON) and J103-1 (+24VA). If it is not about 160Ω, replace the
ITB unit contact clutch.

4 - 15
CHAPTER 4

14. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect J101 and J103 on the feed PCB and J1014 on the DC controller PCB
correctly.

15. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

16. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-13. Blank spots

<Possible causes>
1. Defective photosensitive drum or primary charging roller (drum cartridge).
Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

2. Defective secondary transfer roller contact/separation drive cam and gear

Action: Replace any defective part(s).

3. The intermediate transfer belt is deformed or contaminated with oil.

Action: Replace the ITB unit.

4. Poor contact in the secondary transfer bias contacts of the secondary transfer roller and the
high voltage PCB
Action: Clean the secondary transfer bias contacts of the secondary transfer roller and the
high voltage PCB. If the problem persists after cleaning, check the contacts.
Reconnect them correctly if disconnected.

5. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the high-voltage PCB and DC controller PCB cor-
rectly.

6. Defective high-voltage PCB (secondary transfer bias output shortage)

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

7. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-14. Poor fixing

<Possible causes>
1. The nip width of the fixing unit is not within the specification.
Action: Replace the fixing unit.

2. Scarred or deformed upper fixing roller

Action: Replace the upper fixing roller.

3. Scarred or deformed lower fixing roller

Action: Replace the lower fixing roller.

4 - 16
 CHAPTER 4

4. Deterioration of upper and lower thermistors

Action: Replace the upper and lower thermistors.

II-15. Image distortion/color mis-registration

<Possible causes>
1. Defective ITB unit
Action: Replace the ITB unit if the intermediate transfer belt in the ITB unit is slacked or
does not rotate smoothly.

2. Worn/fractured drum motor drive gears

Action: Check the gears between the drum cartridge and the drum motor and between the
ITB unit and drum motor. If any gears are worn or fractured, replace the rotary
drive unit.

3. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect the DC controller connector J1006, and the laser/scanner unit connec-
tor J551 and J1103 correctly.

4. Defective laser/scanner unit

Action: Replace the laser/scanner unit.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-16. Image Smearing

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the grounding contacts of the drum cartridge and the printer.
Action: Clean the grounding contacts of the drum cartridge and the printer. If the problem
persists after cleaning, check the contacts. Reconnect them correctly if discon-
nected.

2. Foreign matters or dirt on the fixing unit entrance guide

Action: Clean the guide.

3. Poor contacts in the grounding contacts between the fixing upper roller and high-voltage
PCB.
Action: Clean the grounding contacts. If the problem persists, check the contacts.
Reconnect them correctly if disconnected.

4. Defective ITB cleaning roller contact cam

Action: Check the cam that conducts the ITB cleaning roller contact operation. If the cam
is worn or cracked, replace the ICL unit.

5. Damaged lower registration roller drive gear

Action: Check the lower registration roller drive gear. Replace it if damaged.

6. Worn/fractured drum motor drive gears

Action: Check the drive gears between the drum cartridge and drum motor and between the

4 - 17
CHAPTER 4

ITB unit and the drum motor. Replace the rotary drive unit or ITB unit, if worn or
fractured.

7. Poor contact in the high-voltage PCB

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the high-voltage PCB and DC controller PCB cor-
rectly.

8. Defective high-voltage PCB

Action: Replace the high-voltage PCB.

9. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

II-17. Image misplacement

<Possible causes>
1. If image misplacement is output only when printing the 2nd side of the paper at duplexing
print, go to step 4.

2. Defective laser/scanner unit

Action: Replace the laser/scanner unit.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4. Damaged side registration guide gears

Action: Check the side registration guide gears. If any gear is damaged, replace.

5. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

6. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 18
 CHAPTER 4

Table 4-2-2

Main rollers relate to periods of appearance of dirt, blank spots etc.

Diameter Period Phenomenon

Problem location on image
(mm) Dirt on back
(mm) Dirt Blank spots of paper Poor fixing

Separation roller Approx.24 Approx.75

Cassette feed roller Approx.24 Approx.75
Feed roller Approx.16 Approx.50
Registration roller Approx.14 Approx.44
Secondary transfer roller Approx.18 Approx.57
Primary charging roller Approx.12 Approx.33
Photosensitive drum Approx.48 Approx.147
Developing cylinder Approx.16 Approx.50
Upper fixing roller Approx.40 Approx.126
Lower fixing roller Approx.40 Approx.126
Fixing delivery roller Approx.16 Approx.50
ITB cleaning roller Approx.12 Approx.38

4 - 19
CHAPTER 4

This page intentionary left blank

4 - 20
 CHAPTER 4

III. PAPER JAMS TROUBLESHOOTING

If the factor of the malfunction is identified as “paper jams” by the malfunction diagnosis flow-
chart (Figure 4-1-1), check the block in which the jam occurred, and find out the defective
part(s).
Paper passes through six major blocks; 1: Multi-purpose tray pick-up block, 2: Cassette
pick-up block, 3: Transfer/feed block, 4: Fixing/delivery block, 5: Duplexing unit block, 6:
Paper feeder block.

Figure 4-3-1

III-1: Multi-purpose tray pick-up block

III-2: Cassette pick-up block
III-3: Transfer and feed block
III-4: Fixing and delivery block
III-5: Duplexing unit block
III-6: Paper feeder block

4 - 21
CHAPTER 4

III-1. Multi-purpose tray pick-up block

<Possible causes>

1. Make a test print. If the cassette pick-up roller does not rotate, go to step 4.

2. Dirty/worn/deformed multi-purpose tray pick-up roller

Action: Clean the roller if dirty. Replace it if deformed or worn.

3. Defective lifting plate spring

Action: Re-set the spring correctly if it is out of position. Replace it if deformed or damaged.

4. Make a test print with the left cover unit removed. If the pick-up motor does not run, go to
step 11.

5. Damaged gears
Action: Check the drive gears between the pick-up motor and the multi-purpose tray pick-
up unit. Replace them if damaged.

6. Defective multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid

Action: Disconnect the multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid connector J25. Measure the
resistance between cable side connector J25-2 (MLTSL) and J25-1 (+24VA). If it is
not about 160Ω, replace the solenoid.

7. Damaged multi-purpose tray pick-up clutch

Action: Check the pick-up clutch. Replace it if damaged.

8. Poor contact in the multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid, multi-
purpose tray PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

9. Defective multi-purpose tray PCB

Action: Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

10. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

11. Defective pick-up motor

Action: Replace the pick-up motor.

12. Poor contact in the pick-up motor drive connectors

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the pick-up motor, the feed PCB, and the DC
controller PCB correctly.

13). Defective multi-purpose tray PCB

Action: Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

14. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 22
 CHAPTER 4

III-2. Cassette pick-up block

<Possible causes>
1. Pull out the cassette after a jam occurred. If the paper is not separated from the cassette
claw, go to step 4).
2. Worn/deformed cassette pick-up roller and cassette feed roller
Action: Replace them if worn or deformed. The feed roller and the separation roller must be
replaced at the same time.

3. Damaged gears
Action: Check the cassette feed roller drive gears or spring. Replace them if worn or dam-
aged. Re-set the spring if it is out of position.

4. Make a test print with the left cover unit removed. If the pick-up motor does not rotate, go
to step 10)

5. Damaged gears
Action: Check the gears which transmit the drive from the pick-up motor to the cassette
pick-up roller or spring. Replace them if worn or damaged. Re-set the spring cor-
rectly if it is out of position.

6. Defective cassette pick-up solenoid

Action: Disconnect the cassette pick-up solenoid connector J106. Measure the resistance
between the cable side connector J106-3 (CSTSLON) and J106-1 (+24VA). If it is
not about 160Ω, replace the solenoid.

7. Poor contact in the cassette pick-up solenoid drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the cassette pick-up solenoid, feed PCB, and DC
controller PCB.

8. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

9. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

10. Poor contact in the pick-up motor drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the pick-up motor, feed PCB, and DC controller
PCB.

11. Defective pick-up motor

Action: Replace the pick-up motor.

12. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

13. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 23
CHAPTER 4

III-3. Transfer and feed block

<Possible causes>
1. If the paper is jammed in the secondary transfer area after its leading edge passed the reg-
istration roller, go to step 11.

2. If the paper is jammed in the feeding area after its trailing edge passed the secondary trans-
fer area, go to step 17.

3. Dirty/worn/deformed feed roller

Action: Clean the feed roller if dirty. Replace it if worn or deformed.

4. Damaged gears
Action: Check the drive gears or spring of the feed roller and the registration roller. Replace
them if damaged or worn. Re-set the spring correctly if it is out of position.

5. Defective registration paper sensor lever

Action: If the registration paper sensor lever does not move smoothly, adjust it to move
smoothly. If the lever is out of position, re-set it correctly. Replace it if damaged or
deformed.

6. Defective registration clutch

Action: Disconnect the registration clutch connector J16. Measure the resistance between
the cable side connector J16-2 (REGCLON) and J16-1 (+24VA). If it is not about
160Ω, replace the clutch.

7. Poor contact in the registration clutch and the registration paper sensor connectors
Action: Reconnect the connectors between the registration clutch, the registration paper
sensor, the multi-purpose tray PCB, and the DC controller PCB.

8. Defective registration paper sensor

Action: Replace the registration paper sensor.

9. Defective multi-purpose tray PCB

Action:Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

10. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

11. Defective secondary transfer roller contact drive gears

Action: Check the gears that transmit the contact movement to the secondary transfer
roller. Replace any worn or fractured gear(s).

12. Defective secondary transfer roller contact cam

Action: Check the cam that conducts the secondary transfer roller contact operation.
Replace the secondary transfer cam unit, if worn or cracked.

13. Defective secondary transfer roller contact clutch

Action: Disconnect the clutch connector J105. Measure the resistance between connector
J105-3 (TR2CLON) and J105-1 (+24VA). If it is not about 160Ω, replace the clutch.

14. Poor contact in connectors

4 - 24
 CHAPTER 4

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the feed PCB and DC controller PCB correctly.

15. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

16. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

17. Defective feed belt unit

Action: Replace the feed unit if the belt in the feed belt unit is cut or the feed belt roller is
damaged or worn.

18. Damaged gears

Action: Check the drive gears of the feed belt. Replace the feed unit if damaged or worn.

III-4. Fixing and delivery block

<Possible causes>
1. If the paper is jammed after the fixing unit, go to step 10.

2. Upper or lower fixing roller does not rotate smoothly.

Action: Replace them if fixing unit drive gears or the lower roller drive gear is worn or frac-
tured.

3. Projection on the fixing unit entrance guide, upper or lower fixing separation guide due to
dirt, scars, or toner adhesion.
Action: Clean the guide. Replace it if scarred or damaged.

4. projection on the upper fixing roller or lower fixing roller due to dirt or toner adhesion.
Action: Clean the rollers.

5. Scared/deformed upper and lower fixing rollers

Action: Replace the rollers.

6. Defective fixing unit delivery sensor lever

Action: Adjust the lever correctly if it does not move smoothly or is out of position. Or,
replace it if damaged or deformed.

7. Defective paper delivery sensor

Action: Replace the paper delivery sensor.

8. Worn fixing unit delivery roller

Action: Replace the fixing unit delivery roller.

9. Damaged fixing unit delivery roller drive gears

Action: If any gear is damaged or worn, replace it.

10. Projection on the deflector due to dirt, scars, or toner adhesion.

Action: Clean the face-up deflector if dirty. Replace it if scarred or deformed.

11. Worn face-down delivery roller

4 - 25
CHAPTER 4

Action: Replace the face-down delivery unit.

12. Defective face-down delivery roller/drive belt

Action: Replace the face-down delivery roller gear if worn or fractured. Or, if the drive belt
is cut, replace the face-down delivery unit.

13. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

III-5. Duplexing unit block

<Possible causes>
1. Execute a test print. Go to step 9 if the paper is jammed in the duplexing feed unit.

2. Worn/deformed reversing roller

Action: Replace the reversing roller if worn or damaged.

3. Damaged reversing unit drive gears

Action: Replace any drive gear of the reversing unit if damaged or worn.

4. Defective reversing unit paper sensor lever and reversing unit stationary paper sensor lever
Action: If the reversing unit paper sensor lever or reversing unit stationary paper sensor
lever does not move smoothly or the levers are out of positions, adjust them cor-
rectly. Or, replace them if damaged or deformed.

5. Poor contact in the reversing motor drive line connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the reversing motor and duplexing driver PCB.

6. Poor contact with the printer

Action: Reconnect the connector that connects the duplexing unit to the printer. Replace
the connector if damaged.

7. Defective reversing motor

Action: Replace the reversing motor.

8. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

9. Worn/deformed duplexing feed roller

Action: Replace the duplexing feed roller.

10. Damaged gears

Action: Replace any damaged or worn drive gear in the duplexing feed unit.

11. Defective duplexing feed unit paper sensor lever

Action: Adjust the lever correctly if it does not move smoothly or is out of position. Or,
replace it if damaged/deformed.

12. Poor contact in the duplexing feed motor drive line connector
Action: Reconnect connectors between the duplexing feed motor and the duplexing driver
PCB and between the duplexing unit and the printer connector.

4 - 26
 CHAPTER 4

13. Defective duplexing feed motor

Action: Replace the duplexing feed motor.

14. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

III-6. Paper feeder block

<Possible causes>
1. Make a test print from the cassette in the printer. If paper jam occurs, go to “3-2 Cassette
pick-up block.”

2. Worn/deformed paper feeder pick-up roller and paper feeder feed roller
Action: Replace the rollers if worn or damaged. The separation roller and the paper feeder
feed roller must be replaced at the same time.

3. Damaged drive gears

Action: Check the paper feeder feed roller drive gears and the drive transmission gears in
the printer side. Replace any damaged or worn gear. If the paper feeder is con-
nected via the duplexing unit, check the drive transmission gears in the duplexing
unit.

4. Poor contact between the paper feeder pick-up solenoid and paper feeder PCB
Action: Reconnect the connectors between the paper feeder pick-up solenoid and paper
feeder PCB.

5. Poor contact between the paper feeder and printer

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the paper feeder and printer. Replace any dam-
aged connectors.

6. Defective paper feeder pick-up solenoid

Action: Disconnect the paper feeder pick-up solenoid connector J3003 on the paper feeder
PCB. Measure the resistance between the cable side connector J3003-2 (OPCLDRV)
and J3003-1 (+24VA). If it is not about 160Ω, replace the paper feeder pick-up sole-
noid.

7. Defective paper feeder PCB

Action: Replace the paper feeder PCB.

8. If the paper feeder is connected via the duplexing unit, execute step 6 and 14 in “III-5.
duplexing unit block”.

9. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 27
CHAPTER 4

IV. PAPER TRANSPORT TROUBLESHOOTING

If the factor of the malfunction is identified as “paper transport trouble shooting” by the mal-
function diagnosis flowchart (Figure 4-1-1), execute the following and mend the defect.

IV-1. Multiple feed

<Possible causes>
1. If the multiple feed occurs in the cassette pick-up or in paper feeder, go to step 2. If it occurs
in the multi-purpose tray, go to step 6.

2. Deformed cassette claw

Action: Replace the cassette if deformed.

3. Worn/deformed cassette separation roller

Action: Replace the cassette separation roller.

4. Spring pushing the cassette separation roller is defective

Action: Replace the cassette.

5. Defective cassette separation roller torque limiter

Action: Replace the cassette separation roller torque limiter.

6. Worn multi-purpose separation pad surface

Action: Replace the multi-purpose separation pad.

7. Spring pushing the multi-purpose separation pad is defective

Action: Re-set the spring correctly. Or, replace it if deformed or damaged.

IV-2. Wrinkles/folded leading edge

<Possible causes>
1. Make a test print, and turn the power switch OFF before the paper is fed into the fixing unit.
Then, remove the ITB unit. If the paper is wrinkled at this point, go to step 8.

2. Dirty fixing unit entrance guide

Action: Clean the fixing unit entrance guide.

3. Dirty lower fixing roller

Action: Clean the lower fixing roller.

4. Scarred/deformed lower fixing roller

Action: Replace the lower fixing roller if scarred or deformed.

5. Dirty upper fixing roller

Action: Clean the upper fixing roller.

6. Scarred/deformed upper fixing roller

Action: Replace the upper fixing roller if scarred or deformed.

7. Foreign matters or dirt on the face-down and face-up delivery rollers

4 - 28
 CHAPTER 4

Action: Clean the delivery rollers.

8. Foreign matters or dirt on the paper guide, secondary transfer roller, feed roller, registration
roller
Action: Check the paper path. If foreign matters or dirt is on the parts mentioned above,
clean the dirty areas.

9. Foreign matters, or dirt on paper path

Action: Check the paper path, and clean the parts if dirty or foreign matters are attached.

IV-3. Skew

<Possible causes>
1. Paper particle or dust on feed roller, registration roller, and separation guide
Action: Clean the dirty area.

2. Registration roller spring is deformed or out of position.

Action: Re-set the spring to the correct position. Correct the spring if deformed.

4 - 29
CHAPTER 4

V. MALFUNCTION TROUBLESHOOTING
If the factor of the malfunction is identified as “malfunction troubleshooting” by the malfunction
diagnosis flowchart (Figure 4-1-1), execute the followings and mend the defect.

V-1. No AC power

<Possible causes>
1. The circuit breaker is OFF.
Action: Remove the power supply unit, and press the button on the circuit breaker to turn
the circuit breaker ON.
You must allow 30 seconds before turning the circuit breaker ON after it has acti-
vated.
Turn the power switch ON before connecting the power cable to the power outlet,
and make sure to check the short-circuit on the AC line and that the circuit break-
er has been reset (energization and contact resistance) using a tester.

2. Defective power supply unit

Action: Remove the power supply unit.

V-2. No DC power (+5V, +24V)

<Possible causes>
1. No AC power supply
Action: Check the AC power supply according to “V-1. No AC power.”

2. Activated overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit

Action: If the problem is not rectified after the power switch is turned OFF and ON again,
find the cause of activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit in the
power supply. Wait for more than two minutes before turning the power back ON.

3. Defective power supply unit

Action: Replace the power supply unit if the voltage between connector J1013-3 (+24VB)
and J1013-4 (SGND) on the DC controller PCB is not 24V after turning ON the
printer.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB

4 - 30
 CHAPTER 4

VI. MALFUNCTION STATUS TROUBLESHOOTING

If the factor of the malfunction is identified as “malfunction troubleshooting” by the malfunction
diagnosis flowchart (Figure 4-1-1), execute the following and mend the defect.

Make sure the following points at the execution of the malfunction status.
● Be sure that the connector has no poor contact when measuring the voltage at the specified
terminal of the connector.
● Before handling PCBs, be sure to touch the metal to discharge static electricity, as it can
cause damage to the PCBs.
● When replacing the DC controller PCB, be sure to write data (refer to Note 1) into the EEP-
ROM on the new DC controller PCB by operating it on the status display panel.
● The laser/scanner unit cannot be adjusted in the field, so do not attempt to disassemble it.
● When replacing the fixing unit, be sure to clear the life counter of the fixing unit by operat-
ing it on the status display panel (refer to Note 2).

Notes: 1. The EEPROM on the DC controller PCB stores data varying with the machine (such
as top registration adjust-value and side registration adjust-value). When replacing
the DC controller PCB, write the adjust-data into the new DC controller PCB accord-
ing to the "1. Replacement of DC controller PCB" in VII. MEASUREMENT AND
ADJUSTMENT.
2. The video controller has a life counter for the fixing unit, which stores the life data of
the fixing unit. When replacing the fixing unit, the life data must be cleared.
Otherwise, a "E5 FIX.UNIT WARN" message that requires a fixing unit replacement
will be indicated. For this reason, make sure to clear the fixing unit life data accord-
ing to "2. Replacement of fixing unit" in VII. MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.
3. In this manual, the service calls are indicated with "XXX SERVICE CALL YYY".
However, in the actual machine, a "XXX SERVICE CALL" is indicated in the first line
of the display panel and "YYY " in the second line.

4 - 31
CHAPTER 4

VI-1. “A50 SERVICE CALL 002” Fixing unit malfunction (abnormal warm-up)
“A50 SERVICE CALL 001” Fixing unit malfunction (abnormally low temperature)

<Possible causes>
1. The upper thermistor wire is broken
Action: Turn the power switch OFF and remove the fixing unit. Measure the resistance
between the fixing unit connector J82-10 (THRU) and J82-9 (GND). If it is not
between 430kΩ to 310kΩ (room temperature 25°C), check the wire between the fix-
ing unit connector J82 and the upper thermistor connector J86. If it is normal,
replace the upper thermistor.

2. The lower thermistor wire is broken

Action: Turn the power switch OFF and remove the fixing unit. Measure the resistance
between the fixing unit connector J82-8 (THRL) and J82-7 (GND). If the resistance
is not between 430kΩ to 310kΩ (room temperature 25°C), check the wires between
the fixing unit connector J82 and the lower thermistor connector J85. If it is nor-
mal, replace the lower thermistor.

3. Upper fixing heater wire/upper thermoswitch wire is broken

Action: Remove the fixing unit. If there is no continuity between the fixing unit connector
J84-2 (HTH) and J84-3 (HTUC), check the upper fixing heater and the upper ther-
moswitch, and replace the defective parts.

4. Lower fixing heater wire/lower thermoswitch wire is broken

Action: Remove the fixing unit. If there is no continuity between the fixing unit connector
J84-2 (HTH) and J84-4 (HTLC), check the lower fixing heater and the lower ther-
moswitch, and replace the defective parts.

5. Defective upper thermistor installation

Action: If the upper thermistor is not uniformly contacting with the upper fixing roller , re-
install it.

6. Dirty upper thermistor

Action: Clean the thermistor surface that is in contact with the upper fixing roller.

7. Defective lower thermistor installation

Action: If the lower thermistor is not uniformly contacting with the lower fixing roller, re-
install it.

8. Dirty lower thermistor

Action: Clean the thermistor surface that is in contact with the lower fixing roller.

9. Poor contact in the connectors

Action: Reconnect the DC controller PCB connector J1011-low-voltage power supply unit
connector and the fixing unit connector J82 correctly.

10. Defective power supply unit

Action: Replace the power supply unit.

11. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 32
 CHAPTER 4

VI-2. “A50 SERVICE CALL 003” Fixing unit malfunction (abnormally high temperature)

<Possible causes>
1. Upper thermistor is shortcircuited
Action: Turn the power switch OFF and remove the fixing unit. Measure the resistance
between the fixing unit connector J82-10 (THRU) and J82-9(GND). If the resistance
is not between 430kΩ to 310kΩ (room temperature 25°C), check the wire between
the fixing unit connector J82 and the upper thermistor connector J86. If it is nor-
mal, replace the upper thermistor.

2. Lower thermistor is shortcircuited

Action: Turn the power switch OFF and remove the fixing unit. Measure the resistance
between the fixing unit connector J82-8 (THRL) and J82-7 (GND). If the resistance
is not between 430kΩ to 310kΩ (room temperature 25°C), check the wires between
the fixing unit connector J82 and the upper thermistor connector J85. If it is nor-
mal, replace the lower thermistor.

3. Defective power supply unit

Action: Replace the power supply unit.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-3. “A50 SERVICE CALL 005” Fixing unit malfunction (broken heater wire)

<Possible causes>
1. Upper fixing heater wire/upper thermoswitch wire is broken
Action: Remove the fixing unit from the printer. If there is no continuity between the fixing
unit connector J82-2 (HTH) and J82-3 (HTUC), check the upper fixing heater and
the upper thermoswitch, and replace the defective parts.

2. Lower fixing heater wire/lower thermoswitch wire is broken

Action: Remove the fixing unit from the printer. If there is no continuity between the fixing
unit connector J82-2 (HTH) and J82-4 (HTLC), check the lower fixing heater and the
lower thermoswitch, and replace the defective parts.

3. Poor contact in connectors

Action: Reconnect the DC controller PCB connector J1012 and the fixing unit connector
J82, and the power supply unit connectors J1 and J2 correctly.

4. Defective power supply unit

Action: Replace the power supply unit.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 33
CHAPTER 4

VI-4. “A51 SERVICE CALL 002” Laser unit malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the LASER DRIVE signal line connector
Action: Reconnect the laser driver PCB connector J1101 and J1102 and the DC controller
PCB connector J1007 and J1008 correctly.

2. Poor contact in the BD detection line connector

Action: Reconnect the BD PCB connector J551 and the DC controller PCB connector J1006
correctly.

3. Defective laser/scanner unit

Action: Replace the laser/scanner unit.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-5. “A51 SERVICE CALL 003” Scanner motor malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the laser/scanner unit connector
Action: Reconnect the BD PCB connector J551, the scanner motor connector J1103, and
the DC controller PCB connector J1006 correctly.

2. Defective laser/scanner unit

Action: Replace the laser/scanner unit.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-6. “A54 SERVICE CALL 061” 92-fan (FAN1) malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Defective 92-fan
Action: Replace the 92-fan if the voltage between the 92-fan connector J209-3
(92/60FANON) and J209-1 (PGND) changes from 0V to about 24V immediately after
the printer is turned ON.

2. Poor contact in 92-fan drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the 92-fan and DC controller PCB correctly.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB.

4 - 34
 CHAPTER 4

VI-7. “A54 SERVICE CALL 062” 60-fan (FAN2) malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Defective 60-fan
Action: If the voltage between the 60-fan connector J208-3 (92/60FAN24V) and J208-1
(PGND) changes from 0V to about 24V right after the printer is turned ON, replace
the 60-fan.

2. Poor contact in 60-fan drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the 60-fan and DC controller PCB correctly.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB.

VI-8. “A54 SERVICE CALL 063” 40-fan (FAN3) malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Defective 40-fan
Action: If the voltage between the 40-fan connector J77-3 (40FAN12V) and J77-1 (GND)
changes from 0V to about 12V right after the printer is turned ON, replace the 40-
fan.

2. Poor contact in 40-fan drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the 40-fan and DC controller PCB correctly.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-9. “A54 SERVICE CALL 022” Fixing motor malfunction (start-up and rotation failure)

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged fixing unit drive gears
Action: Replace the drive gears if damaged or worn.

2. Defective fixing unit pressure release sensor lever

Action: If the fixing unit pressure release sensor lever does not move smoothly, or it is dam-
aged/deformed, replace it. If the spring is out of position, re-set to correct position.

3. Poor contact in the fixing motor drive connector and the fixing roller pressure release sensor
connector
Action: Reconnect the connectors between the fixing motor, fixing roller pressure release
sensor, feed PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

4. Defective fixing roller pressure release sensor

Action: Replace the fixing roller pressure release sensor.

5. Defective fixing motor

4 - 35
CHAPTER 4

Action: Replace the fixing motor.

6. Defective feed PCB
Action: Replace the feed PCB.

7. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-10. “A54 SERVICE CALL 071” Developing rotary malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Open the cartridge door and turn the power switch ON while holding down the developing
rotary break release lever and the door switch. If the developing rotary does not rotate, go
to step 7.

2. Damaged rotary drive unit

Action: Replace any drive gears in the rotary drive unit if damaged or worn.

3. Poor contact in the developing rotary position sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the developing rotary position sensor, develop-
ing PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

4. Defective the developing rotary position sensor

Action: Replace the developing rotary position sensor.

5. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB.

6. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

7. Poor contact in the developing rotary motor drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the developing rotary motor, developing PCB,
and DC controller PCB correctly.

8. Defective developing rotary motor

Action: Replace the developing rotary motor.

9. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB.

10. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-11. “A54 SERVICE CALL 072” Cartridge motor malfunction (cartridge contact/separa-
tion error)

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged rotary drive unit
Action: Replace the rotary drive unit.

4 - 36
 CHAPTER 4

2. Damaged toner cartridge contact/separation sensor flag

Action: Replace the toner cartridge contact/separation sensor flag if damaged.

3. Poor contact in the toner cartridge contact/separation sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the toner cartridge contact/separation sensor,
developing rotary motor PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

4. Poor contact in toner cartridge motor drive connector

Reconnect the connectors between the toner cartridge motor, developing PCB, and DC con-
troller PCB correctly.

5. Defective toner cartridge contact/separation sensor

Action: Replace the toner cartridge contact/separation sensor.

6. Defective toner cartridge motor

Action: Replace the toner cartridge motor.

7. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB.

8. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-12. “A55 SERVICE CALL 010” Power supply unit malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Abnormal upper thermistor
Action: Turn the power switch OFF and remove the fixing unit. Measure the resistance
between the fixing unit connectors J82-10 (THRU) and J82-9 (GND). If it is not
between 430kΩ to 310kΩ (room temperature 25°C), check the wire between the fix-
ing unit connector J82 and the upper thermistor connector J86. If it is normal,
replace the upper thermistor.

2. Abnormal lower thermistor

Action: Turn the power switch OFF and remove the fixing unit. Measure the resistance
between the fixing unit connector J82-8 (THRL) and J82-7 (GND). If it is not
between 430kΩ to 310kΩ (room temperature 25°C), check the wire between the fix-
ing unit connector J82 and the lower thermistor connector J85. If it is normal,
replace the lower thermistor.

3. Defective power supply unit

Action: Replace the power supply unit.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 37
CHAPTER 4

VI-13. “A55 SERVICE CALL 021” Abnormal DC controller PCB memory (EEPROM mal-
function)

<Possible causes>
1. Defective DC controller PCB
Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-14. “A55 SERVICE CALL 024” Density sensor malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in density sensor connector
Action: Reconnect the connector J501 of the density sensor and the connector J1010 of the
DC controller PCB correctly.

2. Defective density sensor

Action: Replace the density sensor.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-15. “A55 SERVICE CALL 025” Abnormal printer communication (serial communication
malfunction)

<Possible causes>
1. Defective DC controller PCB
Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-16. “A55 SERVICE CALL 026” Abnormal DC controller PCB IC

<Possible causes>
1. Defective DC controller PCB
Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-17. “A55 SERVICE CALL 040” Waste toner sensor malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Waste toner detection window of the drum cartridge is dirty
Action: Take out the drum cartridge from the printer and clean the waste toner detection
window with dry-cloth.

2. Dirty waste toner sensor unit

Action: Clean the waste toner sensor unit in the printer with dry-cloth.

3. Defective light guide

Action: Clean the light guide with dry-cloth.

4. Poor contact in waste toner sensor unit connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the waste toner sensor unit and DC control PCB

4 - 38
 CHAPTER 4

correctly.

5. Defective waste toner sensor unit

Action: Replace the waste toner sensor unit.

6. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-18. “A55 SERVICE CALL 042” OHT detection sensor malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Reflecting mirror is dirty or damaged
Action: Clean the reflecting mirror with dry-cloth. Replace the registration guide if dam-
aged or worn.

2. Poor contact in the OHT detection sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the multi-purpose tray PCB and DC controller
PCB correctly.

3. Defective OHT detection sensor

Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-19. “A57 SERVICE CALL 03” Duplexing unit malfunction

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the SIDE REGISTRATION GUIDE HOME-POSITIONING SENSOR signal line
connector and the SIDE REGISTRATION MOTOR DRIVE signal line connector.
Action: Pull out the feed unit from the duplexing unit, then reconnect the side registration
guide home-positioning sensor connector and the joined connector correctly.

2. Damaged side registration guide home-positioning detection flag

Action: Replace the side registration guide if the flag is damaged.

3. Damaged side registration guide gears

Action: Replace any damaged side registration guide gear.

4. Poor contact in the duplexing driver PCB connector

Action: Reconnect the connector J3103 of the duplexing driver PCB connector correctly.

5. Poor contact in the duplexing unit power supply line connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the duplexing unit power supply unit and
duplexing driver PCB correctly.

6. Defective side registration guide home-positioning sensor

Action: Replace the side registration guide home-positioning sensor.

7. Defective duplexing unit power supply unit

4 - 39
CHAPTER 4

Action: Replace the duplexing unit power supply unit.

8. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

9. Defective side registration motor

Action: Replace the side registration motor.

10. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-20. “a60 SERVICE CALL”

“a61 SERVICE CALL”
“a63 SERVICE CALL”
“a68 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

VI-21. “a69 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective expansion interface PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the expansion
interface PCB.

2. Defective video controller PCB

Action: Replace the video controller PCB.

VI-22. “a75 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

2. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-23. “a77 SERVICE CALL”

“a92 SERVICE CALL”
“a93 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-

4 - 40
 CHAPTER 4

troller PCB.

VI-24. “b80 SERVICE CALL”

“b81 SERVICE CALL”
“b82 SERVICE CALL”
“b83 SERVICE CALL”
“b84 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.
2. Defective DC controller PCB
Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-25. “b85 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective DC controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the DC con-
troller PCB.

VI-26. “b86 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn the power OFF and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

VI-27. “b87 SERVICE CALL”

“b88 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Replace the video controller PCB.

VI-28. “d01 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective expansion RAM1
Action: Remove the expansion RAM installed in the expansion slot 1 on the video controller
PCB. Or, replace the expansion RAM.

4 - 41
CHAPTER 4

VI-29. “d02 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective expansion RAM2
Action: Remove the expansion RAM installed in the expansion slot 2 on the video controller
PCB. Or, replace the expansion RAM.

VI-30. “d31 - d34 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective NVRAM (EEPROM)
Action: Select "INITIALIZE MENU OK?" in the SETUP MENU to initialize the NVRAM (EEP-
ROM). If the problem persists, replace the NVRAM (EEPROM).

2. Defective video controller PCB

Action: Replace the video controller PCB.

VI-31. “Other dxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”

“eXX (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“fXX (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

VI-32. “g01 SERVICE CALL”

“gB0 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective expansion interface PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the expansion
interface PCB.

VI-33. “g10 SERVICE CALL ”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

VI-34. “h10 SERVICE CALL”

“h1F SERVICE CALL”
“h22 SERVICE CALL”
“h28 SERVICE CALL”
“h29 SERVICE CALL”
“h2A SERVICE CALL”

4 - 42
 CHAPTER 4

“h2F SERVICE CALL”

“h30 SERVICE CALL”
“h31 SERVICE CALL”
“h34 - h37 SERVICE CALL”
“h3F SERVICE CALL”
“h48 - h54 SERVICE CALL”
“h5F SERVICE CALL”
“h68 - h74 SERVICE CALL”
“Other dxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

VI-35. “h20 SERVICE CALL”

“h21 SERVICE CALL”
“h33 SERVICE CALL”
“h41 SERVICE CALL”
“h61 SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective built-in DRAM or expansion RAM
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, press the RESET key
for five seconds or more to perform a "03 HARD RESET".

VI-36. “ixx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

VI-37. “ixx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”

“kxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“lxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“mxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“nxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“pxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“qxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“rxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”
“sxx (xx indicates number) SERVICE CALL”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective video controller PCB
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the video con-
troller PCB.

4 - 43
CHAPTER 4

VI-38. “zxx (xx indicates number) CYCLE POWER”

<Possible causes>
1. Defective control panel
Action: Turn OFF the power and ON again. If the problem persists, replace the control
panel.

2. Defective video controller PCB

Action: Replace the video controller PCB.

VI-39. “11 NOPAPER” message appears when the paper is set to specified paper source

<Possible causes>
1. If the specified paper source is the multi-purpose tray, go to step 10. If the specified paper
source is paper feeder, go to step 14.

2. Damaged cassette paper detection lever

Action: Replace the lever.

3. Damaged cassette paper size detection lever

Action: Replace the cassette.

4. Poor contact in the cassette paper sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the cassette paper sensor, feed PCB, and DC
controller PCB correctly.

5. Poor contact in the cassette paper size detection PCB connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the cassette paper size detection PCB, feed PCB,
and DC controller PCB correctly.

6. Defective cassette paper sensor

Action: Replace the cassette paper sensor.

7. Defective cassette paper size detection switch

Action: Replace the cassette paper size sensor PCB.

8. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

9. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

10. Multi-purpose tray paper sensor lever or spring is damaged/deformed or out of position.
Action: Replace it if the sensor lever or the spring is damaged/deformed. Re-set it in the
right position if the sensor lever or the spring is out of position.

11. Poor contact in the multi-purpose tray paper sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the multi-purpose tray paper sensor, multi-pur-
pose tray PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

12. Defective multi-purpose tray PCB

4 - 44
 CHAPTER 4

Action:Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

13. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

14. Damaged cassette paper detection lever

Action: Replace the lever.

15. Damaged cassette paper detection lever

Action: Replace the cassette.

16. Poor contact of the cassette paper sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connector J110 on the cassette paper sensor and the connector
J3002 on the paper feeder PCB.

17. Defective cassette paper sensor

Action: Replace the cassette paper sensor.

18. Defective paper feeder PCB

Action: Replace the paper feeder PCB.

19. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-40. “12 PRINTER OPEN DRUM COVER A” message appears when the drum cartridge
drawer is closed

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged drum cartridge drawer switch actuator
Action: Replace the drum cartridge drawer sensor actuator if damaged.

2. Poor contact in the drum cartridge drawer switch connector

Action: Reconnect the connector J72 on the drum cartridge drawer switch and the connec-
tor J1003 on the DC controller PCB.

3. Defective drum cartridge drawer switch

Action: Replace the drum cartridge drawer switch.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-41. “12 PRINTER OPEN ITB COVER B” message appears when the ITB unit drawer is
closed

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged ITB unit drawer switch actuator
Action: Replace the ITB unit drawer switch unit if the ITB unit drawer switch actuator is
damaged.

2. Poor contact in the ITB unit drawer switch connector

4 - 45
CHAPTER 4

Action: Reconnect the connector J78 on the ITB unit drawer switch and the connector
J1003 on the DC controller PCB correctly.

3. Defective ITB unit drawer switch

Action: Replace the ITB unit drawer switch unit.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-42. “12 PRINTER OPEN DUPLEX TRAY D” message appears when the duplex feed unit
is closed

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the connectors
Action: Reconnect the duplex feed unit connector J82, the duplexing unit connector J84,
and the duplexing driver PCB connector J3103 correctly. Replace the cable if bro-
ken.

2. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

VI-43. “12 PRINTER OPEN TONER COVER F” message appears when the toner cartridge
door is closed

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged toner cartridge door switch actuator
Action: Replace the toner cartridge door switch unit if the toner cartridge door switch actu-
ator is damaged.

2. Poor contact in the toner cartridge door switch connector

Action: Reconnect the connector J71 on the toner cartridge door switch and the connector
J1003 on the DC controller PCB.

3. Defective toner cartridge door switch

Action: Replace the toner cartridge door switch unit.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-44. “12 PRINTER OPEN REAR COVER” message appears when the rear cover is closed

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged rear door switch actuator
Action: Replace the door switch unit, if the rear door switch actuator is damaged.

2. Damaged rear door switch push arm

Action: Replace the door switch unit, if the rear door switch push arm is damaged.

3. Damaged front door switch actuator

4 - 46
 CHAPTER 4

Action: Replace the drawer switch unit, if the front door switch actuator is damaged.

4. Damaged front door switch push arm

Action: Replace the drawer switch unit, if the front door switch push arm is damaged,
replace the drawer switch unit.

5. Defective rear door switch

Action: Remove the rear door switch (SW5). If there is no continuity between the rear door
switch connectors J74-1 and J74-2 when the rear door switch is turned ON, replace
the door switch unit.

6. Defective front door switch

Action: Remove the front door switch (SW4). If there is no continuity between the front door
switch connectors J73-1 and J73-2 when the front door switch is turned ON,
replace the door switch unit.

7. Poor contact in the 24VA supply line connector

Action: Reconnect the front door switch connector J73, rear door switch connector J74,
power supply connector J3, and DC controller PCB connector J1013 correctly.

8. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-45. “13 PAPER JAM ITB COVER B” message appears when the paper jam has not
occurred

<Possible causes>
1. Registration paper sensor lever does not move smoothly, or is damaged.
Action: Adjust the lever to move smoothly. Replace it if damaged.

2. Poor contact in the registration paper sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the registration paper sensor, multi-purpose tray
PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

3. Defective registration paper sensor

Action: Replace the registration paper sensor.

4. Defective multi-purpose tray PCB

Action: Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 47
CHAPTER 4

VI-46. “13 PAPER JAM CASSETTE1 C” message appears when the paper jam has not
occurred
VI-47. “13 PAPER JAM CASSETTE2 E” message appears when the paper jam has not
occurred

<Possible causes>
1. Registration paper sensor lever does not move smoothly, or is damaged.
Action: Adjust the lever to move smoothly. Replace it if damaged.

2. Poor contact in the registration paper sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the registration paper sensor, multi-purpose tray
PCB, and DC controller PCB correctly.

3. Defective registration paper sensor

Action: Replace the registration paper sensor.

4. Defective multi-purpose tray PCB

Action: Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-48. “13 PAPER JAM DUPLEX TRAY D” message appears when the paper jam has not
occurred

<Possible causes>
1. Duplex paper sensor lever does not move smoothly or is damaged.
Action: Adjust the lever so that it move smoothly. Replace it if damaged.

2. Poor contact in the duplex peper sensor connectors

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the duplex peper sensor and duplexing driver
PCB correctly.

3. Defective duplex peper sensor

Action: Replace the duplex peper sensor.

4. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-49. “13 PAPER JAM DUPLEX UNIT G” message appears when the paper jam has not
occurred

<Possible causes>
1. Reversing unit paper sensor lever and reversing unit stationary paper sensor lever do not
move smoothly or are damaged.
Action: Adjust the levers so that they move smoothly. Replace them if damaged.

4 - 48
 CHAPTER 4

2. Poor contact in the reversing unit paper sensor and reversing unit stationary paper sensor
connectors
Action: Reconnect the connector J87 on the reversing paper sensor, connector J89 on the
reversing stationary paper sensor, and the connector J3106 and J3107 on the
duplexing driver PCB correctly.

3. Defective reversing unit paper sensor

Action: Replace the reversing unit paper sensor.

4. Reversing unit stationary paper sensor

Action: Replace the reversing unit stationary paper sensor.

5. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

6. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-50. “13 PAPER JAM REAR COVER” message appears when the paper jam has not
occurred

<Possible causes>
1. The delivery paper sensor lever does not move smoothly, or is damaged or out of position
Action: Adjust the lever to move smoothly. Set the sprig if out of position, or replace it if
damaged.

2. Poor contact in the delivery paper sensor connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the delivery paper sensor, feed PCB, and DC con-
troller PCB correctly.

3. Defective delivery paper sensor

Action: Replace the delivery paper sensor.

4. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-51. “14 NO X CART” message appears when the toner cartridge is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Defective toner level sensor light receiver
Action: Replace the toner level sensor light receiver.

2. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 49
CHAPTER 4

VI-52. “16 X TONER LOW” or “1G X TONER EMPTY” message appears when the new toner
cartridge is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Defective DC controller PCB
Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-53. “18 NO CASSETTE1” message appears when the cassette is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged cassette paper size detection lever
Action: Replace the cassette.

2. Poor contact in the connectors on the cassette paper size detection PCB
Action: Reconnect the connectors between the cassette paper size detection PCB, feed PCB,
and DC controller PCB.

3. Defective cassette paper size detection switch

Action: Replace the cassette paper size detection PCB.

4. Defective feed PCB

Action: Replace the feed PCB.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-54. “1F CHECK FD TRAY” appears when there is no paper on the face-down tray

<Possible causes>
1. The face-down tray paper full sensor lever is deformed or out of position
Action: Replace the face-down tray paper full sensor lever if deformed. Or, set the sensor
lever if out of position.

2. Defective face-down tray paper full sensor

Action: Replace the face-down tray paper full sensor.

3. Poor contact in the connectors of the face-down tray paper full sensor
Action: Reconnect the connectors on the face-down tray paper full sensor, developing PCB,
and DC controller PCB.

4. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller.

VI-55. “96 CHECK FU TRAY” appears when the face- up tray is closed

<Possible causes>
1. The face-up sensor lever is deformed or out of position
Action: Replace the face- up sensor lever or spring if damaged or deformed. Or, set the
spring if out of position.

4 - 50
 CHAPTER 4

2. Poor contact in the connectors on the face- up sensor

Action: Reconnect the connector J88 on the face-up sensor and the connector J3106 on the
duplexing driver PCB.

3. Defective face-up sensor

Action: Replace the face-up sensor.

4. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

5. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller.

VI-56. “98 CHECK DRUM” message appears when actual expected life of the drum car-
tridge has not completed yet.

<Possible causes>
1. Defective drum cartridge memory
Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

2. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-57. “99 CHECK ITB” message appears when normal ITB unit is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Damaged drum drive unit gears
Action: Check the drive gears in the drum drive unit which transmit ITB unit drive motion.
Replace any damaged or worn part.

2. Poor contact in the ITB unit connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the ITB unit, multi-purpose tray PCB, and DC
controller PCB correctly.

3. Poor contact in the drum motor drive connector

Action: Reconnect the connectors between the drum motor, developing PCB, and DC con-
troller PCB.

4. Defective drum motor

Action: Replace the drum motor.

5. Defective developing PCB

Action: Replace the developing PCB.

6. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

4 - 51
CHAPTER 4

VI-58. “9B MEDIA TYPE ERR” message appears when a specified OHT is loaded on the
multi-purpose tray in the OHT mode

<Possible causes>
1. Dirt on the reflecting mirrors
Action: Check the reflecting mirrors (right and left). Clean the reflecting mirrors with dry
cloth if dirty.

2. Defective OHT sensor

Action: Replace the registration frame unit (include the multi-purpose tray PCB).

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-59. “E2 CHECK DRUM” message appears when the drum cartridge is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the drum cartridge memory connector
Action: Reconnect the connectors J60 and J61 on the drum cartridge drawer and the con-
nector J1004 on the DC controller PCB correctly.

2. Defective drum cartridge memory

Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-60. “E8 NO FIX.UNIT” message appears when the fixing unit is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the fixing unit connector
Action: Reconnect the fixing unit connector correctly.

2. Poor contact in the DC controller PCB connector

Action: Reconnect the connector J82 on the fixing unit and the connector J1011 on the DC
controller PCB.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-61. “EG DRUM ERROR” message appears when normal drum cartridge is installed

<Possible causes>
1. Poor contact in the drum cartridge memory connector
Action: Reconnect the drum cartridge drawer connectors J60 and J61 and the DC con-
troller PCB connector J1004.

2. Defective drum cartridge memory

Action: Replace the drum cartridge.

4 - 52
 CHAPTER 4

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller PCB.

VI-62. “OF OPTION ERROR”appears when the printer is installed on the duplexing unit
properly.

<Possible causes>
1. Defective connectors in the duplexing unit and the printer
Action: Check the connectors in the duplexing unit and the printer. Replace any abnormal
connector.

2. Defective duplexing driver PCB

Action: Replace the duplexing driver PCB.

3. Defective DC controller PCB

Action: Replace the DC controller.

4 - 53
CHAPTER 4

VII. MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Mechanical Adjustment
1. Checking the nip width of the lower fixing roller
The fixing unit in the printer is not designed to allow adjustment of the pressure (nip width);
however, the incorrect nip width can cause fixing problems. If the nip width is not within the
specification, replace the fixing unit.
Follow the procedures below and check the nip width.
1) Make an all-black print of A4 size using a 83X toner cartridge, and take the print to the cus-
tomer’s site. (Output all black print by operating external device.)
2) Place the all-black print in the cassette of the printer with the printed side facing down.
3) Select the face-up delivery.
4) Press the test print switch.
5) When the leading edge of the print emerges at the face-up tray, turn OFF the printer and
wait for about 10 seconds. Then, turn the power switch ON again. Allow the print to be
completely delivered from the printer.
6) Measure the width of the glossy band across the paper and check that it meets the require-
ments as shown in Figure 4-7-1:
• Center (a): 9.2±1mm
• Difference between right/left and center (b-a, c-a): between 0mm and 1.5mm
• Difference between right and left side (b-c): 1.0mm or less

15mm
c

Feed direction Center of the paper

a

b
15mm

Figure 4-7-1

4 - 54
 CHAPTER 4

B. Electrical Adjustment
1. Replacement of DC controller PCB
Various data are written into the EEPROM on the DC controller PCB. When replacing the DC
controller PCB, it is necessary to write the data held on the video controller into the new DC
controller PCB for back up.
Use the service mode to write the backup data of the video controller PCB into the DC con-
troller PCB EEPROM. Refer to “IX. SERVICE MODE” in this chapter for the service mode.

Note: Be sure to conduct the above operation when replacing the DC controller PCB as a fail-
ure to do so causes troubles.

4 - 55
CHAPTER 4

1. Replacement of fixing unit

The video controller has a life counter for the fixing unit that stores the life data of the fixing
unit.
When replacing the fixing unit, the life counter must be cleared. Otherwise, the printer will
indicate an "E5. FIX.UNIT WARN" message that requires fixing unit replacement.
Follow the procedure below to clear the life data of the fixing unit.
1) Turn the printer OFF-line. Press the v key while pressing the Form Feed key. Press UTILI-
TY MENU.
2) Press the < or > key until "FIXING COUNT INIT" is posted, and then press the v key.
3) Confirm that the status display is indicating "FIXING COUNT INIT OK?", and press the v
key.
Make sure to output a test print D (Note) after performing the above procedure in order to
confirm that the fixing unit counter value is "000000" (indicated where A points out in the
figure).

4 - 56
 CHAPTER 4

TEST PRINT D

PAGE COUNT:003358 PAPERLIFTTIME:7 T2 BIAS GLS FILM:7

YELLOWTOP:7 T1BIAS:7 T2 BIAS OHTFULL:7
CYANTOP:7 ICLBIAS:7 T2 BIAS OHTSNGL:7
MAGENTATOP:7 T2 BIAS SINGLE:7 PAGE COUNT(FIXER): 000000
MPTRAYALIGN:7 T2 BIAS DUPLEX:7
CASS/DUPALIGN:7 T2 BIAS GLOSSY:

A
Figure 4-7-2

Note: To output a test print D, turn the printer OFF-line and press the v key while pressing
the Form Feed key on the control panel, and then press UTILITY MENU. Press the < or
> key until "TEST PRINT D" is indicated on the display, and press the v key.

4 - 57
CHAPTER 4

C. Variable resistors (VR), Test Pins, Jumpers, and Switches on PCBs

Only the variable resistors, LEDs, test pins, jumpers, and switches required for after-sales
service in the field are listed below.
All other variable resistors, test pins, etc. are for the factory use only. The adjustment
and check using these require special tools, measuring instruments and high precision. Do
not touch them in the field.

Variable resistors which may be adjusted in after-sales service are marked

Variable resistors which may not be adjusted in after-sales service are marked

1. DC controller PCB

15 J1015 14 J1016 1 2 32
B1 J1014 B13 1 J1001 31
B2 B12
J1005 A13 J1022 A1
A12 A2
5

SW1001
3 1
J1013

3 1

8
IC205

J1002
IC206
A1
B12

A2
B12

IC202
J1019

IC201

13
A1 A11
B2

A12
B1

15

J1012
B11

A2
B10

IC203
J1017

J1018
A10

6
B2
A11
B1

J1003

2 J1021 6
IC204 1 7
J1006

2 14
1 J1010 15 2425
5

07
J1009

0
J1
J1011
7

8
J1020 2 J1008 3 J1004
4 1 9

Figure 4-7-3

4 - 58
 CHAPTER 4

Table 4-7-1

SW No. Function

SW1001 Test print switch

Table 4-7-2

VR No. Function
CP102
CP103 For factory use only
CP104

4 - 59
CHAPTER 4

2. High-voltage PCB

J1901
J1201
J1902

J1601

J1301 J1320
A12 A1
1 12 VR1301
J1305
B1 B12

12 J1306 1

VR1751
1
J1307
12

J1401 J1501

Figure 4-7-4

Table 4-7-3

VR No. Function

VR1301
For factory use only
VR1751

4 - 60
 CHAPTER 4

3. Density detection PCB

15
VR501 VR502

J501
1
Figure 4-7-5

Table 4-7-4

VR No. Function

VR501
For factory use only
VR502

4. Cassette paper size PCB

SW1201 SW1202 SW1203

J1201

Figure 4-7-6

Table 4-7-5

SW No. Function
SW1201
Switches for detectiong
SW1202 cassette paper size
SW1203

4 - 61
CHAPTER 4

5. Duplex driver PCB

J3110 J3109 1 2 1 5 1 6 1 5 J3105

J3108 J3107 J3106

4
J3104

13
CP3102
CP3101

CP3103

J3103
1 J3111 J3102

1
J3101
3
6 1
1
14

Figure 4-7-7

Table 4-7-6

VR No. Function
CP3101
CP3102 For factory use only
CP3103

4 - 62
 CHAPTER 4

6. Paper feeder PCB

J3001
J3003 J3002

SW3001

SW3002

SW3003

Figure 4-7-8

Table 4-7-7

SW No. Function
SW3001
Switches for detectiong
SW3002
cassette paper size
SW3003

4 - 63
CHAPTER 4

VIII. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

A. Periodic Replacement Parts
There are no parts which require periodic replacement in this printer.

Note: Periodic replacement parts in here indicates the parts that must be replaced at regular
intervals, even if they are functioning properly and show no signs of wear. (Failure of
these parts can seriously affect the performance.) These parts should be replaced dur-
ing a regular service visit closest to the end of the parts expected life.

B. Expected Service Life of Consumable Parts

Consumable parts are expected to require replacement one or more times during the warranty
period of the printer, due to deterioration or damage. Replace them when the parts are proven
faulty.

Table 4-8-1

♦Printer As of May, 2000

No. Part name Part No. Qt’y Expected life Remarks

1 Fixing unit RG5-5155-020 1 100,000 pages 220-240V

2 ITB unit RG5-5173-030 1 100,000 images
3 Secondary transfer roller RF5-2112-000 1 100,000 pages
4 Feed roller RF5-2092-020 1 100,000 sheets Replace the feed roller and
the separation roller at the
5 Separation roller RF5-1885-000 1 100,000 sheets same time.
6 92-fan RH7-1435-000 1 25,000 hours
7 60-fan RH7-1407-000 1 25,000 hours
8 40-fan RH7-1436-000 1 25,000 hours
9 92-fan air filter RB2-1282-030 1 100,000 images
10 60-fan air filter RB2-1283-000 1 100,000 images

♦Paper feeder (option) As of May, 2000

No. Part name Part No. Qt’y Expected life Remarks

1 Feed roller RF5-2490-000 1 100,000 sheets Replace the feed roller and
the separation roller at the
2 Separation roller RF5-2490-000 2 100,000 sheets same time.

4 - 64
 CHAPTER 4

Notes: 1. The above values are only estimates and are subject to change in the future.
2. The unit of expected life of each system is as follows.
• Image formation system:image
• Feed system:page
• Pick-up system:sheet
• Fans:hour
3. Two pages are counted as one sheet in case of duplexing.
4. Mono-color (single color) print is counted as one image, and full-color (four color)
print is counted as four images.

C. Periodic Service
There are no parts which require periodic service in the printer.

D. Cleaning during a service visit

Following the procedures below, clean the printer during a service visit.

1. Printer
a. ITB unit
Intermediate transfer belt
As a general rule, the intermediate transfer belt is not to be touched or cleaned. However, if
it is unavoidable, follow the following procedure to clean the belt.
1) Rotate the belt feed roller with hand to rotate the intermediate transfer belt.
2) Clean the belt surface with dry flannel cloth.

Note: Do not use solvent as it will damage the intermediate transfer belt. If the dirt cannot be
removed with dry flannel cloth, apply water to the cloth.

ITB cleaning roller

As a general rule, the ITB cleaning roller is not to be touched or cleaned. Also, make sure
not to apply solvent. If it is unavoidable to clean the roller, wipe the roller surface with dry
flannel cloth.

b. Multi-purpose tray pick-up roller, cassette pick-up roller, cassette feed roller, feed
roller, and separation roller
Clean with lint-free paper, either dry or moistened with ethyl/isopropyl alcohol.

c. Separation pad
Clean with lint-free paper.

d. Registration roller unit

Clean with lint-free paper. If badly contaminated, use it with ethyl/isopropyl alcohol for tube.
Use methyl ethyl ketone for the other parts.
Be sure not to remove the spring when cleaning since it can cause a paper jam or skew. If
it is out of position, re-set it correctly.

e. Transfer guide unit

Clean with soft, dry flannel cloth.

f. Secondary transfer roller

Clean the roller only when it is exceedingly dirty. Be sure not to contaminate the roller with
solvent or oil. Do not use water or solvent to clean it.
Refer to chapter 3 for the details.

4 - 65
CHAPTER 4

g. Feed belt
Clean with lint-free paper.

h. Fixing unit
Fixing unit entrance guide
Clean with MEK.

Upper/lower fixing separation guides

Clean lightly with MEK only to remove the toner on the guides.

i. Density sensor unit

Clean the detection window with the attached brush.
See Chapter 1 “VI. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE BY THE CUSTOMER” for the details.

j. Toner tray
Clean with squeezed wet cloth.

4 - 66
 CHAPTER 4

1 2 3

19 4
5
18

7
8

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

1: Photosensitive drum 11: Transfer guide

2: Density sensor unit 12: Secondary transfer roller
3: ITB unit 13: Static charge eliminator
4: Multi-purpose tray paper pick-up roller 14: ITB cleaning roller
5: Separation pad 15: Feed belt
6: Feed roller 16: Toner tray
7: Cassette feed roller 17: Fixing entrance guide
8: Separation roller 18: Fixing lower separation guide
9: Registration roller unit 19: Fixing upper separation guide
10: Cassette paper pick-up roller

Figure 4-8-1

4 - 67
CHAPTER 4

2. Paper feeder (option)

a. Pick-up roller, feed roller, and separation roller
Clean with lint-free paper, either dry or moistened with ethyl/isopropyl alcohol.

1 2

Figure 4-8-2

1: Pick-up roller
2: Paper feeder cassette feed roller
3: Separation pad

4 - 68
 CHAPTER 4

E. Standard Tools
The following table lists the standard tools required for servicing this printer.

Table 4-8-2

No. Tool name Tool No. Remark

1 Tool case TKN-0001

2 Jumper wire TKN-0069 With a clip
3 Clearance gauge CK-0057 0.02 to 0.3mm
4 Compression spring scale CK-0058 0 to 600 g for checking the cassette
spring pressure
5 Phillips screwdriver CK-0101 M4, M5 Length : 363mm
6 Phillips screwdriver CK-0104 M3, M4 Length : 155mm
7 Phillips screwdriver CK-0105 M4, M5 Length : 191mm
8 Phillips screwdriver CK-0106 M4, M5 Length : 85mm
9 Flat-blade screwdriver CK-0111
10 Precision flat-blade screwdriver set CK-0114 6-piece set
11 Allen wrench set CK-0151 5-piece set
12 File, fine CK-0161
13 Allen (hex) screwdriver CK-0170 M4 Length : 107mm
14 Diagonal cutting pliers CK-0201
15 Needle-nose pliers CK-0202
16 Pliers CK-0203
17 Retaining ring pliers CK-0205 Applied to the axis ring
18 Crimper CK-0218
19 Tweezers CK-0302
20 Ruler CK-0303 Employed to measure 150mm
21 Soldering iron CK-0309 100V, 30W
22 Mallet, plastic head CK-0314
23 Brush CK-0315
24 Penlight CK-0327
25 Plastic bottle CK-0328 100cc
26 Solder CK-0329 Ø1.5(mm) X 1(mm)
27 Desoldering wick CK-0330 1.5mm
28 Lint-free paper CK-0336 500SH/PKG
29 Oiler CK-0349 30cc
30 Plastic jar CK-0351 30cc
31 Digital multi-measure FY9-2032

4 - 69
CHAPTER 4

F. Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools, the following special tools are required for servicing the print-
er.

Table 4-8-3

No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank Use/Remarks

1 Contact extraction RY9-0099 A Used for removing the
tool upper/lower heater contacts
of the fixing unit.

Note: Ranks
A: Tools used for part replacements or adjustment on-site.
B: Tools used on-site and in regions.
This category includes tools useful for failure analysis, and those are difficult to carry
around.
C: Tools used in the workshop.
This category mainly includes tools for PCB and unit repairs.

4 - 70
 CHAPTER 4

G. List of lubricants & cleaners

Table 4-8-4

No. Name Components Use Remarks

1 Alcohol: ethyl C2H5OH, Cleaning: plastic, • Purchase locally
(pure or (CH3)2CHOH rubber, external parts • Flammable: keep away
denatured) or from flame
isopropyl (pure
or denatured)
2 MEK (methyl CH3CO-C2H5 Cleaning: metal, oil ,and • Purchase locally
ethyl ketone) toner stains • Highly flammable: keep
away from flame
3 Lubricating oil Petroleum mineral oil Apply between gear • Tool No. CK-8003
and shaft (100 ml bottle)
4 Lubricant Special oil Apply to drive • Tool No. HY9-0007
Special solid lubricating mechanism (20g tube)
material
Lithium soap

4 - 71
CHAPTER 4

IX. SERVICE MODE

A. Outline
The service mode checks the condition of the printer for servicing by operating the printer inde-
pendently.
To enter the service mode, press the On Line and Form Feed keys when turning ON the
power. When the printer enters the service mode, the status display will post "SERVICE MODE".
When in the service mode, the printer is offline, thus does not enter a ready state.
The service mode is canceled by turning the power OFF. Therefore, to return to the normal
mode from the service mode, turn OFF the printer and ON again.
The service mode consists of the following seven sub modes.

1. Sensor Monitor mode

Checks the condition of the sensors in the printer.

2. Test mode
Performs four types of operation tests.

3. Fixing Unit Cleaning mode

Cleans the upper/lower fixing rollers

4. Memory Read mode (DC controller)

The adjust-values stored in the EEPROM (NVRAM) on the DC controller PCB are read into the
RAM.

5. Memory Read mode (Video controller)

The adjust-values stored in the EEPROM (NVRAM) on the video controller PCB are read into the
RAM.

6. Memory Write mode

The adjust-values read into the RAM on the video controller are written into the video controller
EEPROM and DC controller EEPROM at once.

Figure 4-9-2 shows the operation procedures of the Service Mode.

See Table 4-9-1 for the list of Service mode menus.

4 - 72
 CHAPTER 4

Note: 1. Do NOT unplug the power code while in the service mode. Be sure that cancel the
service mode by turning the power OFF. However do not turn OFF the power while
performing the test mode, memory read mode, and memory write mode.
2. When the power is turned ON in the normal mode, the adjust-data stored in the DC
controller EEPROM are automatically written into the video controller EEPROM.
After installing a new DC controller in the printer, turning ON the power in the nor-
mal mode will causes the adjust-data stored in the video controller to be erased.
Therefore, after replacing the DC controller, be sure to turn ON the power in the serv-
ice mode, read the adjust-data backed up in the video controller EEPROM into the
RAM, and write them into the DC controller EEPROM in the memory write mode.
Note that the printer has a protective function that prevents the video controller from
writing into the DC controller EEPROM, when a new DC controller (the cumulative
delivered paper value is 0) is installed.

4 - 73
CHAPTER 4

• Power-ON in the normal mode

Video controller PCB DC controller PCB

RAM
Writes
EEPROM
EEPROM
If the Cumulative Delivered
Backs up Paper value is 1 or more.

Video controller PCB DC controller PCB

RAM Does not write

EEPROM
EEPROM
If the Cumulative Delivered
Paper value is 0.

• Power-ON in the Service mode

Video controller PCB DC controller PCB

Writes back-up data

RAM
EEPROM

EEPROM
Read back-up data

Figure 4-9-1

4 - 74
 CHAPTER 4

POWER ON Press On Line and Form Feed.

key key
SERVICE MODE MONITORING
MONITOR SENSOR1 INFO 1 : XX YY ZZ
key key
key
key
SERVICE MODE MONITORING
MONITOR SENSOR 4 INFO 4 : XX YY ZZ

key key key

key key key

SERVICE MODE TEST ENGINE TEST ENGINE
TEST ENGINE TEST DEVLP UNIT TEST FEED UNIT
key key key key
key key key
Returns after completion Returns after completion
of testing. of testing.
key
TEST ENGINE TEST ENGINE
TEST DPLX UNIT TEST ITB&DRM

key key key

Returns after completion Returns after completion
of testing. of testing.
key
SERVICE MODE Returns after completion of the fixing cleaning mode.
FUSER CLEANING
key key

key
SERVICE MODE
READ ENG NVRAM Returns after completion of reading.

key key

key
SERVICE MODE
READ VDO NVRAM Returns after completion of reading.

key key

key
SERVICE MODE PAGE COUNT
PAGE COUNT =000001 Changes the setting values with and keys.
key
key key
key
SERVICE MODE T2 BIAS OHT SNGL Changes the setting values with and keys.
T2 BIAS OHT SNGL =7
key
key key

key
SERVICE MODE
Returns after completion of writing.
WRITE ENG NVRAM
key

Figure 4-9-2

4 - 75
CHAPTER 4

Table 4-9-1

♦ SERVICE MODE menu list

Mode menu messages Mode values Remarks
Sensor monitor MONITOR SENSOR MONITOR SENSOR1-4 Monitors condition of sensors.

TEST DEVLP UNIT The developing rotary and color toner cartridges
rotate for a specified period of time.
TEST TEST FEED UNIT Pick-up/feed/fixing/delivery -related loads
Test rotate for a specified period of time.
TEST ITB&DRM The ITB and photosensitive drum rotate for
a specified period of time.
TEST DPLX UNIT Duplexing unit reverse/feed-related loads
rotate for a specified period of time.
Fuser cleaning FUSER CLEANING Cleaning of upper/lower fixing rollers.
Memory read READ ENG NVRAM Reads the adjust-values stored in the DC
(DC controller ) controller EEPROM into the RAM.
Memory read READ VDO NVRAM Reads the adjust-values stored in the video
(Video controller ) controller EEPROM into the RAM.
Page count PAGE COUNT 1* to 999999 Sets number of cumulative delivered paper.
Y top registration YELLOW TOP 0 to 15 (7*) Sets top registration value (Y).
C top registration CYAN TOP 0 to 15 (7*) Sets top registration value (C).
M top registration MAGENTA TOP 0 to 15 (7*) Sets top registration value (M).
Multi-purpose tray side MP TRAY ALIGN 0 to 15 (7*) Sets the side registration for multi-purpose
registration tray pick-up.
Cassette side registration CASS/DUP ALIGN 0 to 15 (7*) Sets the side registration for cassettepick-up.
Pick-up timing PAPER LIFT TIME 0 to 15 (7*) Adjust registration paper pick up timing.
Primary transfer-related T1 BIAS 0 to 15 (7*) Sets primary transfer bias value.
adjust-value
ICL-related adjust-value ICL BIAS 0 to 15 (7*) Sets ITB cleaning bias value.
Secondary transfer T2 BIAS SINGLE 0 to 15 (7*) Sets secondary transfer bias value for simplex
simplex-related adjust-value printing.
Secondary transfer duplex- T2 BIAS DUPLEX 0 to 15 (7*) Sets secondary transfer bias value for duplex
related adjust-value printing.
Secondary transfer gloss T2 BIAS GLOSSY 0 to 15 (7*) Sets secondary transfer bias value for gloss
paper-related adjust-value paper printing.
Secondary transfer gloss T2 BIAS GLS FILM 0 to 15 (7*) Sets secondary transfer bias value for gloss
film-related adjust-value film printing.
Secondary transfer OHT full T2 BIAS OHT FULL 0 to 15 (7*) Sets secondary transfer bias value for OHT
color-related value full-color printing.
Secondary transfer OHT- T2 BIAS OHT SNGL 0 to 15 (7*) Sets secondary transfer bias value for OHT
mono color-related adjust- mono-color printing.
value
Memory write WRITE ENG NVRAM Write the back up adjust-values stored in the
video controller RAM into the DC controller
EEPROM and the video controller EEPROM.

4 - 76
 CHAPTER 4

B. Mode description

1. Sensor Monitor mode

This mode allows you to check the conditions of the sensors in the printer. The sensors can be
turned ON manually and the results are displayed on the control panel.

a. Sensor Monitor mode operation procedures

1) In the Service mode, press the MENU key to display “MONITOR SENSORS” in the message
area, and then press the ENTER key.
2) Confirm that “MONITORING” appears in the top line of the message area.
3) Monitor results are displayed in the second line of the message area. By pressing the Λ and
V keys, the display changes to INFO1, 2, 3, and 4.
Messages displayed in the message area are explained in Figure 4-9-3.
4) Turn ON the sensor you wish to check manually, and the monitor result will be displayed in
the second line of the message area.

M O N I T O R I N G

I N F O 1 : X X Y Y Z Z

1 2 3 4

1 INFO1 to 4: Status group (See Table 4-9-2)

2 XX: Not used
3 YY: Hexadecimal notation of status B (See Table 4-9-2)
4 ZZ: Hexadecimal notation of status C (See Table 4-9-2)

Figure 4-9-3

Note: The status of each sensor is checked at a one-second interval and updated into the mes-
sage area.
Also, the status of each sensor is indicated with the hexadecimal notation, as the status
display indicates the status using the video interface signal.

4 - 77
CHAPTER 4

Table 4-9-2
Bits and their signal names
Info1 Info2
Signal name Signal name
YY ZZ YY ZZ
1st bit 0 0 1st bit 0 0
2nd bit 0 FXTYP 2nd bit /60FANRDY DOPN
3rd bit /PRNT ACTYP 3rd bit /90FANRDY ITBOPN
4th bit /SDM unknown 4th bit /OPPSET DDOPN
5th bit /DTOP VLEVEL 5th bit /OPPSIZE2 PDOPN
6th bit unknown PSWOFF 6th bit /OPPSIZE1 DRMSET
7th bit unknown /FXPRS 7th bit /OPPSIZE0 /FXSET
8th bit Odd Parity Odd Parity 8th bit Odd Parity Odd Parity

Info3 Info4
Signal name Signal name
YY ZZ YY ZZ
1st bit 0 0 1st bit 0 0
2nd bit DEVCAM OPSET 2nd bit unknown unknown
3rd bit /ITBHP unknown 3rd bit PWRSNS unknown
4th bit POSNS unknown 4th bit unknown unknown
5th bit ROTHP unknown 5th bit unknown unknown
6th bit unknown STFULL 6th bit unknown unknown
7th bit /REGSNS /ITBW 7th bit unknown unknown
8th bit Odd Parity Odd Parity 8th bit Odd Parity Odd Parity

Bits and their corresponding codes

Code Units
1st bit 8
2nd bit 4
10
3rd bit 2
4th bit 1
5th bit 8
6th bit 4
7th bit 2 1
8th bit 1

4 - 78
 CHAPTER 4

2. Test mode
The Test mode allows you to check the loads (motors, clutches) in the printer and options. It
performs the following four tests.

• Developing area test:

The developing rotary and cylinder in the color toner cartridges rotate for a specified period
of time.

• Feeding area test:

The pick-up motor, fixing motor and clutches in the pick-up/feeding area are driven for a
specified period of time.

• ITB/drum unit test:

The ITB and photosensitive drum rotate for a specified period of time.

• Duplexing unit test:

The side registration motor, reversing motor and duplexing pick-up motor rotate for a spec-
ified period of time.

In this mode, the loads are checked visually. Therefore, remove the external covers (top cover,
right cover, left cover, etc.) before executing this mode.

Note: 1. When the external covers are removed, keep the door switches ON.
2. When checking the engine operation with the external covers removed, be sure not
to put your head and hands in the printer.
3. This mode does not indicate error messages. If there is a failure in the printer, these
tests cannot be canceled. When canceling the tests forcibly, press the Λ key.
4. Do not execute the next test mode until the engine operation is complete.

a. Developing area test operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key on the control panel. After "TEST" is indicated on
the status display, press the v key.
2) Specify a mode value with the < or > key. After "TEST DEVLP UNIT" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the v key.
3) The status display indicates a "DEVELOPER CHECK" message as notice and then the mode
is executed.

b. Feeding area test operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key on the control panel. After "TEST" is indicated on
the status display, press the V key.
2) Specify a mode value with the < or > key. After "TEST FEED UNIT" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the v key.
3) The status display indicates a "FEEDER CHECK" message as notice and then the mode is
executed.

c. ITB/drum unit test operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key on the control panel. After "TEST" is indicated on
the status display, press the v key.
2) Specify a mode value with the < or > key. After "TEST ITB&DRM" is indicated on the status
display, press the v key.
3) The status display indicates a "ITB/DRUM CHECK" message as notice and then the mode is

4 - 79
CHAPTER 4

executed.

d. Duplexing unite test operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key on the control panel. After "TEST" is indicated on
the status display, press the V key.
2) Specify a mode value with the < or > key. After "TEST DPLX UNIT" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the v key.
3) The status display indicates a "DUPLEX CHECK" message as notice and then the mode is
executed.

4 - 80
 CHAPTER 4

3. Fixing cleaning mode

This mode removes the toner adhesion on the upper and lower fixing rollers.

a. Fixing cleaning mode operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key. After "FUSER CLEANING" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the V key.
2) The status display indicates a "EXECUTING" message. The printer performs the sequence
for the fixing unit cleaning and picks up a sheet of print paper from the cassette. The clean-
ing is executed by delivering the sheet.
3) After the cleaning is completed successfully, the status display indicates a "CLEANING
DONE" message. If the cleaning is done unsuccessfully, the status display will indicate a
"CLEANING ERROR" message. Press any key on the control panel to cancel the error.

Note: 1. There must be a sheet of blank paper or more loaded in the cassette.
2. The fixing cleaning mode may not be executed if a failure has occurred in the print-
er. Therefore, confirm if there is a failure in the printer before executing this mode.

4. Memory Read mode (DC controller)

This mode reads the adjust-data (15 items in the shaded area of Table 4-9-1) stored in the DC
controller EEPROM (NVRAM) into the video controller RAM.

Video controller PCB DC controller PCB

RAM

Write EEPROM

EEPROM

Figure 4-9-4

a. Memory Read mode operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key. After "READ ENG NVRAM" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the v key.
2) If when the adjust-data are read into the video controller RAM successfully, the status dis-
play panel will post a "READ MEM DONE" message. If not, the status display will indicate
a "READ MEM ERROR" message. In this case, turn OFF the power and ON again to enter
the service mode, and then try again according to the procedures 1) and 2).

4 - 81
CHAPTER 4

5. Memory Read mode (video controller)

This mode reads the adjust-data (15 items in the shaded area of Table 4-9-1) for the backup
stored in the EEPROM (NVRAM) into the RAM on the video controller.

Video controller PCB DC controller PCB

RAM

Write EEPROM

EEPROM

Figure 4-9-5

a. Memory Read mode operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key. After "READ VDO NVRAM" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the V key.
2) If when the adjust-data are read into the video controller RAM successfully, the status dis-
play will post a "READ MEM DONE" message. If not, the status display will indicate a "READ
MEM ERROR" message. In this case, turn OFF the power and ON again to enter the serv-
ice mode, and then try again according to the procedures 1) and 2).

4 - 82
 CHAPTER 4

6. Memory Write mode

This mode confirms and changes the adjust-data (15 items in the shaded area of Table 4-9-1)
read into the video controller RAM, and writes them into the EEPROMs on the video controller
and DC controller.

Video controller PCB DC controller PCB

RAM

Writes Writes EEPROM

EEPROM

Figure 4-9-6

a. Memory Write mode operation procedures

1) Select a mode menu with the < or > key. After "WRITE ENG NVRAM" is indicated on the sta-
tus display, press the V key.
2) The video controller indicates an "EXECUTING" message on the status display as notice and
then the memory write mode is executed.
3) When the adjust-data are read into the video controller EEPROM and the DC controller EEP-
ROM successfully, the status display panel will indicate a "WRITE MEM DONE" message.
If the adjust-data are not read into the EEPROMs successfully, the status display will indi-
cate a "WRITE MEM ERROR" message. In this case, turn OFF the power and ON again to
enter the service mode, and try again according to the procedures 1) through 3).

Note: Adjust-values
The adjust-values are data peculiar to the engine, which are stored in the DC controller
EEPROM when shipped from the factory. Normally, when in the service mode, the
adjust-values stored in the RAM on the DC controller or the video controller are indi-
cated.
Note that if the adjust-values are changed and the memory write mode is implemented,
the values stored in the DC controller EEPROM will be also changed. Therefore, do NOT
change the adjust-values.

4 - 83
CHAPTER 4

X. LOCATION OF CONNECTORS

J209
J1013

J1014

J1019
J1001
J1018 J1016
J87
J1002
JA1 J1012
J86
J51 J1011 J9001
J85 J9002
J1
J83 J52 J75
J50
J84
J33 J82 J9004
J80 J81
J32
J31 J1306
J110 J1307 J3
J105
J106 J1305
J101 J801
J1301 J4 J2

J30
J102
J103
J104

J109

J205

J208
J203 J206 J701
J201 J204

J40 J1015
J1017
J1006
J1010
J1022
J1008
J1007
J43 J1003
J1101
J1102 J1009
J42 J551 J1004 J77
J76 J71
J601 J74 J1103
J41
J602

J501 J9003
J60
J61 J601

J72 J602 J21

J305
J18 J24
J73 J27
J23
J22 J304
J16 J14
J301 J17 J26
J78
J10 J15
J70 J11
J12 J25
J13

Figure 4-10-1

4 - 84
 CHAPTER 4

J3110
J3109
J3108
J3107
J3106
J3105
J3101
J88 J3111
J3104 J3102

J87 J3103
J54
J53 J93
J52
J89 J91
J94 J82
J84
J57
J55 J56 J92
J81 J83 J2102

J90

J85 J86

J57 J58
J102
J59 J101

J3001
J100
J3003
J3002

Figure 4-10-2

4 - 85
CHAPTER 4

This page intentionally left blank

4 - 86
 APPENDIX

I. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1 III. LIST OF SIGNALS ..................... A-31
II. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ... A-25 IV. MESSAGE TABLE...................... A-37
 APPENDIX

I. GENERAL TIMING CHART

Timing chart for WAIT period

M-CPU ON
Power-ON command 100˚C (Unit: second)
Sequence WAIT STBY
Bk developing Y, M, C developing Image density
Mechanical initialization Initialization (ITB unit initialization) control
unit initialization (Fixing unit/pick-up system initialization) unit initialization
(Refer to A-2) (Refer to A-2) (Refer to A-21, 22)
Standby temperature
1 Upper fixing heater (HU) 163˚C

2 Lower fixing heater (HL) 163˚C

Low speed
3 92-fan (FM1) rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

6 ITB home position detection HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 5.00

Counter clockwise 1.55 0.05

7 Fixing motor (M2) rotation 0.5 7.15 3.75 3.75 4.60
1.54

0.61 1.85 0.15 1.90

8 Drum motor (M3)

0.71 1.21 4.49

9 Pick-up motor (M1)
signall

10 Registration clutch (CL1)

0.61 1.01 0.25 ITB unit contact period

11 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

0.16 3.42
12 Primary charging bias (AC)

2.36 2.47 0.77 2.04 5.87

13 Primary charging bias (DC)

2.34
2.42 3.66 1.25 6.58
0.43 3.08 3.18 1.29 2.76
14 Primary transfer DC bias

Negative bias 3.00 0.47 2.08 Positive bias

15 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch 1.11

3.08 Positive bias

16 Secondary transfer DC bias 1.29

2.19 Negative bias 0.35 1.85 2.13

17 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.37 2.24 2.03 ITB cleaning roller contact period

18 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

19 ITB cleaning (DC) bias 3.13

Positive bias Negative bias

A-1
APPENDIX

Timing chart for Bk toner cartridge initialization

Bk developing unit
initialization start command (Unit: second)
Sequence WAIT

5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

1.3 0.45 1.61 Bk cartridge

1 Developing rotary motor (M5) take-out position

1.2 0.07 1.2 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
2 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.07 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.91

0.7 Counter clockwise rotation 0.49 Clockwise rotation 1.41

3 Toner cartridge contact sensor
Separation 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
4 Developing bias AC Contact 0.96

5 Developing bias DC 0.96 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31

Timing chart for Y, M, C toner cartridge initialization

Y, M, C developing unit
initialization start command (Unit: second)
Sequence WAIT

5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

1.3 0.45 0.45 0.45 1.61 Bk cartridge

1 Developing rotary motor (M5) take-out position

1.2 0.07 1.2 0.96 0.96 0.96

2 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.07 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.91

Counter clockwise rotation Clockwise rotation

0.49 1.41
3 Toner cartridge contact sensor Clockwise rotation

Separation
4 Toner LED Contact 2.72 2.72 2.23

3.75 3.75 3.75

5 Toner level detection 2.72 2.72 2.25

6 Toner cartridge presence/absence 0.9 0.9 1.4

A-2
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one A4-size sheet (Full-color mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence WAIT INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7

Standby temperature Print temperature Standby temperature

1 Upper fixing heater (HU)

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

Low speed 600 Low speed
3 92-fan (FM1) rotation rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

4.60
6 Fixing motor (M2)

0.10 2.36
7 Drum motor (M3)

1.2
8 Pick-up motor (M1)

9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3) 1.35 0.5

2.10 0.5
10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2)
0.05
0.75 0.75 0.75
Counter clockwise rotation Clockwise rotation
0.49 0.49 0.49
0.75 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
0.49
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21

0.01 0.45
12 Developing rotary motor (M5) 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
BK M C Y
2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 1.76
13 Primary charging bias (AC)
2.44
14 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 0.38

Between-color 3.86 3.86 3.66 3.66

15 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.10 0.76 1.10 0.76

3.86 3.86
16 Developing bias (DC) 1.10 1.10 3.86 1.10 1.10 3.86

1.38 3.88 1.38 3.88 3.88 1.38 1.38

17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.38 1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53

19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A-3
APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one A4-size sheet (Full-color mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7

3.63 1.15
22 Registration clutch (CL1)

2.3 3.88 3.69 3.88

23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4)

24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive) 4.04 6.69

7.76 Between-page bias

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)

4.11 4.29
26 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment

2.3 4.00 3.65 0.5 4.00

27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.48 4.07
28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 2.78
31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

0.2 1.76
32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A-4
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for two consecutive prints on A4 paper(Mono-color mode) - 1/2

/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5

1 Upper fixing heater (HU) Print temperature Standby temperature

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

600 Low speed

3 92-fan (FM1) rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

4.60
6 Fixing motor (M2)

0.10 2.36
7 Drum motor (M3)

0.10 1.2
8 Pick-up motor (M1)

9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3) 1.35 0.5 1.35 0.5

10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2) 2.10 0.5 2.10 0.5

0.05 3.75
Counter clockwise rotation 3.75 0.75
0.75
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.49 0.21 0.21
0.21

0.01 Varies for the color 0.45 Clockwise rotation 0.45 0.45
12 Developing rotary motor (M5) No rotation

2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 1.76

13 Primary charging bias (AC)
2.44
14 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38

Between-color bias/between-page bias

3.66 3.66
15 Developing bias (AC) 1.10 1.10
3.86 3.86
16 Developing bias (DC) 1.10 1.10

3.88 3.88
17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.58 1.38
1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A-5
APPENDIX

Timing chart for two consecutive prints on A4 paper(Mono-color mode) - 2/2

/PRNT signa Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5

22 Registration clutch (CL1) 3.63 3.63 1.15

2.3 0.15 3.69 3.88

23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4)

6.69
4.04
6.69
24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive) 4.04

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative) 7.76 7.76 Between-page bias

4.29 Between-page bias

4.11
4.04 Rough adjustment
4.11 4.29 Fine adjustment
26 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04

2.3 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment 3.99

27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.48 4.07 3.99

28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias 4.07

2.48 4.07 3.99

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive) 4.07

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 4.95 2.78

31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2) 0.2 1.76

A-6
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one A4-size gloss sheet (Full-color mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8

Print temperature Standby temperature

1 Upper fixing heater (HU)

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

Low speed 600 Low speed

3 92-fan (FM1) rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)
4.64 70% low speed rotation
0.15 50% low speed rotation 2.84 4.6
6 Fixing motor (M2) 0.05 in envelope mode

0.1 0.15 50% low speed rotation 0.37 2.36

7 Drum motor (M3)

0.1 0.14 50% low speed rotation 0.1 1.2

8 Pick-up motor (M1)

9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3) 1.35 0.5

2.1 0.5 rotation

10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2)

0.75 0.75 0.75

Counter clockwise rotation 0.49 0.49 0.49
0.75 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
0.49 0.21 0.21 0.21
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.21

0.01 Clockwise rotation

0.45
12 Developing rotary motor (M5) 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
BK M C Y

13 Primary charging bias (AC) 2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 4.21 1.76

2.44
1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 4.21 0.38
14 Primary charging bias (DC)
Between-color 3.86 3.86 3.66 3.66
15 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.1 0.76 1.1 0.76

3.86 3.86
16 Developing bias (DC) 1.1 1.1 3.86 1.1 1.1 3.86

1.38 3.88 1.38 3.88 3.88 1.38 1.38

17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.38 1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53

19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A-7
APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one A4-size gloss sheet (Full-color mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8

3.63 1.1
22 Registration clutch (CL1)

2.3 3.88 3.69 0.1

23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4)

4.04 6.69
24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive)

7.76 Between-page bias

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)
4.11 4.29
Rough adjustment
26 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04

2.3 4.00 3.65 4.00 Fine adjustment

27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.48 4.07
28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 2.78
31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

0.2 1.76
32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A-8
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for two consecutive prints on A4-size gloss paper (Mono-color mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7

1 Upper fixing heater (HU) Print temperature Standby temperature

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

600 Low speed

3 92-fan (FM1) rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

6 Fixing motor (M2) 0.15 50% low speed rotation 2.84 4.6

7 Drum motor (M3) 0.10 0.15 50% low speed rotation

0.37 2.36

8 Pick-up motor (M1) 0.2 0.14 50% low speed rotation 0.1 1.1

9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3) 1.35 0.5 1.35 0.5

2.10 0.5 2.10 0.5

10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2)
Counter clockwise 0.21 0.75 0.75 0.26 0.05
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4) rotation
0.21 0.21

Varies for Clockwise rotation

12 Developing rotary motor (M5) 0.01 the color 0.45 No rotation 0.45
0.45

2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 4.21 1.76

13 Primary charging bias (AC)
2.44
14 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38

Between-color 3.66 3.66

15 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.10 1.10
3.86 3.86
16 Developing bias (DC) 1.10 1.10

3.88 3.88
17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.58 1.38 1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A-9
APPENDIX

Timing chart for two consecutive prints on A4-size gloss paper (Mono-color mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7

3.63 3.63 0.2 0.1 1.1

22 Registration clutch (CL1) 0.2

2.3 0.5 0.15 0.5 3.69 0.5 3.88 0.5

23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4)

5.68
4.04
6.69
4.04
24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive)

7.76 Between-page bias 0.1 Between-page bias

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)
4.29 (CL3)
4.11
4.04 Rough adjustment
4.11 4.29 Fine adjustment
26 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04

2.3 0.5 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment 4.0 0.5

27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch

2.48 4.07 4.0

4.07 4.08
28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

2.48 4.07 4.0

4.07 4.08
29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 4.95 2.78

31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage
0.2 0.5 1.76 0.5
32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A - 10
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one A4-size OHT sheet (Full-color mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8 HP9

1 Upper fixing heater (HU) Print temperature Standby temperature

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

Low speed 600 Low speed
3 92-fan (FM1) rotation rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

6 Fixing motor (M2) 0.15 33% low speed rotation 0.55 4.6

7 Drum motor (M3) 0.10 0.15 33% low speed rotation 0.37 2.36

0.10 0.14 0.10 1.2

8 Pick-up motor (M1) 33% low speed rotation

9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3) 1.35 0.5

10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2) 2.1 0.5 0.05

0.75 0.75 0.75

Counter clockwise rotation 0.49 0.49 0.49
0.49 0.75 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21

0.01 Clockwise rotation

12 Developing rotary motor (M5) 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
BK M C Y

13 Primary charging bias (AC) 2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 4.21 1.76

2.44
14 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 4.21 0.38

Between-color 3.86 3.86 3.66 3.66

15 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.1 0.76 1.1 0.76

3.86 3.86
16 Developing bias (DC) 1.1 1.1 3.86 1.1 1.1 3.86

1.38 3.88 1.38 3.881.38 3.88 1.38 1.38

17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53 1.38

1.53
19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A - 11
APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one A4-size OHT sheet (Full-color mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8 HP9

3.63 1.1
22 Registration clutch (CL1)

2.3 0.5 3.88 0.5 3.69 0.5 0.1 0.5

23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4)

4.04 8.4
24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive)

0.13 Between-page bias

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)
4.11 4.79
26 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04

2.3 0.5 4.00 0.5 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment 3.65 0.5 4.00 0.5
27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.48 4.00 4.07 4.00

28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias
2.48 4.00 4.07 4.00
29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 3.67
31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

0.2 0.5 1.76 0.5

32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A - 12
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one Legal-size sheet (Full-color mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8 HP9 HP10 HP11

Print temperature Standby temperature

1 Upper fixing heater (HU)

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

Low speed 600 Low speed
3 92-fan (FM1) rotation rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

4.6
6 Fixing motor (M2)

0.1 2.36
7 Drum motor (M3)

0.1 1.2
8 Pick-up motor (M1)

1.35 0.5
9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3)

2.1 0.5 0.05

10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2)

Counter clockwise
4.49 4.49 4.49 4.49
rotation 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49
0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4)

0.01 0.45 Clockwise rotation 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45

12 Developing rotary motor (M5)
BK M C Y
13 Primary charging bias (AC) 2.44 0.38 4.15 0.38 4.15 0.38 4.15 0.38 4.15 0.38 1.76

2.44
1.04 0.38 4.2 0.38 4.2 0.38 4.2 0.38 4.2 0.38 0.38
14 Primary charging bias (DC)
Between-color 4.39 4.39 4.39 4.39
15 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.1 0.76 0.76 0.76

4.14 4.14 4.14 4.14

16 Developing bias (DC) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

1.38 4.36 4.36 4.36 4.36 4.36 4.36 4.36

17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A - 13
APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing one Legal-size sheet (Full-color mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8 HP9 HP10 HP11

3.63 1.15
22 Registration clutch (CL1)

2.3 0.5 0.15 3.82 0.5 0.15

23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) 0.5 0.5

24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive) 4.04 7.19

7.76 Between-page bias

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)

4.11 4.29
26 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment

2.3 0.5 4.0 0.5 3.77 0.5 4.0 0.5

27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.48 4.0 4.07 4.0

28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

2.48 4.0 4.07 4.0

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 2.78
31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

0.2 0.5 1.76 0.5

32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A - 14
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for two consecutive prints on Legal size paper (Mono-color mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6

1 Upper fixing heater (HU) Print temperature Standby temperature

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

600 Low speed

3 92-fan (FM1) rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

6 Fixing motor (M2) 4.6

7 Drum motor (M3) 0.1 2.36

8 Pick-up motor (M1) 0.1 1.2

9 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL3) 1.35 0.5 1.35 0.5

10 Multi-purpose tray pick-up solenoid (SL2) 2.1 0.5 0.05 2.1 0.5

Counter clockwise rotation 4.49 4.49

0.75 0.75
11 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.49 0.49 0.26

Varies depending on color 0.45 Clockwise rotation 0.45 0.45

12 Developing rotary motor (M5) No rotation

2.44 0.38 0.38 1.76

13 Primary charging bias (AC)
2.3
14 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 0.38 0.38

Between-color 4.14 4.14

15 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.1 1.1
4.39 4.39
16 Developing bias (DC) 0.76 0.76

17 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.58 1.38 1.38 1.38

18 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

19 Primary transfer ATVC

20 Scanner motor

21 Laser drive

A - 15
APPENDIX

Timing chart for two consecutive prints on Legal-size paper (Mono-color mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6

3.63 3.63 1.15

22 Registration clutch (CL1)

3.82 0.15
23 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) 0.5 0.5

4.04 7.19 4.04 7.19

24 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive)

4.11 4.29 Between-page bias 0.15

25 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)

4.29 4.29
4.11 4.11
4.04 Fine adjustment 4.04 Fine adjustment
26 Secondary transfer ATVC

Rough adjustment Rough adjustment

27 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.3 0.5 0.28 0.5

28 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

2.48 4.07 3.97

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

2.48 4.07 3.97

30 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

31 Fixing separation DC high-voltage 4.95 4.95 2.78

0.2 0.5 1.76 0.5

32 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A - 16
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing the 2nd page of A4-size paper (Full-color duplex mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal of the 2nd page Print sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7

1 Upper fixing heater (HU) Print temperature Standby temperature

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

Low speed 600 Low speed

3 92-fan (FM1) rotation rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

4.60
6 Fixing motor (M2)

7 Drum motor (M3) 0.1 2.36

8 Pick-up motor (M1) 0.1 1.2

4.02
3.62
9 Duplexing unit feed command (Note) 1.58
0.05
0.75 0.75 0.75 Duplex pick-up Refeed
Counter clockwise rotation 0.49 0.49 0.49
0.75 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
10 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.49 0.21 0.21 0.21
0.21

11 Developing rotary motor (M5) 0.01 0.45 Clockwise rotation

0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
BK M C Y
12 Primary charging bias (AC) 2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 3.61 0.38 1.76

2.44
13 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38 0.38

Between-color 3.86 3.86 3.66 3.66

14 Developing bias (AC) bias/between-page bias 1.1 0.76 1.10 0.76

3.86 3.86
15 Developing bias (DC) 1.1 1.1 3.86 1.1 1.1 3.86

1.38 3.88 1.38 3.88 3.88 1.38 1.38

16 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.38 1.38

17 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53 1.38 1.53

18 Primary transfer ATVC

19 Scanner motor

20 Laser drive

Note: Refer to A-20 for the duplexing unit internal timing chart

A - 17
APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing the 2nd page of A4-size paper (Full-color duplex mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7

3.63 1.15
21 Registration clutch (CL1)

2.3 0.5 3.88 0.5 3.69 0.5 3.88 0.5

22 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4)

23 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive) 4.04 6.69

7.76 Between-page bias

24 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative)

4.11 4.29
25 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment

2.3 0.5 4.00 0.5 3.65 0.5 4.00 0.5

26 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3)

2.48 4.00 4.07 4.00

27 ITB cleaning (AC) bias

2.48 4.00 4.07 4.00

28 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive)

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

4.95 2.78
30 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

0.2 0.5 1.76 0.5

31 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A - 18
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing the 2nd page of A4-size paper (Mono-color duplex mode) - 1/2
/PRNT signal of the 2nd page Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4

1 Upper fixing heater (HU) Print temperature Standby temperature

2 Lower fixing heater (HL)

600 Low speed

3 92-fan (FM1) rotation

4 60-fan (FM2)

5 40-fan (FM3)

4.6
6 Fixing motor (M2)

7 Drum motor (M3) 0.1 2.36

0.1 1.2
8 Pick-up motor (M1)

4.02
3.62
9 Duplexing unit feed command (Note) 1.58
0.05
Duplex pick-up Refeed
3.75
0.75
10 Toner cartridge motor (M4) 0.49 Clockwise rotation 0.21 0.21

0.01 Varies for the color 0.45 Counter clockwise rotation 0.45
11 Developing rotary motor (M5)

2.44 0.38 3.61 0.38 1.76

12 Primary charging bias (AC)
2.44
13 Primary charging bias (DC) 1.04 0.38 3.66 0.38 3.66 0.38

3.66
14 Developing bias (AC) Between-color bias/between-page bias 1.1
3.86
15 Developing bias (DC) 1.1
3.88
16 Primary transfer DC bias (positive) 1.58 1.38 1.38

17 Primary transfer DC bias (negative)

18 Primary transfer ATVC

19 Scanner motor

20 Laser drive

Note: Refer to A-23 for timing chart for the duplexing unit

A - 19
APPENDIX

Timing chart for printing the 2nd page of A4-size paper (Mono-color duplex mode) - 2/2
/PRNT signal of 2nd page Print sequence command (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4

21 Registration clutch (CL1) 3.63 3.63 1.15

22 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) 2.3 0.5 0.15 0.5 3.88 0.5

23 Secondary transfer DC bias (positive) 4.04 6.69

24 Secondary transfer DC bias (negative) 7.76 Between-page bias

4.11 4.29
25 Secondary transfer ATVC 4.04 Rough adjustment Fine adjustment

26 ITB cleaning roller contact clutch (CL3) 2.3 0.5 3.99 0.5

2.48 4.07
27 ITB cleaning (AC) bias 4.07

2.48 4.07
28 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (positive) 4.07

29 ITB cleaning (DC) bias (negative)

2.78
4.95
4.95
30 Fixing separation DC high-voltage

0.2 0.5 1.76 0.5

31 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2)

A - 20
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for image density control (Dmax & Dhalf)

Density detection contro (Unit: second)
sequence command
Sequence WAIT

Dmax & Dhalf initial rotation Dmax Dhalf Dmax & Dhalf last rotation

1 Dummy TOP signal (D-CPU internal signal) 2.49 Reference TOP signal Dummy TOP signal output (Note) TB position adjustment 2.96

2 ITB home position signal 7.50 3.75 3.75 3.75 7.50 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75
HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8 HP9 HP10 HP11 HP12

3 Fixing motor (M2) 0.05 2.86

0.2 2.36
4 Drum Motor (M3)

0.75 0.75 2.0 3.25 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75

0.2 0.2 1.31 2.56 0.06 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
5 Toner cartridge motor (M4)

0.42 0.42 1.53 2.78 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42

6 Developing rotary motor (M5)

7 Primary charging bias (AC) 0.24 1.14

2.41
8 Primary charging bias (DC) l

6.19
2.35
2.58 4.94 7.44 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
9 Developing bias (AC) 1.1 1.1 3.6 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

6.24
2.01 3.86 3.86
4.99 7.49 3.86 3.86
10 Developing bias (DC) 0.76 3.26 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

2.42 Secondary transfer 1.68

11 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) roller contact

12 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2) 1.92 ITB unit contact 1.76

5.95
4.94
5.95
2.25 2.74 4.94 2.25 2.74 2.74 2.74
13 Toner level sensor

14 Scanner motor

15 Laser drive

Note: During Dmax & Dhalf control, the DC controller ignores the ITB home position signal and controls with the DC controller internal signal (Dummy TOP signal).

A - 21
APPENDIX

Timing chart for image density control (Dhalf)

Density detection contro
sequence command (Unit: second)

Sequence WAIT

Dmax & Dhalf initial rotation Dhalf Dhalf last rotation

1 ITB home position signal 2.49 7.50 3.75 3.75 3.75 2.96
HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8
0.05 2.86
2 Fixing motor (M2)

0.2 2.36
3 Drum Motor (M3)

0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
4 Toner cartridge motor (M4)

0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42

5 Developing rotary motor (M5)

6 Primary charging bias (AC) 0.24 1.14

l 2.41
7 Primary charging bias (DC)

3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7

8 Developing bias (AC) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

3.86 3.86
3.86 3.86
9 Developing bias (DC) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

10 Secondary transfer roller contact clutch (CL4) 2.42 Secondary transfer roller contact 1.68

11 ITB unit contact clutch (CL2) 1.92 ITB unit contact 1.76

2.25 2.74 2.74 2.74

12 Toner level sensor

13 Scanner motor

14 Laser drive

A - 22
 APPENDIX

Timing chart for duplexing unit printing one A4-size sheet

/PRNT signal (Unit: second)
Sequence STBY INTR PRNT LSTR STBY

1 PRINT signal (/PRNT)

2 Top of page signal

Duplexing pick-up Refeed stop Re-refeed

3 Duplex pick-up command

Refeed start
4 Reversing unit paper sensor (PS103)

5 Reversing unit paper stationary sensor (PS105)

6 Refeed sensor (PS102)

7 Registration paper sensor (PS1)

Approx3.8
8 Refeed deflector drive solenoid (SL102)

Approx0.1 Approx1.0
9 Duplex feed roller pressure release solenoid (SL101)

Approx1.1 Approx0.6 Approx3.3

10 Reversing motor (M101)

Counter clockwise rotation Approx1.2 Clockwise rotation Approx0.2

11 Side registration motor (M102)

Approx1.8 Approx7.8
12 Refeed motor (M103)

A - 23
APPENDIX

This page intentionally left blank

A - 24
 APPENDIX

II. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/4)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Cassette 3
paper sensor Paper
Multi-purpose Multi-purpose Last paper 2 delivery sensor Developing rotary Face-up tray OPTION
pick-up tray paper sensor sensor Cassette paper J801 PS8 1 PS7 Toner level sensor Toner cartridge homeposition paper full
solenoid size detection 4 60-fan
PS4 PS3 contact sensor sensor sensor
switch 3 J33 FAN2 PS12
SL1 J30 PS11 PS10 PS9
2 3 2 1
ITB unit Fixing unit

SW803

SW802

SW801
J26 J27 1 1 2 3 Light emitter Light receiver
2 1 pressure sensor
ITB home position 1 2 3 1 2 3 J40 J41 J42
sensor J31
PS6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 PAPER FEEDER F
J25 1 2 3 3 1
PS5 Cassette ITB unit ITB cleaning Secondary J601 J602 Refer to A-28

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 J32
1 2 pick-up contact roller contact transfer roller J76
3 2 1
1 2 3

clutch clutch contact clutch 1 2 3

solenoid 1 2 1 2 3
SL2 CL2 CL3 CL4 1 2 3
J24 J23

92/60FANON
MLTSLON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314 15 J57

/60FANRDY
/CSPSIZE2
/CSPSIZE1
/CSPSIZE0
/MLTLST

CLNCLON

TR2CLON

/DEVCAM
ITBCLON
/ITBHP

LED5V

LED5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415

VR PULL
TONSNS
SGND

SGND

SGND
/MLTP

/FIXPRS

TONLED

/STFULL
/ROTHP
POSNS
24VA

CSTSLON

LED5V

LED5V

LED5V

LED5V

LED5V

LED5V
/CSTP
+5V

SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND
PGND
24VA

24VA

24VA
24VA
N.C.

N.C.
OHT sensor (L)
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS301
J305 J106 J103 J104 J105 J110 J208 J206 DUPLEX UNIT
OHT sensor (R)
Refer to A-27
Multi-purpose tray PCB Feed PCB Developing PCB
PS302 J301 J304 J101 J102 J109 J209 J203 J204 J205 J201 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B13 A13 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 B14 A14
J52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314 15

/SLVMBO
/DRMMBO

SLVMCA
FEEDMBO

SLVMCB
/FEEDMBO

92/60FANON

SLVMBO
DRMMBO

/SLVMAO
FIXMCA
FIXMCB

/DRMMAO
/FIXMBO

PGND
FEEDMAO
/FEEDMAO

/ROTMBO

SLVMAO
DRMMAO
FIXMBO
/FIXMAO

ROTMCA
ROTMCB

ROTMBO
/ROTMAO
FIXMAO

ROTMAO
/92FANRDY
REGCLON
/REGSNS 40-fan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314 15
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LED5V

LED5V

+24VA
SGND

SGND
/ITBW

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J15 FAN3 J51

J14 J50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J13 1 2 Fixing motor Pick-up motor Developing Drum motor Toner cartridge motor
J11 rotary motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J12 J16 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J18 3 2 1 3 2 1 J17
2 1 J77 FAN1 JA1
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14
1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
92-fan
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11121314

/TONLEDON
/DRMMAON
/IUPFEEDM
CL1

92/60FANON
PS1 PS2

/DRMMBON
/92FANRDY
/60FANRDY

/ROTMBON
/FEEDMA

/FEEDMB

/ROTMAON
/40FANRDY

/SLVMON
D

/CSPSIZE0

/CSPSIZE1

/CSPSIZE2
FEEDMA

FEEDMB

TONSNS
/IUPROTM
CLNCLON
40FAN12V

CSTSLON
J10

RESERVE

DUPSCLK
TR2CLON

DRMMA

/ROTHP
/DEVCAM

/OPSIZE2
/FXPRS

/OPSIZE0
/OPSIZE1
40FANNC

/DUPRST
(IOT) J75

ITBCLON

/IUPFIXM

OPCLON
/FIXMA

/FIXMB

DUPRXD
RTONER

SLVMA

SLVMB

DUPTXD
ITB unit Registration Registration

/STFULL
FIXMA

FIXMB

+24VA
DRMMB
PGND

SGND

PGND

PGND

SGND

/OPSET
ROTMA

ROTMB
POSNS
24VA
life sensor paper sensor clutch

/CSTP

+24VA

+24VA
PGND
PGND

SGND
PGND

24VA

/OPP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314

+5V

+5V

+5V
WOHTSNS

REGCLON
OHTSNSR
OHTSNSL

MLTSLON
/REGSNS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/MLTLST

4 3 2 1
/ITBHP

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+24VA
SGND

PGND
/MLTP

/ITBW
+5V

/DEVM

/SEL0

SGND
/SEL2
/SEL1

/IOTR
+5V
/IOTT
J1022 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 J1002 J1016
14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 y B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
J1014 J1017
DC controller PCB
J1015
J1003 J1018
/FXSET

FXTYP

J1103
SGND

SGND

SGND

SGND
THRU

THRL

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SGND PS14 Connector PCB 32 /PDLV 1
SGND

SGND
/ITBSW

/DEVSW

J1011 7 24VA 1 PGND 2

DEVACSEL
/DRMCRGSW 7 Scanner J9001 31 /PFED 2

/DEVPWM
Density

HV1PWM
6 SGND 2 /DEC 3

DEVCLK
6 PCB

HV1CLK
2 1

/DEVDC
/DEVAC
30 3

/HV1AC
sensor /DENB 4 1 1 VCC VCC SGND
ITB unit drawer 5 3
C

F125K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J72 5 /ACC 29 VCLK 4

J1010
DLP 4 2 2 VCC VCC

J1006
switch J78 4
J501

2 1 4 24VA 28 SGND 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 DLSHIFT 5 3 3 VCC VCC
2 J71 SW3 3 SGND 1 27 /VDO0 6
2 DNS 6 2 /BDIN 2 4 4 VCC VCC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Toner cartridge Dram cartridge BD PCB 26 /VDO1 7
1 +5V 7 1 +5V 3 5 5 Reserved PF4
J87 door switch drawer switch 6 6 Reserved PF3 25 /VDO2 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 SW2 J551 24 /VDO3 9 J1307
7 7 Reserved PF2 J1320
HTLC 3 SGND 1 23 /VDO4 10
4 3 2 1 Front door Rear door 8 8 PSWOFF PF1
HTUC 22 SGND 11
J1008
switch 2 PCLK 2 Laser driver 9 9 GND GND

PGND
4 3 2 1 switch

RGV1
High-voltage power supply PCB-2/2
J1013

HTH

+24V
+24V
21 /VDO5 12

50K1
J80 J81 1 SGND 3 PCB 10 10 SGND 5V
5 11 11 GND GND 20 /VDO6 13
SW4 SW5 19 /VDO7 14 J1902 J1901
12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Drum cartridge J1102 25 J1101 12 12 GND /CCLK 1 2 3 4 5
5 3 1 18 /VDOEN 15
J82 J73 J74 13 13 /STS /SBSY J1306 J1501 J1401
4 2 25 SGND 1

J1001
J60 17 PSWOFF 16

J9002
14 14 /CMD /CBSY

FIXGND

FIX
J1 1 24VB 1 4 DRMDO 1 24 VOUT0 2 16 /LSYNC 17 J1305
12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 A4 15 15 /PPRDY /CCRT
2 PGND 2 3 DRMDI 2 23 VOUT1 3 15 SGND 18 1 2 3 4 5
Drum cartridge

J83 J84 3 3 A3 16 16 /CPRDY /RDY

3 24VB 2 DRMCLK 3 22 SGND 4 14 /TOP 19
J3

1 2 3 4 4 2 A2 17 17 /SDM /PRNT
4 SGND 1 DRMCS 4 21 VOUT2 5 13 /PRNT 20

HV1
DEV
1 A1 18 18 GND /TOP
J1004

1 2 3 4 5
5 +5V 5 DRMC5V 5 20 VOUT3 6 B
memory

8 B5 19 19 GND /LSYNC 12 /SDM 21

1 2 4 DRMSET 6 19 SGND 7 11 /RDY 22 1 /TR2N 13
5 VSEL 5 7 B4 20 20 /PFED /PDLV
2 1 3 N.C. 7 18 VOUT4 8 10 /CPRDY 23 2 TR2S 12 J93 J94
4 VCC 4 6 B3 21 21 GND /VDOEN High-voltage
2 SGND 8 17 VOUT5 9 9 /CCRT 24 3 /TR2PWM 11
TH (U) 3 GND 3 5 B2 22 22 GND /VDO7 power supply
J4

J86 1 N.C. 9 16 SGND 10 8 /PPRDY 25 4 /TR1N 10

2 GND 2 B1 23 23 GND /VDO6
15 VOUT6 11 7 /CBSY 26 5 TR1S 9 PCB-1/2
J1007

1 VCCMN 1 J62 J61 24 24 GND /VDO5

2 1 Power 14 VOUT7 12 6 /CMD 27 6 /ICLN 8
25 25 GND

J1301
/VDO4

J1019
J85 SW switch Low-voltage 13 SGND 13 5 /SBSY 28 7 /CLCLK 7
13 N.C. 1 Waste toner 26 26 GND /VDO3
power suppl 12 WHT 14 4 /STS 29 8 /IACPWM 6
1 2 SW6 12 FXLON 2 sensor PS13 J601 27 27 GND /VDO2
unit 11 BK 15 3 /CCLK 30 9 F50KLD 5
11 N.C. 3 28 28 GND /VDO1
2 WTLED 1 10 SGND 16 2 +5V 31 10 /IDCPWM
Heater (U) 4 29 29 GND /VDO0 4
10 FXUON 1 SGND 2 9 /HD 17 1 SGND 32 11 /TR1PWM 3
J1009

9 FXENB 5 30 30 GND GND

Light emitter 3 8 LON 18 12 PGND
FXROF 6 31 31 GND VCLK 2
8 4 7 SGND 19 TR1
2 7 32 32 GND GND 13 +24V 1 J1601
7 THI 5 6 N.C. 20
J2
J5

SW 1 6 ACTYP 8 J602 3 SGND Operation

2 WTSNS 5 SGND 21 J9003 ICL
5 FXSTS 9 Light receiver 4 ILM 22 (+5V) panel J1201
GND

1 VR PULL VCC
FP1
FP2
FP3
FP4

Heater (L) 4 PSWOFF 10 3 /LSENB 23

3 /PCONT 11 J9004 J701
TR2 A
J1012

2 LASER5V 24 J1320
2 N.C. 12 13 1 LASER5V 25 5 7
TH (L) 1 SGND 13

Fixing unit

A - 25
APPENDIX

This page intentionally left blank

A - 26
 APPENDIX

II. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/4)

6 5 4 3 2 1
Duplex deflector Duplex feed roller Reversing unit Face-up Reversing unit Reversing
drive solenoid pressure release stationary paper sensor paper sensor motor
solenoid sensor
PS3103 PS3102 PS3101
SL3102 SL3101
M3102

2 1
J89 J88 J87 D
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J90
1 2

1 2 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5
J3110F J3109F J3108F J3107F J3106F J3105F

J3110M J3109M J3108M J3107M J3106M J3105M

1 2 3 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 J3104M J3104F

+24RA
1
FLAPCLON
+24RA

+24RA
DPFANON3

ATUCLON
SWBSNS
GND
LED5VR

N.C

SWBKM A
SWBKM /A

SWBKM /B
SWBKM B
N.C
FLAPCLON

FUCHSNS

REARSNS

LED5VR
LED5VR
LED5VR

GND

GND

N.C.
GND

REFEEDM /B 1
2
REFEEDM B 2
REFEEDM /A 3
3 M3101 Duplex feed motor
4
REFEEDM A 4

Refeed unit
J3103M J3103F J84 J82 C
1 7 7
SIDEM A 1
2 6 6
SIDEM /A 2
3 5 5 M3103
SIDEM B 3
4 4 4
Duplex driver PCB SIDEM /B 4
5 3 3
N.C 5 Side registration
6 2 2
GND 6 motor
7 1 1
REFDOR 7

J81 J83 J85

8 7 7 1
SIDESNS 8
DUPSCLK

9 6 6 2
/DUPRST

DUPRXD
DUPTXD

GND 9

PWRON
10 5 5 3
LED5VR 10
+24VA

+24VA
SGND

SGND

11 4 4

+24R

+24R
+24R
GND

GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.

REFEEDSNS 11
+5R
+5V

+5V

+5R
12 3 3 PS3105
GND 12
13 2 2
LED5VR 13 Side registration
J3101M
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J3111M
1 2 3
J3102M
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1
home position
B
sensor
J3101F J3111F J3102F J91
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1
J86
1
2
3
J2102F 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS3104
J2102M
Refeed paper sensor
Fuse L
OPCLDRV
/OPSIZE2
/OPSIZE1
/OPSIZE0

/OPFEED
/OPPSET

N J2101
PGND

Realy SW Inlet
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 F.G.
Power supply unit
J54 J53 J56 J55 J2103
J52 J57 Receptacle
To printer To paper feeder

A - 27
APPENDIX

II. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (3/4)

6 5 4 3 2 1

D
Paper feeder
pick-up solenoid

SL3001

1 2
J3003F
J3003M
J57
1 2 C
J3001F J3001M

OPCLDRV
+24VA
15
1 7 N.C.
2 6 /OPSIZE2
3 5 /OPSIZE1
4 4 /OPSIZE0
J59 5 3 /OPPSET
6 2 /OPFEED J100
PGND J3002M J3002F
7 1 Paper feeder PCB 3
8 OPCLDRV OPSLDRV 1 2
To printer GND 2 1
1 14 OPPSET 3
2 13 SGND SW3001
+5V PS3001
3 12
4 11 N.C. Paper feeder
J58 N.C. SW3002 paper sensor
5 10
6 9 N.C.
7 8 N.C.
+24VA SW3003 B
J102 Cassette paper size detection switch

J101

A - 28
 APPENDIX

II. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (4/4)

6 5 4 3 2 1

J2 (Expantion interface 2) J1(Expantion interface 1)

1 Vcc 21 Vcc 1 Vcc 21 Vcc
2 /EXCS0 22 /ERD 2 /EXCS0 22 /ERD
3 GND 23 N.C. 3 GND 23 N.C.

Expantion interface2

Expantion interface1
4
5
ED0
ED4
24
25
ED2
ED6
4
5
ED0
ED4
24
25
ED2
ED6
D
6 ED8 26 ED10 6 ED8 26 ED10
7 ED12 27 ED14 7 ED12 27 ED14
8 GND 28 EA3 8 GND 28 EA3
J8 (Video interface) 9 N.C. 29 N.C. 9 N.C. 29 N.C.
10 /EDACK0 30 GND 10 /EDACK0 30 GND
A1 GND A17 /CPRDY B1 GND B17 /RDY
11 Vcc 31 Vcc 11 Vcc 31 Vcc
A2 GND A18 /PPRDY B2 VCLK B18 /CCRT
12 /EDREQ0 32 /EINT0 12 /EDREQ0 32 /EINT0
To DC controller

A3 GND A19 /CMD B3 GND B19 /CBSY

13 GND 33 N.C. 13 GND 33 N.C.
A4 GND A20 /STS B4 /VDO0 B20 /SBSY
14 ED1 34 ED3 14 ED1 34 ED3
A5 GND A21 GND B5 /VDO1 B21 /CCLK
15 ED5 35 ED7 15 ED5 35 ED7
A6 GND A22 GND B6 /VDO2 B22 GND
16 ED9 36 ED11 16 ED9 36 ED11
A7 GND A23 5VGND B7 /VDO3 B23 5V
17 ED13 37 ED15 17 ED13 37 ED15
A8 GND A24 GND B8 /VDO4 B24 GND
18 EA2 38 EA4 18 EA2 38 EA4
A9 GND A25 PSWOFF B9 /VDO5 B25 FP1
19 GND 39 GND 19 GND 39 GND
A10 GND A26 N.C. B10 /VDO6 B26 FP2
20 /RESET 40 /EWR 20 /RESET 40 /EWR
A11 GND A27 N.C. B11 /VDO7 B27 FP3
A12 GND A28 N.C. B12 /VDOEN B28 FP4
A13 /PFED A29 VCC B13 /PDLV B29 VCC
A14 GND A30 VCC B14 /LSYNC B30 VCC
A15 GND A31 VCC B15 /TOP B31 VCC
A16 /SDM A32 VCC B16 /PRNT B32 VCC C
Video controller Circuit
Note: The device in indicates an

option.

J6 (RAM DIMM) J7(RAM DIMM)

1 GND 25 AD12 49 1 GND 25 AD12 49
2 AD0 26 AD13 50
AD18
AD19 2 AD0 26 AD13 50
AD18
AD19 B
3 AD1 27 AD14 51 AD20 3 AD1 27 AD14 51 AD20
4 AD2 28 A7 52 AD21 4 AD2 28 A7 52 AD21
5 AD3 29 N.C. 53 AD22 5 AD3 29 N.C. 53 AD22 J3 (IEEE1284 interface)
6 AD4 30 Vcc 54 AD23 6 AD4 30 Vcc 54 AD23
Expantion RAM

7 AD5 31 A8 55 N.C. 7 AD5 31 A8 55 N.C. 1 /DTSTROBE 19 nDTSTROBE RET

Expantion RAM

8 AD6 32 DA9 56 AD24 8 AD6 32 DA9 56 AD24 2 D0 20 D0RET

9 AD7 33 N.C. 57 AD25 9 AD7 33 N.C. 57 AD25 3 D1 21 D1RET

To external device
10 Vcc 34 /ARASX 58 AD26 10 Vcc 34 /ARASX 58 AD26 4 D2 22 D2RET
11 N.C. 35 AD15 59 AD28 11 N.C. 35 AD15 59 AD28 5 D3 23 D3RET
12 DA0 36 N.C. 60 AD27 12 DA0 36 N.C. 60 AD27 6 D4 24 D4RET
13 DA1 37 AD16 61 Vcc 13 DA1 37 AD16 61 Vcc 7 D5 25 D5RET
14 DA2 38 AD17 62 AD29 14 DA2 38 AD17 62 AD29 8 D6 26 D6RET
15 DA3 39 GND 63 AD30 15 DA3 39 GND 63 AD30 9 D7 27 D7RET
16 DA4 40 /AXCAS0 64 AD31 16 DA4 40 /AXCAS0 64 AD31 10 /CACK 28 S.G.
17 DA5 41 /AXCAS2 65 N.C. 17 DA5 41 /AXCAS2 65 N.C. 11 BUSY 29 S.G.
18 DA6 42 /AXCAS3 66 N.C. 18 DA6 42 /AXCAS3 66 N.C. 12 CALL 30 /INPUTPRIME RET
19 DA10 43 /AXCAS1 67 N.C. 19 DA10 43 /AXCAS1 67 N.C. 13 SELECT 31 /INPUTPRIME
20 N.C. 44 /ARASX 68 N.C. 20 N.C. 44 /ARASX 68 N.C. 14 HOSTBUSY 32 /FAULT
21 AD8 45 N.C. 69 N.C. 21 AD8 45 N.C. 69 N.C. 15 /AUXOUT1 33 /AUXOUT2
22 AD9 46 N.C. 70 N.C. 22 AD9 46 N.C. 70 N.C. 16 S.G. 34 /AUXOUT3
23
24
AD10
AD11
47
48
/AWE
N.C.
71
72
N.C.
GND
23
24
AD10
AD11
47
48
/AWE
N.C.
71
72
N.C.
GND
17
18
F.G.
+5V
35
36
/AUXOUT4
ACTIVE
A

A - 29
APPENDIX

This page intentionally left blank

A - 30
 APPENDIX

III. LIST OF SIGNALS

A. DC controller

Connector Pin Abbreviation I/O Logic Signal name

J1001 1 /PDLV OUT L PAPER DELIVERY signal
2 /PFED OUT L PAPER FEED signal
3 SGND
4 VCLK IN P VIDEO CLOCK signal
5 SGND
6 /VDO0 IN L VIDEO signal
7 /VDO1 IN L VIDEO signal
8 /VDO2 IN L VIDEO signal
9 /VDO3 IN L VIDEO signal
10 /VDO4 IN L VIDEO signal
11 SGND
12 /VDO5 IN L VIDEO signal
13 /VDO6 IN L VIDEO signal
14 /VDO7 IN L VIDEO signal
15 /VDOEN IN L VIDEO DATA ENABLE signal
16 PSWOFF OUT H POWER SWITCH OFF DETECTION signal
17 /LSYNC OUT L LINE SYNC signal
18 SGND
19 /TOP OUT P TOP OF PAPER signal
20 /PRNT IN L PRINT signal
21 /SDM IN L DATA MODE signal
22 /RDY OUT L READY signal
23 /CPRDY IN L CONTROLLER POWER READY signal
24 /CCRT OUT L STATUS CHANGE signal
25 /PPRDY OUT L PRINTER POWER READY signal
26 /CBSY IN L COMMAND BUSY signal
27 /CMD IN L COMMAND signal
28 SBSY OUT L STATUS BUSY signal
29 /STS OUT L STATUS signal
30 /CCLK IN L CONTROLLER CLOCK signal
31 +5V
32 SGND
J1002 1 +5V
2 /IOTR IN IOT STATUS signal
3 GND
4 /IOTT OUT IOT COMMAND signal
5 /SEL0 IN L For factory use
6 /SEL1 IN L For factory use
7 /SEL2 IN L For factory use
8 /DEVM IN L For factory use
J1003 1 /ITBSW IN H ITB UNIT DRAWER OPEN DETECTION signal
2 SGND
3 /DEVSW IN H TONER CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
4 SGND

A - 31
APPENDIX

Connector Pin Abbreviation I/O Logic Signal name

5 /DRMCRGSW IN H DRUM CARTRIDGE DRAWER OPEN DETECTION
signal
6 SGND
J1004 1 DRMDO OUT H DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY DATE OUTPUT signal
2 DRMDI IN H DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY DATE INPUT signal
3 DRMCLK OUT P DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY SERIAL CLOCK signal
4 DRMCS OUT H DRUM CARTRIDGE MEMORY SELECT signal
5 DRMC5V OUT 5V for drum cartridge memory
6 DRMSET IN H DRUM CARTRIDGE DETECTION signal
7 N.C.
8 SGND
9 N.C.
J1006 1 +5V
2 /BDIN IN L BD INPUT signal
3 SGND
4 24VA
5 /ACC OUT SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal
6 /DEC OUT SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal
7 PGND
J1007 1 LASER5V OUT 5V for laser drive
2 LASER5V OUT 5V for laser drive
3 /LSENB OUT L VIDEO DATA ENABLE signal
4 ILM IN H LASER CURRENT MONITORING signal
5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 SGND
8 LON OUT L LASER FORCED EMISSION signal
9 /HD OUT L PULSE WIDTH RESET signal
10 SGND
11 BK OUT BLACK DOT FORCED EMISSION signal
12 WHT OUT WHITE DOT FORCED EMISSION signal
13 SGND
14 VOUT7 OUT H VIDEO signal
15 VOUT6 OUT H VIDEO signal
16 SGND
17 VOUT5 OUT H VIDEO signal
18 VOUT4 OUT H VIDEO signal
19 SGND
20 VOUT3 OUT H VIDEO signal
21 VOUT2 OUT H VIDEO signal
22 SGND
23 VOUT1 OUT H VIDEO signal
24 VOUT0 OUT H VIDEO signal
25 SGND
J1008 1 SGND
2 PCLK OUT H PRINTER CLOCK signal
3 SGND
J1009 1 WTLED OUT H WASTE TONER DETECTION LED EMISSION signal

A - 32
 APPENDIX

Connector Pin Abbreviation I/O Logic Signal name

2 SGND
3 SGND
4 WTSNS IN H WASTE TONER FULL DETECTION signal
5 VR_PULL IN WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR SENSITIVITY
ADJUSTMENT signal
J1010 1 +24VA
2 SGND
3 /DENB OUT L LED DRIVE signal
4 /DLP OUT L LED INTENSITY signal
5 DLSHIFT OUT L TONER DENSITY DETECTION SETTING signal
6 DNS IN H TONER DENSITY DETECTION signal
7 +5V
J1011 1 /FXSET IN L FIXING UNIT DETECTION signal
2 SGND
3 THRU IN UPPER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION
signal
4 SGND
5 THRL IN LOWER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION
signal
6 SGND
7 FXTYP IN FIXING UNIT TYPE DETECTION signal
8 SGND
J1012 1 N.C.
2 FXLON OUT H LOWER FIXING HEATER DRIVE signal
3 N.C.
4 FXUON OUT H UPPER FIXING HEATER DRIVE signal
5 FXENB OUT H TEMPERATURE CONTROL ENABLE signal
6 FXROF OUT H RELAY DRIVE signal
7 THI IN H FIXING UNIT TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
8 ACTYP IN POWER SUPPLY TYPE DETECTION signal
9 FXSTS IN H FIXING UNIT ABNORMAL DETECTION signal
10 PSWOFF IN H POWER SWITCH OFF DETECTION signal
11 /PCONT OUT H POWER OFF CONTROL signal
12 N.C.
13 SGND
J1013 1 +24VA
2 PGND
3 +24VB
4 SGND
5 +5V
J1014 A1 SGND
A2 /IUPFEEDM OUT H/L PICK-UP MOTOR CURRENT VALUE SWITCHING signal
A3 /FEEDMB OUT P PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signal
A4 FEEDMB OUT P PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signal
A5 /FEEDMA OUT P PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signal
A6 FEEDMA OUT P PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signal
A7 /FXPRS IN H FIXING ROLLER PRESSURE DETECTION signal
A8 +24VA

A - 33
APPENDIX

Connector Pin Abbreviation I/O Logic Signal name

A9 /FIXMB OUT P FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signal
A10 FIXMB OUT P FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signal
A11 /FIXMA OUT P FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signal
A12 FIXMA OUT P FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signal
A13 PGND
B1 PGND
B2 /IUPFIXM OUT H/L FIXING MOTOR CURRENT VALUE SWITCHING signal
B3 /CSPSIZE2 IN CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal
B4 /CSPSIZE1 IN CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal
B5 /CSPSIZE0 IN CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal
B6 POSNS IN H PAPER DELIVERY DETECTION signal
B7 +5V
B8 +24VA
B9 /CSTP OUT L CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal
B10 CSTSLON OUT H CASSETTE PICK-UP SOLENOID signal
B11 TR2TLON OUT H SECONDARY TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT CLUTCH
DRIVE signal
B12 CLNCLON OUT H ITB CLEANING ROLLER CONTACT CLUTCH DRIVE
signal
B13 ITBCLON OUT H ITB UNIT CONTACT CLUTCH DRIVE signal
J1015 1 PGND
2 MLTSLON OUT L MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE
signal
3 REGCLON OUT L REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE signal
4 +24VA
5 /ITBW IN L ITB UNIT LIFE SPAN DETECTION signal
6 /ITBHP IN L ITB HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
7 +5V
8 /MLTP IN L MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY PAPER DETECTION signal
9 /MLTSLT IN L LAST PAPER DETECTION signal
10 /REGSNS IN L REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
11 WOHTSNS Not used
12 OHTSNSL IN H OHT DETECTION signal (left)
13 OHTSNSR IN H OHT DETECTION signal (right)
14 SGND
J1016 1 SGND
2 +5V
3 /DUPRST OUT L DUPLEXING UNIT RESET signal
4 DUPTXD OUT DUPLEXING UNIT SERIAL OUTPUT signal
5 DUPRXD IN DUPLEXING UNIT SERIAL INPUT signal
6 DUPSCLK OUT P SERIAL CLOCK signal
7 +24VA
8 /OPSIZE2 IN L PAPER FEEDER PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal
9 /OPSIZE1 IN L PAPER FEEDER PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal
10 /OPSIZE0 IN L PAPER FEEDER PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal
11 /OPP IN L PAPER FEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
12 /OPSET IN L PAPER FEEDER DETECTION signal
13 PGND

A - 34
 APPENDIX

Connector Pin Abbreviation I/O Logic Signal name

14 /OPCLON OUT L PAPER FEEDER CLUTCH DRIVE signal
J1017 A1 SGND
A2 TONSNS IN H TONER LEVEL DETECTION signal
A3 /TONLEDON OUT L TONER LEVEL DETECTION LED EMISSION signal
A4 /SLVMON OUT L TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR DRIVE signal
A5 SLVMB OUT P TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR DRIVE signal
A6 SLVMA OUT P TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR DRIVE signal
A7 /ROTHP IN L DEVELOPING ROTARY HOME POSITION DETECTION
signal
A8 +24VA
A9 /DRMMAON OUT L DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
A10 DRMMA OUT P DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
A11 PGND
A12 PGND
A13 /92FANRDY IN L 92-FAN READY signal
A14 RTONER Not used
B1 /ROTMBON OUT L DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR DRIVE signal
B2 /IUPROTM OUT DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR CURRENT VALUE
SWITCHING signal
B3 /ROTMAON OUT L DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR DRIVE signal
B4 ROTMB OUT P DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR DRIVE signal
B5 ROTMA OUT P DEVELOPING ROTARY MOTOR DRIVE signal
B6 /STFULL OUT L FACE-DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL DETECTION signal
B7 +5V
B8 +24VA
B9 /DRMMBON OUT L DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
B10 DRMMB OUT P DRUM MOTOR CONTROL signal
B11 /DEVCAM IN L TONER CARTRIDGE CONTACT DETECTION signal
B12 92/60FANON OUT H 92/60-FAN DRIVE signal
B13 /60FANRDY IN L 60-FAN READY signal
B14 RESERVE Not used
J1018 1 /HV1AC OUT L PRIMARY CHARGING AC BIAS DRIVE signal
2 HV1CLK OUT P PRIMARY CHARGING AC CLOCK signal
3 HV1PWM OUT P PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS DRIVE/BIAS VALUE
CONTROL signal
4 /DVDPWM OUT P DEVELOPING BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal
5 /DEVDC OUT L DEVELOPING DC BIAS DRIVE signal
6 DEVCLK OUT P DEVELOPING AC CLOCK signal
7 /DEVAC OUT L DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE signal
8 /DEVACSEL OUT L DEVELOPING AC BIAS COLOR BLACK SWITCH signal
9 F125K OUT P HIGH-VOLTAGE DRIVE FREQUENCY OUTPUT signal
J1019 1 /TR2N OUT L SECONDARY TRANSFER DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE
signal
2 TR2S IN SECONDARY TRANSFER CURRENT VALUE OUTPUT
signal
3 /TR2PWM OUT P SECONDARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE
/BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal

A - 35
APPENDIX

Connector Pin Abbreviation I/O Logic Signal name

4 /TR1N OUT L PRIMARY TRANSFER DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE
signal
5 /TR1S IN PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT VALUE OUTPUT signal
6 /ICLN OUT L ITB CLEANING DC NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal
7 CLCLK OUT P ITB CLEANING CLOCK signal
8 /IACPWM OUT P ITB CLEANING AC BIAS VALUE CONTROL signal
9 F5OKLD OUT P HIGH-VOLTAGE DRIVE FREQUENCY OUTPUT signal
10 /IDCPWM OUT P ITB CLEANING DC POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE/BIAS
VALUE CONTROL signal
11 /TR1PWM OUT P PRIMARY TRANSFER DC POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE/BIAS
VALUE CONTROL signal
12 PGND
13 +24V
J1022 1 PGND
2 /40FANRDY IN L 40-FAN READY signal
3 40FAN12V OUT H 40-FAN DRIVE signal

A - 36
 APPENDIX

IV. MESSAGE TABLE

A. Outline
This appendix discusses statuses and error messages indicated on the status message panel (a
liquid crystal display) and gives their meanings and measurements. Note that service calls are
stated in Chapter IV.
Statuses, operator calls and error service calls are indicated in the first line of the LCD as a
main message with their numbers and messages. The second line may indicate a sub message
that gives the addendum for the main message. A warning message is indicated in the sub mes-
sage in the second line with its number and message.

1. Status Message
The status display notifies the user of the printer operation status while the printer is perform-
ing normally.

2. Warning Message
A warning message indicates that the operator is required to perform some action. However, the
warning does not mean a major error or failure that requires the operator to stop the printer
operation.
Warning messages are indicated in the second line of the LCD, while a READY message is
indicated in the first line.
If multiple warnings have occurred simultaneously, they will be indicated alternately. Note
that warning messages can be non-indicated by setting "WARNINGS" in CONTROL MENU to
"OFF".

Note: A "16 TONER LOW" message will be posted regardless of "ON"/"OFF" of "WARNING".

3. Operator Call Message

An operator call requires the operator to stop the printer operation and perform an action. If
the message is indicated, the printer will stop printing and enter an offline state. After the oper-
ator performs an appropriate action, the printer will resume printing.

4. Error Status Message

An error status indicates that the printer cannot guarantee satisfactory printing. Pressing the
On Line key (error skip operation) may cause the printer to resume printing, however, the result
is not guaranteed.
To print correctly, the operator is required to perform some action and resubmit printing
data.
If an error has occurred and error status is indicated, the printer will stop printing and enter
an offline state.

Note: Errors can be skipped automatically by setting "AUTO ERROR SKIP" in CONTROL
MENU to "ON".

5. Translator Error Message

A translator error indicates that the translator has a problem. Pressing the On Line key (error
skip operation) may cause the printer to resume printing, however, the result is not guaranteed.
To print correctly, the operator is required to perform some action and resubmit printing
data.

A - 37
APPENDIX

If a translator error has occurred and the message is indicated, the printer will stop printing
and enters an offline state.

Note: XX in the number field is replaced by 0 to F of two-digit hexadecimal notation. YYYY in

the message field indicates a message within 14 digits specified to the CPDL translator.

6. Service Call Message

A service call indicates that a major failure has occurred in the printer and that the printer
requires servicing by a service technician.
If a service call is posted, turn OFF the printer and follow each procedure.
In service calls, the codes are classified according to the code number in the number field,
and the error content is indicated with the detailed number.
Service calls fall into as follows.

Code Number Failure Location (Cause)

A Printer engine area.
a Video controller area.
b Communication between the printer controller and video controller.
d Internal software of the video controller.
e Internal software of the video controller.
f Internal software of the video controller.
g Internal software of the video controller.
h Internal software of the video controller.
i Internal software of the video controller.
j Internal software of the video controller.
k Internal software of the video controller.
l Internal software of the video controller.
m Internal software of the video controller.
n Internal software of the video controller.
p Internal software of the video controller.
q Internal software of the video controller.
s Internal software of the video controller.
D0 CPDL translator.
z Communication between the video controller and operating area.

A - 38
 APPENDIX

B. Message Table
a. Status Message

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

00 READY The printer is ready to receive

data and print.
SKIP JOB The printer is skipping a can-
XX celled job.
Note: XX indicates the
interface that has
received a skipped
job.
01 XX Indicates the status of each
utility. (For example, status
print, test print, and etc.)
Note: XX indicates UTILITY
MENU in Figure 1-7-
2 on Page 1-39.
02 WARMING UP The printer is in a wait state
(The printer is warming up).
CALIBRATION The printer is calibrating its
internal settings.
03 SOFT RESET The printer is performing a
soft reset.
HARD RESET The printer is performing a
hard reset.
CANCELING JOB The printer is canceling the
current job.
05 FORM FEED The printer is performing a
form feed.
FORMFEED STOP The printer has stopped form
feeding and is clearing data.
0C DOWNLOADING The printer is downloading
data from the computer.
0D CANCELING I/O The printer is canceling data
XX while using an expansion
interface.
Note: XX indicates the
selected interface
15 ENGINE TEST The printer is printing an
engine test print (It outputs
vertical line patterns).
XX OO The printer is indicating a
message from a host on the
control panel.
A message can be indicated
with up to 16 characters for a
number field (XX) and mes-
sage filed (OO).

A - 39
APPENDIX

b. Warning Message
Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

16 Y TONER LOW Toner is low. Remove the toner cartridge,

M TONER LOW shake it slowly five to six times,
C TONER LOW and reinstall it. If the message
B TONER LOW persists after this operation,
replace the toner cartridge.
17 CASS.1 EMPTY The feed mode is "AUTOMAT- Load paper into the upper cas-
IC" and the upper cassette has sette.
run out of paper.
CASS.2 EMPTY The feed mode is "AUTOMAT- Load paper into the lower cas-
IC" and the lower cassette has sette.
run out of paper.
CASS.EMPTY The cassette designated fromLoad paper into the cassette des-
the application software hasignated from the application soft-
run out of paper. ware.
19 PAPER PRESENT There is paper inside the Pull out the paper cassette and
printer. remove the paper.
1C XX SEND Indicates that the sending Perform a hard reset. Or, turn
buffer is full. the power OFF/ON.
Note: XX indicates the If the printer does not receive
selected data for a specified period of time
interface
(about 20 seconds), the message
(PARALLEL,OPT.I/O).
will disappear.
1F CHECK FD TRAY The face down tray is full. Remove the paper from the face
down tray.
99 CHECK ITB The ITB unit has almost Replace ITB unit.
reached its life.
E0 DRUM WARNING The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge.
almost reached its life (life
warning 1).
E5 FIX.UNIT WARM The fixing unit has almost Replace the fixing unit. (Refer to
reached its life. the fixing unit replacing proce-
dure on Page 4-56.)
EE DENSITY ERROR The density detection sensor Clean the density detection sen-
is dirty. sor with the cleaning brush.
Or, the drum cartridge/ITB Or, reinstall the drum car-
unit is incorrectly installed. tridge/ITB unit correctly.

EF CHECK DRUM The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge.
almost reached its life (life Note: The printer will enter
warning 2). "98 CHECK DRUM" in
Or, the drum cartridge has approximately 250
been almost full of waste sheets after this state
toner. and will forcibly stop
printing.
WO MARK TIME The printer is handling com- Wait for a while.
plex data, which will take ten
minutes or more.

A - 40
 APPENDIX

c. Operator Call Message

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

11 NO PAPER XX Paper out. Install the cassette correctly.

There is no paper on the Select another paper feed source
currently selected paper feed in Feeder Selection.
source, or the cassette is not Or, load paper of the specified
installed. size into the currently selected
Note: XX indicates the paper feed source.
paper size required
by the printer.
12 PRINTER OPEN Printer door open. Close the cover indicated with xx
XX Either the printer's rear and press On Line.
cover or the duplex unit cover
is open.
Note: XX indicates the
name of the opened
cover.
13 PEPER JAM Paper feed check. Open the cover indicated with xx,
XX A paper jam has occurred. remove the jammed paper, and
Note: xx indicates the loca- press On Line.
tion of the jam or the
name of the cover
that should be
accessed.
If the location of the
jam cannot be identi-
fied, probable loca-
tion(s) will be indicat-
ed by turns.
14 NO B CART. No toner cartridge of the color Ensure the toner cartridge is
NO C CART. specified is installed in the positioned correctly.
NO M CART. printer, or the toner cartridge
NO Y CART. is not installed correctly.
CART.CHECK Toner is low.
16 B TONER LOW The toner cartridge has almost Replace the toner cartridge and
C TONER LOW run out of toner. press On Line.
M TONER LOW This message is posted only
Y TONER LOW when "TONER LOW" is set to
"OFF" and can be skipped.
Normally, when "TONER LOW",
"1G X TONER EMPTY" will be
indicated.
18 NO CASETTE 1 The printer cannot perform Ensure the cassette is installed
duplex printing because the in the printer correctly.
cassette is not installed in the
printer.
Or, paper has been picked
up from the paper feeder.

CAS.FEED REJ. The media type set in TRAY Change the paper feed source or
MEDIA TYPE is not available the media type.

A - 41
APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

from the selected paper feed Pressing On Line causes the

source. printer to print with plain paper.

19 FEEDING PAPER Automatic paper clearing. Press On Line to resume printing

The printer is automatically from the discontinued page.
clearing itself of the previously
fed paper.
1F FD TRAY FULL The face down tray is full. Remove the paper on the face-
down tray. Or, change the paper
delivery tray.
Pressing On Line causes the
printer to skip the error and a
"1F CHECK FD TRAY" message
will be indicated.
1G B TONER EMPTY Toner empty. Replace the toner cartridge and
C TONER EMPTY The toner cartridge of the press On Line.
M TONER EMPTY specified color is empty.
Y TONER EMPTY
96 CHECK FU TRAY The printer cannot perform Close the face-up tray.
duplex printing because the
face-up tray is open.
98 CHECK DRUM Drum cartridge expiration. Replace the drum cartridge.
The photosensitive drum has
reached its life, or the drum
cartridge has been full.
99 CHECK ITB The ITB unit is incorrectly Install the ITB unit correctly and
installed or is not installed. turn OFF the power and ON
again.
If the message is not cleared after
trying this action two to three
times, replace the ITB unit.
CHANGE ITB The ITB unit has almost Replace the ITB unit.
reached its life.
9B MEDIATYPE ERR Media type specified in printer Set the correct media type to cas-
driver does not match madia sette or multi-purpose tray.
being printed on. Printing
stops until problem is
resolved.
9C CART.MOVING The printer is in a toner car-
XX tridge replacing mode.
Note: XX indicates the
name of the cartridge
that is coming to the
cartridge entrance.
When the cartridge
has stopped moving,
it indicates the name
of the cartridge that
is at the entrance.

A - 42
 APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

9D TRAY SIZE The position of the paper Correctly set the paper guide for
guide for the paper cassette or the paper cassette or the paper
the paper size dial is incorrect. size dial. Alternatively, select
another feed source by pressing
Feed Selection.
E0 DRUM WARNING The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge.
almost reached its life (life Note: If an error skip is per-
warning 1). formed, the previously
posted warning mes-
sage on the first line will
be indicated on the sec-
ond line.
E2 CHECK DRUM The drum cartridge is incor- Reinstall the drum cartridge cor-
rectly installed. rectly.
E8 NO FIX.UNIT The fixing unit is not installed Install the fixing unit, or ensure
or is incorrectly installed. the fixing unit is installed cor-
rectly.
PC PC LOAD XX Requires paper replacing or Select the paper feed source that
cassette replacing. holds the required paper with the
The paper size set in the cur- feeder selection key.
rently selected paper feed Or, replace the paper on the
source does not match with selected paper source to the
the paper size set in the appli- paper size set in the application.
cation software. Or, the paper
size set for the enlarge-
ment/reduction printing does
not match with the current
output paper size.
Note: xx indicates the
paper size set by the
host.
EF CHECK DRUM The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge.
almost reached its life (life Note: The printer will enter
warning 2). "98 CHECK DRUM" in
Or, the waste toner has almost approximately 250
been full. sheets after this state
and will forcibly stop
printing.
EG DRUM ERRROR A drum cartridge EEPROM Replace the drum cartridge.
error.

A - 43
APPENDIX

d. Error Status
Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

21 DATA OVERFLOW Data processing time over. Change RESOLUTION from

The data is too complex for "FINE" to "QUICK" from the
the video controller to handle printer driver and try again.
within a specified period of • If the error persists after the
time. forgoing action, set BAND SEND-
ING in QUALITY MENU to "OFF"
and send data again.
• Press On Line to resume
printing. However, the page
where the error has occurred will
not be printed satisfactorily.
23 MEMORY FULL Down load memory over flow. • Press On Line to resume
The memory over flow has printing. However, the failure-
occurred, as the amount of related data will not be printed.
down loaded data (down load • Press Reset to perform a soft
fonts, overlays, and etc.) is too reset and do one of the following
large for the memory to store. to increase the RAM capacity,
and try again.
1. Perform a hard reset, or turn
the printer OFF and ON
again. (Caution: This erases
all previously downloaded
data.)
2. Reduce PAGE PROTECT or
SYSTEM MEMORY in QUAL-
ITY MENU, or BUFFER SIZE
in INTERFACE MENU.
3. Install an optional expansion
RAM DIMM.
26 MEMORY FULL Work memory over. • Press On Line to continue
Built-in work memory (video printing. However, all of the fail-
controller) is running out of its ure-related functions are not
capacity, so the selected func- available.
tions cannot be activated. • Press Rest to perform a soft
reset, increase SYSTEM MEMO-
RY in QUALITY MENU, and try
again. If the SYSTEM MEMORY
cannot be increased to its
required amount, do one of the
following to increase the RAM
capacity:
1. Perform a hard reset or turn
the printer OFF and ON
again. (Caution: This eases
all previously downloaded
data.)
2. Reduce PAGE PROTECT in
QUALITY MENU or BUFFER
SIZE in INTERFACE MENU.

A - 44
 APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

3. Install an optional expansion

RAM DIMM.
27 JOB REJECT The required emulation does Press On Line to resume print-
not exist, or the printer cannot ing. The data that has had the
start printing. error may not be printed satis-
factorily.
30 MEMORY FULL There is not enough work • Press On Line to resume
memory for system data han- printing. The data that has had
dling. the error may not be printed, or
if printed, the results may be
unsatisfactory.
• Press Reset to perform a soft
reset and do one of the following
to increase the RAM capacity,
and try again.
1. Perform a hard reset or turn
the printer OFF and ON.
(Caution: This erases all pre-
viously downloaded data.)
2. Reduce PAGE PROTECT or
SYSTEM MEMORY in QUAL-
ITY MENU, or BUFFER SIZE
in INTERFACE MENU.
3. Add an optional expansion
RAM DIMM.
Or, if this error occurred while • Press On Line to change the
the printer was ON, it indi- memory configuration in the
cates that the memory config- NVRAM to its required capacity.
uration has been changed Turn OFF the printer to change
(expansion RAM has been the memory configuration to its
removed), so there is not previous configuration (reinstall
enough memory for PAGE the removed expansion RAM
PROTECT, SYSTEM MEMO- DIMM), and try again.
RY, and BUFFER SIZE set in • Press Rest to perform a soft
the NVRAM. reset and do one of the following
to increase the RAM capacity:
1. Perform a hard reset or turn
the printer OFF and ON
again. (Caution: This eases
all previously downloaded
data.)
2. Reduce PAGE PROTECT or
SYSTEM MEMORY in QUAL-
ITY MENU or BUFFER SIZE
in INTERFACE MENU.
3. Install an optional expansion
RAM DIMM.
32 DUPLEX REJECT Duplex printing is not possi- • Press On Line to resume
ble, as there is not enough printing. Note that the duplex

A - 45
APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

memory for PAGE PROTECT. data must be broken up and

printed on two pages.
Press Reset to perform a soft
reset, set PAGE PROTECT in
QUALITY MENU to its printable
value for the output paper size,
and try again. If PAGE PROTECT
cannot be maintained in QUALI-
TY MENU, do one of the following
to increase the RAM capacity:
1. Reduce PAGE PROTECT in
QUALITY MENU or BUFFER
SIZE in INTERFACE MENU.
2. Erase the downloaded data.
3. Install an optional expansion
RAM.
Or, the printer received duplex • Press On Line to resume
data for a paper size unsuit- printing. Note that the duplex
able for automatic duplex data must be broken up and
printing. printed on two pages.
• Press Reset to perform a soft
reset, change the paper size suit-
able for duplex printing, and try
again.
33 WORK MEM FULL The work memory cannot be Press On Line to resume
maintained, as the print mode printing. Note that the error-
is inadequate. related functions will be unavail-
able.
• Press Reset to perform a soft
reset, do one of the following to
increase the RAM capacity, and
try again.
1. Perform a hard reset or turn
the printer OFF and ON
again. (Caution: This eases
all previously downloaded
data.)
2. Reduce PAGE PROTECT or
SYSTEM MEMORY in QUAL-
ITY MENU, or BUFFER SIZE
in INTERFACE MENU.
3. Install an optional expansion
RAM DIMM.
36 DEGRADE The data was too large or com- If RESOLUTION in the driver
plex for the printer to handle. is set "FINE", reset it to "QUICK",
and try again.
• Press On Line to skip print-
ing.
• Press Reset to perform a soft

A - 46
 APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

reset and increase PAGE PRO-

TECT in QUALITY MENU, and
then try again. If PAGE PRO-
TECT cannot be maintained in
QUALITY MENU, do one of the
following to increase the RAM
capacity.
1. Reduce BUFFER SIZE in
INTERFACE MENU or SYS-
TEM MEMORY in QUALITY
MENU.
2. Erase the down loaded data.
3. Install an additional expan-
sion RAM.
37 MEDIA REJECT The selected media type can- Press On Line to resume print-
not be printed in the printer. ing. Or, set the media type to
"PLAIN".
38 LOW QUALITY The data was too large or com- • Press On Line to resume
plex for the printer to handle. printing. Note that the resolu-
tion will be lowered.
• Press Reset to perform a soft
reset and do the one of the fol-
lowing to increase the RAM
capacity, set PAGE PROTECT to
its printable value for the output
paper size, and try again.
1. Perform a hard reset or turn
the printer OFF and ON
again. (Caution: This eases
all previously downloaded
data.)
2. Reduce SYSTEM MEMORY
in QUALITY MENU or
BUFFER SIZE in INTER-
FACE MENU.
3. Install an optional expansion
RAM DIMM.
41 CHECK PRINT Requires a print check. Press On Line to resume print-
A failure has temporarily ing. The printer will print from
occurred while printing an the page where the error has
image. occurred.
Or, the paper size in the cas- When picking up from the cas-
sette or tray does not match sette, match the paper set in the
with the specified size. cassette with the specified paper
size. When picking up from the
tray, match the paper set in the
tray with the specified paper size,
and then press On Line. The
printer will resume printing from

A - 47
APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

the page where the error has

occurred. Note that when pick-
ing up from the tray, even if the
loaded paper does not match
with the specified size, pressing
On Line key forces the printer to
print with the loaded paper.
42 I/O ERROR There is a major problem with Turn OFF the printer, check that
the expansion interface. the expansion interface is cor-
rectly installed, and then turn
ON the printer again.
43 I/O ERROR There is a minor problem with Press On Line to try again.
the expansion interface.

52 IMAGEMODE REJ The printer cannot handle the • Alternate with the driver that
received data format in the corresponds to the format.
image mode. • Press On Line to resume
printing. However, the data that
caused the error cannot be print-
ed.
53 PACKET ERROR The printer has received Press On Line to resume print-
unreadable packet data. ing. However, the data that has
caused the error cannot be print-
ed.
• Try again with the latest
printer driver.
• Check that the interface is
correctly connected.

0F OPTION ERROR An option has been removed Turn OFF the printer, reinstall
while the printer is ON, or the the option correctly, and turn ON
option is not correctly the printer again.
installed.

A - 48
 APPENDIX

e. Translator Error
Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

D0-XX YYYY There is a problem with the Replace the video controller PCB.
firmware of the CPDL transla-
tor.

A - 49
APPENDIX

f. Service Call
Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

A50 SERVICE CALL Fixing unit failure. Refer to "VI. Error Status" in
XX Note: XX is replaced by a Chapter 4.
two-digit number in
the sub message.
A51 SERVICE CALL Laser/scanner unit failure.
XX Note: XX is replaced by a
two-digit number in
the sub message.
A54 SERVICE CALL Motor failure.
XX Note: XX is replaced by a
two-digit number in
the sub message.
A55 SERVICE CALL Printer failure.
XX Note: XX is replaced by a
two-digit number in
the sub message.
A56 SERVICE CALL Duplex unit communication
XX failure.
A57 SERVICE CALL Duplex unit failure.
XX Note: XX indicates a two-
digit number on the
sub message display.
a60 SERVICE CALL DMA controller error.
Indicates that there is a DMA
controller error during a self-
test after powering ON the
printer.
a61 SERVICE CALL Built-in ROM checksum error.
The data in the ROM utilized
in the video controller is cor-
rupt.
a63 SERVICE CALL Built-in RAM error.
The DRAM utilized in the
video controller cannot read
and write properly.
a68 SERVICE CALL The NVRAM (EEPROM) uti-
lized in the video controller
cannot read and write proper-
ly.
a69 SERVICE CALL Expansion interface error.
A response from the expan-
sion interface PCB cannot
output to the video controller
PCB within a specified period
of time.
a75 SERVICE CALL Top signal error.
When the /PRNT signal is
false, the TOP signal is output
to the video controller PCB

A - 50
 APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

from the DC controller PCB. Refer to "VI. Error Status" in

a77 SERVICE CALL No /LSYNC signal. Chapter 4.
The DC controller PCB did not
output a /LSYNC signal to the
video controller PCB within a
specified period of time.
a92 SERVICE CALL Communication error between
the CPU and control panel
PCB.
a93 SERVICE CALL Interrupt error between the
CPU and control panel PCB.
b80 SERVICE CALL Command status timeout.
The DC controller did not send
a status to the video controller
PCB within a specified period
of time after receiving a com-
mand.
b81 SERVICE CALL Command status parity error.
There is a command or status
parity error on a communica-
tion between the DC controller
PCB and video controller PCB.
b82 SERVICE CALL Illegal operator call.
An unspecified operator call is
sent on a communication
between the DC controller
PCB and video controller PCB.
b83 SERVICE CALL Illegal service call.
An unspecified service call is
sent on a communication
between the DC controller
PCB and video controller PCB.
b84 SERVICE CALL /PPRDY signal timeout.
The DC controller PCB did not
send a /PPRDY signal to the
video controller within a spec-
ified period of time after
receiving a /CPRDY signal.
b85 SERVICE CALL TOP signal timeout.
The DC controller PCB did not
send a TOP signal to the video
controller PCB within a speci-
fied period of time after receiv-
ing a /PRNT signal.
b86 SERVICE CALL Wrong command.
The video controller PCB has
sent an unspecified command
to the DC controller PCB.

A - 51
APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

b87 SERVICE CALL Wrong printer engine. Refer to "VI. Error Status" in
The video controller PCB is Chapter 4.
connected to the wrong print-
er engine.
b88 SERVICE CALL Wrong command timing.
The video controller PCB has
sent a command to the DC
controller PCB at an unspeci-
fied timing.
d01 SERVICE CALL A wrong expansion RAM is
attached to Expansion Slot 1.
d02 SERVICE CALL A wrong expansion RAM is
attached to Expansion Slot 2.
d31- d34 SERVICE CALL The printer is using a NVRAM
(EEPROM) that has a failure.
Other dXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by alpha- controller.
bet and num-
ber.)
eXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by alpha- controller.
bet and num-
ber.)
fXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by alpha- controller.
bet and num-
ber.)
g01 SERVICE CALL A failure has occurred on a
bus line on the expansion
interface PCB.
g10 SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
firmware program of the video
controller.
gB0 SERVICE CALL The printer is using an expan-
sion interface PCB that has a
failure.
h10 SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
h1F firmware program of the video
controller.
h20 SERVICE CALL There has been a failure while
h21 the printer was downloading
fonts to the built-in DRAM or
an expansion RAM.
h22 SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
firmware program of the video
controller.

A - 52
 APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

h28 SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the Refer to "VI. Error Status" in
h29 firmware program of the built- Chapter 4.
in ROM.
h2A SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
h2F firmware program of the video
h30 controller.
h31 SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the font
in the built-in ROM.
h34 - 37,3F SERVICE CALL There has been a failure while
the printer was downloading
fonts to the built-in DRAM or
an expansion RAM.
h41 SERVICE CALL There has been a failure while
the printer was downloading
fonts to the built-in DRAM or
an expansion RAM.
h48 - 54,5F SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
firmware program of the built-
ROM.
h61 SERVICE CALL There has been a failure while
the printer was downloading
fonts to the built-in DRAM or
an expansion RAM.
h68 - h74 SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
firmware program of the built-
in ROM.
Other hXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
iXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
jXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
kXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alpha-bet or
number.)
lXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.

A - 53
APPENDIX

Status
Number Field Message Field
Meaning Action

alphabet or Refer to "VI. Error Status" in

number.) Chapter 4
mXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
nXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
pXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
qXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the built-
ced by and in ROM.
alphabet or
number.)
rXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
sXX SERVICE CALL There is a failure on the
(XX is repla- firmware program of the video
ced by and controller.
alphabet or
number.)
zXX CYCLE POWER A failure has occurred on a
(XX is repla- communication between the
ced by and video controller and display
alphabet or unit. Or, there is a failure on
number.) the firmware program of the
video controller.

A - 54
 Prepared by
PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS QUALITY ADVANCEMENT DIV.
PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION DEPT.
CANON INC
Printed in Japan

REVISION 0 ( MAY. 2000 )

5-1, Hakusan 7–chome, Toride-City, Ibaraki-Pref. 302-8501, Japan

The printing paper contains
70% waste paper.

PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1299XX2.00 CANON INC.